InteliMains

510
Mains supervision controller

SW version 1.0.0
1 Document information 5
2 System overview 13
3 Applications overview 27
4 Installation and wiring 31
5 Controller setup 58
6 Communication 209
7 Technical data 227
8 Appendix 229

Copyright © 2023 ComAp a.s.

Written by Jakub Slavata
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: [email protected], www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 5 2.8.1 CM3-Ethernet 20
1.1 Declaration of Conformity 5 2.8.2 CM2-4G-GPS 21
1.2 Clarification of Notation 5 2.8.3 CM-RS232-485 21
1.3 About this Global Guide 6 2.8.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP 21
1.4 Legal notice 6 2.9 CAN Extension Modules 22
1.5 General warnings 9 2.9.1 Inteli AIN8 22
1.5.1 Remote control and programming 9 2.9.2 Inteli IO8/8 23
1.5.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 9 2.9.3 IGL-RA15 23
1.5.3 Dangerous voltage 9 2.9.4 IGS-PTM 24
1.5.4 Adjust the setpoints 9 2.9.5 Inteli AIO9/1 24
1.6 Functions and protections 10 2.9.6 Inteli AIN8TC 25
1.7 Certifications and standards 10 2.9.7 I-AOUT8 25
1.8 Document history 10 2.9.8 IS-AIN8 25
1.9 Symbols in this manual 11 2.9.9 IS-BIN16/8 26

2 System overview 13 3 Applications overview 27

2.1 General description 13 3.1 MCB 27
2.1.1 The key features of InteliMains 510 14 3.1.1 MCB application with one mains
2.2 Getting Started 15 incomer 27

2.3 Measurement methods 15 3.1.2 MCB application with multiple mains

incomers 28
2.3.1 True RMS measurement 16
3.2 MGCB 29
2.4 AC measurement 16
3.2.1 MGCB application with one mains
2.4.1 AC measurement settings 16
incomer 29
2.4.2 Frequency measurement accuracy
and resolution 16
4 Installation and wiring 31
2.4.3 PF measurement and evaluation 16
4.1 Package content 31
2.5 Communication peripherals 17
4.2 Controller installation 32
2.6 Configurability and monitoring 17
4.2.1 Dimensions 32
2.6.1 Supported configuration and
4.2.2 Mounting 32
monitoring tools 17
4.3 Terminal Diagram 33
2.6.2 Configuration parts 18
4.4 Recommended wiring 35
2.7 PC tools 19
4.4.1 General 36
2.7.1 InteliConfig 19
4.4.2 Grounding 36
2.7.2 WebSupervisor 19
4.4.3 Power supply 37
2.7.3 WinScope 1000 20
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 38
2.7.4 InteliSCADA 20
4.4.5 Binary Inputs 49
2.8 Plug-in modules 20
4.4.6 Binary Outputs 49

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 2

 4.4.7 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 50 5.4.12 Forced Value 131
4.4.8 USB 54 5.4.13 I/O Configuration 132
4.4.9 USB HOST 54 5.4.14 Load Shedding 134
4.4.10 Ethernet 54 5.4.15 Mains Decoupling Protections 137
4.5 Plug-in module installation 55 5.4.16 Mains Import Measurement 138
4.5.1 Installation 55 5.4.17 Multi soft start 139
4.6 Maintenance 56 5.4.18 Operating Modes 139
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 56 5.4.19 Output Control – Frequency/Load 141
5.4.20 Output Control - Voltage/PF 143
5 Controller setup 58
5.4.21 Parallel To Mains Operation 144
5.1 Default configuration 58
5.4.22 Peak shaving 152
5.1.1 BinaryBinary inputs 58
5.4.23 PLC - Programmable Logic
5.1.2 Binary outputs 58 Controller 152
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools 5.4.24 Power Formats And Units 164
connection 58
5.4.25 Power Management 165
5.2.1 USB 59
5.4.26 Protections 185
5.2.2 Ethernet 60
5.4.27 Pulse Counters 194
5.3 Operator Guide 65
5.4.28 Regulation Loops 195
5.3.1 Status LED Indication 67
5.4.29 Sensor Curves 196
5.3.2 Metering screens 76
5.4.30 Soft unload 198
5.3.3 Alarmlist 77
5.4.31 System Start/Stop 199
5.3.4 Setpoints 78
5.4.32 User Buttons 199
5.3.5 History 81
5.4.33 User management and data access
5.3.6 Trends 83 control 201
5.3.7 Values 85 5.4.34 User Setpoints 206
5.3.8 Administration 85 5.4.35 Voltage Phase Sequence Detection 208
5.3.9 Quick help 94
5.4 General Functions 99 6 Communication 209

5.4.1 Alarm Management 100 6.1 PC 209

5.4.2 AMF Function 102 6.1.1 Direct communication 209

5.4.3 Breaker Control 104 6.1.2 Remote communication 211

5.4.4 Connecting To Load 107 6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 213

5.4.5 Control Groups 112 6.2.1 SNMP 213

5.4.6 Crash Dump 113 6.2.2 Modbus-RTU, Modbus/TCP 214

5.4.7 Distributed Power Management

7 Technical data 227
Signals 114
5.4.8 Electric state machine 119 8 Appendix 229
5.4.9 Event History 121 8.1 Controller objects 229
5.4.10 Exercise Timers 123 8.1.1 List of controller objects types 229
5.4.11 Firewall 130 8.1.2 Setpoints 230

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 3

 8.1.3 Values 434
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 534
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 564
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 593
8.1.7 Application Curves 599
8.1.8 Fixed Protection States 600
8.1.9 User Protection States 604
8.1.10 PLC 607
8.2 Alarms 633
8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller 633
8.2.2 Alarms level 1 633
8.2.3 Alarms level 2 677
8.3 Modules 688
8.3.1 CAN modules 688
6 back to Table of contents

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 4

1 Document information
1.1 Declaration of Conformity 5
1.2 Clarification of Notation 5
1.3 About this Global Guide 6
1.4 Legal notice 6
1.5 General warnings 9
1.6 Functions and protections 10
1.7 Certifications and standards 10
1.8 Document history 10
1.9 Symbols in this manual 11

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Declaration of Conformity

Supplier's Declaration of Conformity
47 CFR § 2.1077 Compliance Information

Unique identifier: OrderCode

Responsible Party:
Kevin Counts
10 N Martingale Rd #400
60173 - Schaumburg, IL
USA

Tel: +1 815 636 2541

E-mail: [email protected]

FCC Compliance Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

1.2 Clarification of Notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls the reader’s attention to a notice or related theme.

IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 5

 WARNING: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.

1.3 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliMains 510 controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliMains 510 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators
Control panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance

1.4 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product
and may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any
other purpose.
Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp
reserves the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any
responsibility for its use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly
prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 6

 Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations
and set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be
considerably reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for
the actions of persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack.
However, ComAp is prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions,
including but not limited to restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other
preventive measures against any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
General security recommendations and set of measures
1. Production mode
Disable production mode BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation.
2. User accounts
Change password for the existing default administrator account or replace that account with a
completely new one BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation mode.
Do not leave PC tools (e.g. InteliConfig) unattended while a user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. AirGate Key
Change the AirGate Key BEFORE the device is connected to the network.
Use a secure AirGate Key – preferably a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase,
uppercase letters and digits.
Use a different AirGate Key for each device.
4. MODBUS/TCP
The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. By it's nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using MODBUS/TCP in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).
5. SNMP
The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1 and version 2 are not encrypted. They are intended to be
used only in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using SNMP v1 and v2 in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).

IMPORTANT: Controller issues Wrn Default Password (page 639) alarm, if the factory default
password is used. It is necessary to change the factory default settings of password to be able to
clear the alarm.

Used open source software:

Name of
Modified Type License condition web address
software
CMSIS Copyright (C) 2020 Amazon.com, Inc. or its
MIT license
FreeRTOS affiliates. All Rights Reserved.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 7

 Copyright (C) Amazon Web Services, Inc. or its
FreeRTOS MIT license
affiliates. All rights reserved.
Copyright (C) 2006-2015, ARM Limited, All
Mbed TLS Apache 2.0 license
Rights Reserved
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of
lwIP BSD 3 license
Computer Science. All rights reserved.
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc.
Free ad-
MD5 – license Created 1991. All rights reserved
hoc license
RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm

Embedded
Copyright (c) 2016 jwellbelove
Template MIT license
www.etlcpp.com
Library
STM32Cube_
BSD 3 license
FW_H7
Copyright (C) 20xx, ChaN, all right reserved.
Modify This software is provided by the copyright holder and
FatFs license contributors "AS IS" and any warranties related to this software
BSD
are DISCLAIMED. The copyright owner or contributors be NOT
LIABLE for any damages caused by use of this software.

Copyright (c) 2011, 2013 Mutsuo Saito, Makoto

Tiny Mersenne
– BSD 3 license Matsumoto, Hiroshima University and The
Twister
University of Tokyo All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2018 STMicroelectronics
International N.V. All rights reserved
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
STMICROELECTRONICS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS ARE
DISCLAIMED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY
USB SLA0044 license LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL STMICROELECTRONICS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright (c) 2013-2015, Scott Vokes

<[email protected]> All rights reserved
heatshrink – ISC license Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software
for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided
that the above copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 8

 Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation,
Inc. <[email protected]> All rights reserved
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
GNU General LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
Public License – Copyleft license
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
v3 PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD
THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.

GCC Runtime Library Exception - GNU Project -

Free Software Foundationd
Copyright © 2009 Free Software Foundation,
Inc. https://fsf.org/

1.5 General warnings

1.5.1 Remote control and programming
The controller can be controlled remotely. In the event that maintenance of the site has to be done, or the
controller has to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that any part of the site will not react
unpredictably (unwanted/random start of the System or any other part of the system).
To be sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs

1.5.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use the proper combination of SW and HW versions.

1.5.3 Dangerous voltage

In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In no case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!

1.5.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However, the setpoints have to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first .
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy any part of the system.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 9

Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in controller. This manual only
describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.

1.6 Functions and protections

Support of functions and protections as defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute):

Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

Master unit 1 Temperature monitoring 49T
Multi-function device 11 Overcurrent 50/50TD
Speed and frequency matching device 15 Overcurrent IDMT 51
Data communications device 16ECFM+16SC AC circuit breaker 52
Synchronizing-check 25 Power factor 55
Thermal relay 26 Overvoltage 59
Undervoltage 27 Pressure switch 63
Annunciator 30 Liquid level switch 71
Overload 32 Alarm relay * 74
Load shedding 32P Vector shift 78
Master sequence device 34 Reclosing relay 79
Undercurrent 37 Overfrequency 81H
Unit sequence starting 44 Underfrequency 81U
Current unbalance 46 ROCOF 81R
Voltage unbalance 47 Auto selective control/transfer 83
Incomplete sequence relay 48 Regulating device 90

* extension module IGL-RA15 required

1.7 Certifications and standards

EN 61000-6-2 EN 60068-2-1 (-40 °C/16 h) UL6200

EN 61000-6-4 EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h) UKCA

EN 61010-1 EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4,0

EN 60255-1 g)
2
EN 60529 (IP20) EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s ; T=6 ms)

EN 60068-2-30 (25/55 °C, RH 95%, 48 h)

1.8 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
1 1.0.0 17.2.2023 Jan Liptak

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 10

1.9 Symbols in this manual

Passive
3 x Phases Coil Fuel solenoid current
sensor
Active
Connector -
current Fuse Pick - up
female
sensor
Connector -
Fuse switch Relay coil
AirGate male

Relay coil of
Contact Generator slow-
Alternating
current operating
Generator
Contactor
Analog schematic Renewables
modem
Controller
Grounding
simplified
Battery Resistor

Module
Battery Ener GSM
simplified Resistor
gy Storage adjustable
System Current
GSM modem Resistive
measuring
Binary output sensor
RPTC
Current
IG-AVRi
Breaker measuring
RS 232 male
contact
IG-AVRi
Danger
TRANS RS 232
Breaker
female
contact Danger -
Electric Jumper
Hazard Starter
Breaker

DC to AC Load Switch -
Inverter manually
Breaker
operated
Mains
Diode Transformer
Breaker

Ethernet Mains USB type B

Capacitor male male
Mobile
Ethernet USB type B
provider
female female

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 11

 Voltage
measuring

Wifi / WAN /
LAN

6 back to Document
information

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 12

2 System overview
2.1 General description 13
2.2 Getting Started 15
2.3 Measurement methods 15
2.4 AC measurement 16
2.5 Communication peripherals 17
2.6 Configurability and monitoring 17
2.7 PC tools 19
2.8 Plug-in modules 20
2.9 CAN Extension Modules 22

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

InteliMains 510 controller is comprehensive mains supervision controller for multiple generating sets
operating in parallel to the Mains. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity in
order to provide the best solution for various customer applications. Controllers are equipped with a powerful
graphic display showing icons, symbols and bar-graphs for intuitive operation, which sets, together with high
functionality, new standards in Mains controls.
The controller automatically connects the group of Controllers to the Mains. It features mains failure detection
using integrated Mains protections, MCB and MGCB synchronization, configuration level switches based on
Mains import or object consumption.
The controller provides easy-to-use operation and installation. Predefined configurations for typical
applications are available as well as user-defined configurations for special applications.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 13

2.1.1 The key features of InteliMains 510
Support for installations with the option for cooperation with up to 32 Gen-sets/mains/tie controllers
Built-in PLC interpreter with the use of ComAp's free – PLC Editor for easy configuration
AirGate 2.0 for easy connection to your equipment remotely, without worrying about your asset’s IP
address
Remote control and monitoring of your site operations with WebSupervisor, our cloud-based fleet
management tool
Compatible load/Var sharing and power management with other ComAp solutions
A wide range of plug-in modules allowing you to easily extend the functionality of the controller
One hardware for more applications, enabling an easy switch between MCB, MGCB and BTB
applications
Keeping your business and data as safe as possible, meeting the ISA 62443 level 2 - level 3 security
requirements
Clear visualization and overview of all important information on the built-in colour display
Faster and cost-effective operations with signal sharing over a CAN bus across a group of control units
User-defined protections and setpoints on top of default protection
Controller redundancy minimizing solution downtime and ensuring the power isn’t compromised
Dynamic spinning reserve preventing supply drops in hybrid installations with PVs
Secure user management
Possibility to have a mains application in a Gen-set controller

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 14

2.2 Getting Started
Congratulations to your new InteliMains 510 ComAp Controller controller. Follow these steps bellow for first run
of your controller.
Note: For a better experience with our controller, do not forget to see the InteliConfig manual before starting
the configuration.

1. Connect controller to power supply

Controller requires power supply between 8-36 V DC. Plug +BAT to the terminal no. 03 and GND to
the terminal no. 01.
See Terminal Diagram (page 33) for more information
2. Connect your computer to the controller
We suggest you to use USB or ETH 1 - Trusted Interface for the first connection to your new controller.
Plug the USB/ETH cable to USB type B/Ethernet 1 terminal on the controller. Open InteliConfig and
select "Connect to controller". Now you can use "Detected controllers" feature, which should offer you
the controller.
3. Authorizing as Administrator
The alarmlist should show Wrn Default Password (page 639). If this alarm is not present, this
procedure bellow will not work. You will need to use your changed password. If you see the warning,
use function "Enter password" which is located in tab "Control".
Username = administrator

Password = serial number of your controller

Serial number is located at the front of your controller or you can see it in left top corner of InteliConfig
when connected to the controller.
You can verify that you have been successfully logged in by seeing opened lock with number "3". This
means that you verified on the highest level - administrator and you have all possible rights.
4. Changing Administrator Password
You should change the default password as soon as possible via InteliConfig. In the InteliConfig select
tab "Tools", function "User administration" and "Change password". Do not forget to add your email
address which is used in case of lost access to the account.

5. Adding another users

If you are loged in as any account with permissions level 3, you can add another user.
6. Connecting external display
See more information about using the display in the chapter Operator Guide (page 65).

2.3 Measurement methods

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 15

2.3.1 True RMS measurement
This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage
should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiples of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective
values not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
Note: The harmonic deformation causes that the Power Factor of a System working parallel with the mains
cannot reach values in a certain range around the PF 1.00. The higher the deformation, the wider the power
factor dead range. If the requested power factor is adjusted inside the dead range, the controller cannot
reach the requested value because of this fact.

2.4 AC measurement
With InteliMains 510 it is possible to easily set the parameters for measuring.

2.4.1 AC measurement settings

AC Voltage measurement settings
The value of the AC voltage measured on the terminals of the controller can be adapted according to the used
meas voltage. For measuring AC voltage use setpoint Mains VT Ratio (page 264).

AC Current measurement settings

The value of the AC current measured on the terminals of the controller can be adapted phase application with
neutral according to the used meas current. For measuring AC current use setpoints Mains CT Ratio Prim
(page 259) and Mains CT Ratio Sec (page 259).

2.4.2 Frequency measurement accuracy and resolution

The resolution of the measurement is in mHz within a 45–75 Hz range.

2.4.3 PF measurement and evaluation

Power factor is measured with a resolution of 0.01.
Setpoints used for setting the Power factor regulation are Import Power Factor (page 247) with a 0.001
resolution and#System Power Factor (page 245) with a 0.01 resolution.
Values for the Power factor are:
Mains Load Character (page 441)
Mains Load Character L1 (page 442)
Mains Load Character L2 (page 443)
Mains Load Character L3 (page 443)
Load PF (page 450), Load Character (page 450)
Total Running Power Factor (page 462), Total Running Load Character (page 462)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 16

2.5 Communication peripherals
InteliMains 510 contains 1x Ethernet terminals, 2x CAN terminals, 1x RS485 terminal and 1x USB type B
terminal. Each terminal functions are slightly different, which depends on the purpose of usage.
IMPORTANT: Use correct terminal according to your purpose of usage for correct function.

Peripherals Description Relevant links

This terminal is used for connecting of external modules and
CAN1 Electronic Control Units. See the chapters Supported CAN bus wiring (page
combinations of modules (page 689). 50)
CAN2 This terminal is used for CAN intercontroller communication.
This terminal is used for Modbus-RTU, Modbus/TCP (page
RS485 RS485 wiring (page 51)
214) communication.
USB Type A USB host – FW upgrade, download/upload configuration.
Controller
This terminal is used for UART communication eg. configuration and PC
USB Type B
InteliConfig, WinScope1000, etc. tools connection (page
58)
Ethernet Ethernet (page 54)

You can see layout of the peripherals in the chapter Terminal Diagram (page 33).

2.6 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each
individual application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the
powerful PC/mobile tools.

2.6.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig - complete configuration and single/multi controller monitoring
WebSupervisor - web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile - supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope 1000 - special graphical monitoring software
InteliSCADA - customizable SCADA diagram for monitoring
The firmware of controller contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all necessary
functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same controller and also
the controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of “logical” firmware inputs and outputs to the “physical” hardware inputs and
outputs.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 17

2.6.2 Configuration parts
Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Mapping of logical analog inputs (functions) to physical analog input terminals, assigning sensor
characteristics (curves) or assigning alarms to analog inputs
Mapping of values to physical analog outputs, assigning output HW type with conversion characteristic
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Selection of ECU (electronic control unit) type
Changing the language of the controller interface

Image 2.1 Principle of inputs and outputs configuration

The controller is shipped with a Default configuration (page 58), which should be suitable for most standard
applications. This configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See
InteliConfig documentation for details.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for
backup purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .aig4. An archive contains a full image of
the controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides
configuration it also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log
and a copy of the alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration
and settings.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 18

2.7 PC tools
2.7.1 InteliConfig
PC Tool for configuration and monitoring of controllers. See more in the InteliConfig Global Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or remote internet communication
with the controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller and module configuration,
programming and cloning
Remote display programming
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Controllers and ECU Alarm monitoring +
complete real time history
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation
Power format and ECU unit selection
Embedded manuals and F1 helps
Auto-hiding of unused setpoints and values

2.7.2 WebSupervisor
Cloud-based system designed for monitoring and management of ComAp and 3rd party devices via the
internet. See more in the WebSupervisor Global Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application

WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: ComAp123

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 19

2.7.3 WinScope 1000
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and System troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope 1000 Global Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual/historic trends in the controller
On-line change of controller's parameters for
easy regulator setup

2.7.4 InteliSCADA
InteliSCADA is a Windows based software for monitoring of multiple controllers. See more in the InteliSCADA
Global Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Basic (auto-generated) SCADA in a few minutes
Broad range of instruments with easy and fast
configuration
Fully customizable SCADA diagram
Browsing of all measured and computed values
Browsing of controllers' history records

2.8 Plug-in modules

2.8.1 CM3-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module including web server.

10/100 Mbit interface over RJ45 socket

Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Modbus TCP support
Full SNMP support including traps (v1 & v2c)
Active e-mail sending
AirGate 2.0 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 20

2.8.2 CM2-4G-GPS
GSM/4G module
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
Global 4G (LTE) module with 3G/2G backup
Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Active e-mail and SMS support
AirGate 2 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address
Tracking via GNSS (GPS,GLONASS) module

2.8.3 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
MODBUS
Serial connection to InteliConfig

2.8.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Input and binary input/output extension module.
One additional AC current (CT) measuring for
Earth Fault Current protection (EFCP)
Wide range of measured current - one input for
1A and 1 input for 5A
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 21

2.9 CAN Extension Modules
2.9.1 Inteli AIN8
The module allows users to expand the amount of analog inputs for sensors and add Impulse/RPM input that can
be attached to a controller. Up to 8 configurable inputs (sensors) can be attached to the module. See more
information on web page Inteli AIN8.

Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250Ω, 0-2400Ω, 0-10kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20mA , 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Voltage
±1V, 0-2,4V, 0-5V, 0-10V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the measuring loop was
designed for lambda probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4Hz – 10kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from electrometer, flowmeter,
etc.

IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported by the controller.

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 22

2.9.2 Inteli IO8/8
The module to expand the amount of binary inputs and outputs for ComAp controllers. It is possible to
configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2 analog outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary
outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller. See more information on web page Inteli
IO8/8.

Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch (LSS) or High side switch
(HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V), current (0-20mA) and
PWM (5V, adjustable frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V), current (0-20mA) and
PWM (5V, adjustable frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
6 back to CAN Extension Modules

2.9.3 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator. See more information on web page IGL-RA15.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable
colors red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified

IMPORTANT: This module is not compatible with different than 250 kbps communication speed. If
the ECU module with 125 kbps communication speed is connected the whole system will
automatically switch to the 125 kbps, and IGL-RA15 module will stop communicating.

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 23

2.9.4 IGS-PTM
The module expands the amount of binary/analog inputs and outputs for ComAp controllers. It is possible to
configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog inputs and 1 analog output. See more
information on web page IGS-PTM.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100
sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ohms,
voltage range 0-100mV, current range 0-20mA
- selectable via jumper)
UL certified

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

2.9.5 Inteli AIO9/1

The module is suitable for measurement and control of analog inputs and output through CAN interface. It is
possible to configure the unit to have 9 analog inputs and 1 analog output. See more information on web page
Inteli AIO9/1.
4x differential voltage inputs for measurement in range of ±65 V
DC
4x shielded, galvanic separated sensors: thermocouples J,K,L,
±75 mV inputs
Resistance analog input (sensors: 0-2400Ω, PT1000 or NI1000)
Analog output with options : 0-20mA, 0-10V or PWMt

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 24

2.9.6 Inteli AIN8TC
The module allows customers to configure up to 8 analog input channels for measuring temperature by
thermocouples. The Inteli AIN8TC is useful in situations where extremely accurate temperature readings is
required. See more information on web page Inteli AIN8TC.

Supported sensors:
J, K or L thermocouples
Thermocouples with and without cold junction compensation are
supported

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

2.9.7 I-AOUT8
The module allows customers to configure up to 8 analog outputs. AGND terminals are on the same potential.
See more information on web page I-AOUT8.

Each analog output can be switched to

0 to 10 V DC
0/4 to 20 mA DC
1,2 kHz PWM (Pulse With Modulatio)

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

2.9.8 IS-AIN8
The module is equipped with 8 analog inputs. This module is compatible with MTU ECU-7 at communication
speed 125 kbps when uploaded with firmware 1.2.0 and higher. See more information on web page IS-AIN8.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 25

 Precision of inputs is 1%
2/3 wire resistive, current, voltage sensors
Predefined sensors (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, thermocouple
type J/K/L)
Current and voltage inputs 0-20mA and 0-10V

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

2.9.9 IS-BIN16/8
The module allows users to expand the amount of binary inputs and outputs, and add 2 impulse inputs. It is
possible to configure the unit to have 16 binary inputs (galvanic separated) and 8 binary outputs (galvanic
separated), 2 pulse inputs (frequency measurement or pulse counting). See more information on web page
IS-BIN16/8.

To operate external modules:

Configurable 16 galvanically separated inputs
Configurable 8 outputs
2 pulse inputs (frequency measurement or pulse counting)
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs and outputs

Note: CAN address 0 disables corresponding CAN message (Group data are not send).

IMPORTANT: Impulse inputs are not supported by the controller.

6 back to CAN Extension Modules

6 back to System overview

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 26

3 Applications overview
3.1 MCB 27
3.2 MGCB 29

6 back to Table of contents

3.1 MCB
3.1.1 MCB application with one mains incomer

InteliMains 510 directly controls only the MCB. Frequency/Power and Voltage/Power Factor of the system is
controlled via load sharing and var sharing outputs (#System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar
and #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Var Shar) using CAN2 (page 17) and/or Communication
peripherals (page 17) communication.
The controller senses the mains parameters and in case of Mains failure detection (page 103)
automatically activates AMF Function (page 102). In this case signal SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) is
activated, MCB is opened based on setting of MCB Opens On (page 290). After Healthy mains detection
(page 103) and countdown of MCB Close Delay (page 288) is MCB synchronized. With closing of MCB load

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 27

 starts to be transferred according to setpoints in Subgroup: Load Transfer (page 339). Once the gen-sets
are unloaded, signal SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) is deactivated.
In Controller mode (page 267) AUTO start signal could be activated with extra dedicated LBIs (e.g. REMOTE
START/STOP (PAGE 560), FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538), FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537), REM TEST ON LOAD
(PAGE 561)…)
REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) signal is shared via intecontroller CAN, if it is activated all Gen-sets in the
same control group without configured REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) will be started. Each Gen-set with
configured REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) must be started separately (for example by SYSTEM START/STOP
(PAGE 591) wired to the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560)).
Peak shaving (page 152) mode activates the start signal based on the adjusted requested mains import
value.
Different types of load transfers from Mains to Gen and from Gen to Mains can be used.
Open
Close Only
Close Prim
SoftTransf
In Controller mode (page 267) MAN could be start signal activated with start-stop buttons. When mode is
switched to MAN controller follows the previous internal states. MCB can be closed/opened with MCB Button
but the control is conditioned by setting of CB Control In MAN Mode (page 248).

3.1.2 MCB application with multiple mains incomers

It is possible to use InteliMains 510 with multiple mains incomers. In this case it is necessary to also use BTB
controller to split site into 2 groups. For more information please see InteliMains 510 BTB Global Guide.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 28

3.2 MGCB
3.2.1 MGCB application with one mains incomer

Note: For applications containing only controllers IG1000, IM1010, IG500, IG200 and IM210 SYSTEM
START/STOP (PAGE 591) does not need to be physically wired. It is shared via CAN intercontroller
communication.

InteliMains 510 controls the MCB and MGCB. Power and Power Factor is controlled via load sharing and Var
sharing (#System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar and #System PF Control PTM (page 244)
= Var Shar) using CAN2 (page 17) and/or Communication peripherals (page 17).
The controller senses the mains parameters and in case of Mains failure detection (page 103)
automatically activates AMF Function (page 102).In this case is activated signal SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE
591), MCB is opened based on setting of MCB Opens On (page 290). MGCB breaker is closed only in case
the sufficient power is available (SYSTEM RESERVE OK (PAGE 591) is active). After Healthy mains detection
(page 103) and countdown of MCB Close Delay (page 288) is MCB synchronized. With closing of MCB load
starts to be transferred according to setpoints in Subgroup: Load Transfer (page 339). Once the gen-sets
are unloaded, signal SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) is deactivated.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 29

 In Controller Mode (page 472) = AUTO could be start signal activated with extra dedicated LBIs (e.g.
REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560), FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538), FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537), REM TEST ON
LOAD (PAGE 561)…)
REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) signal is shared via intecontroller CAN, if it is activated all Gen-sets in the
same control group without configured REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) will be started. Each Gen-set with
configured REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) must be started separately (for example by SYSTEM START/STOP
(PAGE 591) wired to the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560)).
Peak shaving (page 152) mode activates the start signal based on the adjusted requested mains import
value.
Different types of load transfers from Mains to Gen and from Gen to Mains can be used.
Open
Close Only
Close Prim
SoftTransf
In Controller mode (page 267) = MAN could be start signal activated with start-stop buttons. When mode is
switched to MAN controller follows the previous internal states. MCB and MGCB can be closed/opened with
MCB and MGCB Button but the control is conditioned by setting of CB Control In MAN Mode.
IMPORTANT: Control of MGCB is affected by SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) even in Controller
mode (page 267) = MAN. SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) has to be active or the Bus must be
healthy before MGCB can be closed. You can activate SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) for example
by pressing the Start Button.

6 back to Applications overview

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 30

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 31
4.2 Controller installation 32
4.3 Terminal Diagram 33
4.4 Recommended wiring 35
4.5 Plug-in module installation 55
4.6 Maintenance 56

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller InteliMains 510
Terminal blocks

Note: The package does not contain a communication or extension modules. The required modules should be
ordered separately.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 31

4.2 Controller installation
4.2.1 Dimensions

Image 4.1 Controller dimensions

Plug-in module

Note: Dimension "x" depends on a plug-in module

Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.

Note: The final depth of the controller depends on the selected plug-in module – it can vary between 47 mm
and "x" mm. Mind also the size of connectors and cables (e.g. in case of RS232 connector, add about 60 mm
more for standard RS232 connector and cable).

Note: The controller is mounted into panel doors as a standalone unit using provided holders. The requested
cutout size is 187 × 132 mm. Use the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the
door.

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller should be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 × 132 mm. Use
the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described in pictures below.
Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 32

 Panel door mounting

Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction – For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

4.3 Terminal Diagram

CURRENT BINARY
MAINS VOLTAGE BUS VOLTAGE
MEASUREMENT INPUTS
T30 COM T38 N T42 N T46 BIN1
T31 L1 T39 L1 T43 L1 T47 BIN2
T32 L2 T40 L2 T44 L2 T48 BIN3
T33 L3 T41 L3 T45 L3 T49 BIN4
T34 COM T50 BIN5
T35 L1 T51 BIN6
T52 BIN7
T53 BIN8

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 33

 CAN1 BINARY OUTPUTS POWER SUPPLY, D+
USB

T26 L T05 BOUT1 T01 BATT - USB HOST

T27 COM T06 BOUT2 T02 D+ ETHERNET

T28 H T07 BOUT3 T03 BATT +

CAN2 T08 BOUT4 RS485

T23 L T09 BOUT5 T56 B

T24 COM T10 BOUT6 T57 COM
T25 H T11 BOUT7 T58 A
T12 BOUT8

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 34

4.4 Recommended wiring
4.4.1 General 36
4.4.2 Grounding 36
4.4.3 Power supply 37
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 38
4.4.5 Binary Inputs 49
4.4.6 Binary Outputs 49
4.4.7 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 50
4.4.8 USB 54
4.4.9 USB HOST 54
4.4.10 Ethernet 54

Current inputs 30 - 35 Current measurement wiring (page 38)

Mains/Bus Voltage inputs 38 - 41 Voltage measurement wiring (page 42)

Mains/Bus Voltage inputs 42 - 45 Voltage measurement wiring (page 42)

Binary inputs 46-53 Binary Inputs (page 49)

CAN1 26 - 28 CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 50)

CAN2 23 - 25 CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 50)

Binary outputs 05 - 12 Binary Outputs (page 49)

Power supply 01 - 03 Power supply (page 37)

RS485 A, COM, B CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 50)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 35

 USB USB B USB (page 54)

USB HOST USB A USB HOST (page 54)

Ethernet ETH Ethernet (page 54)

4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.

Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals

Specified tightening torque is 0.56 Nm (5.0 In-lbs)

use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90 °C minimum.

For other controller field wiring terminals

Specified tightening torque 0.79 nm (7.0 In-lb)

Use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75 °C minimum.

Use copper conductors only

4.4.2 Grounding
2
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min 2.5 mm .
The negative " - " battery terminal used as power supply for CU must be properly grounded.
Switchboard must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding point.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 36

4.4.3 Power supply
To ensure proper function:
2
Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC. The controller’s power supply terminals are
protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being
subjected to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery "–"
terminal is maximally ±2 V. Therefore it is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals
together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller's negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).

For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes to 0 V
during cranking and after 50 ms it recovers to 8 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.

Image 4.2 Controllers power supply with external capacitor, separating diode and fusing

Note: Recommended fusing is 5 A fuse.

Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after
recovering to 8 V back on.

Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.

Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.

Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is
12 V, after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V. Diode should be able to withstand at
least 1 kV.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 37

 Power supply fusing
It is strongly recommended to use 4 A fuse in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules.
These electronics should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on
number of connected devices and wire length. It is recommended to use slow blow fuse T4 A. The fast blow fuse
is inappropriate due to internal capacitors charging during power up.

Image 4.3 Controllers power supply fusing

IMPORTANT: 5 A / 6 × 0.5 A BOUT fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension
modules. Real value of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.

4.4.4 Measurement wiring

2 2
Use 1.5 mm cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm for current transformers connection. Adjust Connection
type (page 261), MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263), Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-
PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264), Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263), Gen
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263) and Nominal Current (page 258) by appropriate setpoints in the Basic
Settings group.

IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage
terminals under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching
them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is
closed. Open the primary circuit first.

Current measurement wiring

The number of CT's is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page
261) [3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement are suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
To ensure proper function:
2
Use cables of 2.5 mm
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 38

 3 phase application

Image 4.4 3 phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

Image 4.5 3 phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 39

 SplPhL1L2 application

Image 4.6 SplPhL1L2 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

Image 4.7 SplPhL1L2 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 40

 SplPhL1L3 application

Image 4.8 SplPhL1L3 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

Image 4.9 SplPhL1L3 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

IMPORTANT: If the second phase of the split phase application is phase L2 use current input 32,
if its phase L3 use current input 33.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 41

 Mono phase application
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.

Image 4.10 Mono phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

Image 4.11 Mono phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

Voltage measurement wiring

The Mains and Bus protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 261)
setting:
3Ph4Wire – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
High Leg D – Ph-N voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph3Wire – Ph-Ph voltage
SplPhL1L2 – Ph-N voltage
SplPhL1L3 – Ph-N voltage
MonoPhase – Ph-N voltage

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 42

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires
Connection type (page 261) = 3Ph4Wire

Image 4.12 Controller wiring for voltage measurement of 3 phase application with neutral

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.13 Typical Mains wiring of 3 phase application with neutral

Note: Terminals marked by Tx in the picture above are Mains's terminals. These markers are not the same
as markers for the controller wiring.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 43

 ConnectionType: High Leg D
Connection type (page 261) = High Leg D

Image 4.14 Controller wiring for voltage measurement of High Leg Delta application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Table 4.1 Typical Mains wiring of High Leg Delta application

Note: Terminals marked by Tx in the picture above are Mains's terminals. These markers are not the same
as markers for the controller wiring.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 44

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires
Connection type (page 261) = 3Ph3Wire

Image 4.15 3 Controller wiring for voltage measurement of 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.16 Typical Mains wiring of 3 phase application without neutral

Note: Terminals marked by Tx in the picture above are Mains's terminals. These markers are not the same
as markers for the controller wiring.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 45

 ConnectionType: SplPhL1L3
Connection type (page 261) = SplPhL1L3

Image 4.17 Controller wiring for voltage measurement of SplPhL1L3 application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

ConnectionType: SplPhL1L2
Connection type (page 261) = SplPhL1L2

Image 4.18 Controller wiring for voltage measurement of SplPhL1L2 application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 46

 Image 4.19 Typical Mains wiring of SplitPhase application

Note: Terminals marked by Tx in the pictures above are Mains's terminals. These markers are not the same
as markers for the controller wiring.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 47

 ConnectionType: Mono Phase
Connection type (page 261) = MonoPhase

Image 4.20 Controller wiring for voltage measurement of MonoPhase application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.21 Typical Mains wiring of MonoPhase application

Note: Terminals marked by Tx in the picture above are Mains's terminals. These markers are not the same
as markers for the controller wiring.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 48

4.4.5 Binary Inputs
2
Use minimally 1 mm cables for wiring of Binary inputs.
InteliMains 510 offers switchable types of inputs. You can select from Pull Up and Pull Down settings. Use
2
minimally 1 mm cables for wiring of Binary inputs. It is recommended to separate inputs by diodes when two or
more binary inputs are connected in parallel to avoid wrong input activation when one controller is switched off.
See the chapter Binary inputs (page 690) for more information about Pull Up and Pull Down settings.
Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the
configuration.

Image 4.22 Wiring binary inputs - Pull Up

4.4.6 Binary Outputs

2
Use min. 1 mm cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below for
all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc.).

Image 4.23 Binary outputs wiring

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 49

4.4.7 CAN bus and RS485 wiring
CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps,
which is used on the CAN1 (page 17) bus (extension modules, ECU) and CAN2 (page 17)
(Communication peripherals (page 17)) bus, the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except
on the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails,
no star) is necessary.
The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends use a cable with following
parameters:

Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75% (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB/100 m

Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.

Image 4.24 CAN bus topology

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 50

 For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.25 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances

Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal.

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.26 CAN bus wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1

RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the RS485 (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the RS485 terminal.

Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable2 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T00 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends.

1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ
2Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 51

 For shorter distances (connection within one building).

Image 4.27 RS485 wiring for shorter distances

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.28 RS485 wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST1
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

1Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 52

 On board RS485 description

Balancing resistors
The transmission bus into the RS-485 port enters an indeterminate state when it is not being transmitted to. This
indeterminate state can cause the receivers to receive invalid data bits from the noise picked up on the cable. To
prevent these data bits, you should force the transmission line into a known state. By installing two 560 Ohm
balancing resistors at one node on the transmission line, you can create a voltage divider that forces the voltage
between the differential pair to be less than 200 mili-Volts, the threshold for the receiver. You should install these
resistors on only one node. The figure below shows a transmission line using bias resistors. Balancing resistors
are placed directly on the PCB of controller. Use jumpers PULL UP/PULL DOWN to connect the balancing
resistors.

Image 4.29 Balancing resistors

Image 4.30 RS485 on board

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 53

4.4.8 USB
The USB can be used for direct computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable. See the chapter
Connection via USB (page 211) for more information.

Image 4.31 USB connection

The USB cannot be used instead of power supply. The controller will not be turned on when the USB is
connected and the controller is not powered from power supply.

4.4.9 USB HOST

USB Flash Drive can be connected into USB A connector.

4.4.10 Ethernet
Ethernet Cat5/Cat6 cable fitted with the RJ45 connector can be connected to the ethernet interface. The
ethernet can be used for direct computer connection. See the chapter Connection via Ethernet (page 210)
for more information.

Image 4.32 Ethernet Connection

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 54

4.5 Plug-in module installation
4.5.1 Installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start
with holders marked by symbol 1. On the controller are also arrows for better navigation. After inserting plug-
in module under holders 1 press it down to holders marked by symbol 2 which locks the module.

Insert the plug-in module under holders marked by symbol 1.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 55

 After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each
plug-in module.

4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If alarm Wrn RTC Battery Flat (page 665) is present,
replacement of backup battery is needed. Follow these instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but
recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.

The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp
screwdriver and push with a finger the new battery into the holder.

Warning – Risk of fire if battery is replaced with incorrect type or polarity. Dispose of used batteries
according to instructions. The CR1632 3V Lithium battery have to be used."

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 56

 Note: The picture above is only illustrative and actual battery placement may vary.

Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the
cover is in correct position and not upside down!
Put back the plugin modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.

6 back to Installation and wiring

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 57

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 58
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 58
5.3 Operator Guide 65
5.4 General Functions 99

6 back to Table of contents

5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 BinaryBinary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547)
BIN2 System activation in AUT mode REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560)
BIN3 Switch controller to TEST mode REMOTE TEST (PAGE 560)
BIN4 Switch controller to TEST mode with load REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 561)
BIN5 Access lock keyswitch ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 536)
BIN6 Switch the site to Island state FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537)
BIN7 Active parallel run FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538)
BIN8 Free slot Not Used

5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Configured function

BOUT1 Control of MCB MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579)

BOUT2 System activation SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591)
BOUT3 Indication of a system reserve SYSTEM RESERVE OK (PAGE 591)
BOUT4 Free slot Not Used
BOUT5 Free slot Not Used
BOUT6 Free slot Not Used
BOUT7 Free slot Not Used
BOUT8 Free slot Not Used

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools

connection
5.2.1 USB 59
5.2.2 Ethernet 60

6 back to Controller setup

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 58

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Reference Guides.

5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB (page 34) Port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should
be used - USB (page 54) connection.

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller

Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig - Select your controller from list of Detected
controllers.

Select your controller from the list of Detected controllers. You need to know your contoller's serial number.
Note: You do not need to be using user account while connecting via USB.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 59

 Connection using WinScope

Image 5.3 WinScope screen - Select your controller from list of Detected controllers.

Select your controller from the list of Detected controllers. You need to know your contoller's serial number.
Note: You do not need to be using user account while using WinScope1000 connected via USB.

5.2.2 Ethernet
You may connect to the controller using any of the Recommended wiring (page 35), ports, if correct Ethernet
Port Configuration settings are applied.
Note: See Communication peripherals (page 17) to see differences between these peripherals.

Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one
LAN or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection).
Note: The connection speed might be significantly limited when you connect the controller directly from the
PC and your Ethernet card is setup to Energy-Efficient Ethernet option.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 60

 Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.4 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 61

 Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Ethernet

Use IP address which is stored in proper value (based on selected Ethernet peripheral) and fill Controller
address.
IMPORTANT: Never fill Access code!

IMPORTANT: In case of using Communication peripherals (page 17) you need to fill Username
and Password of actual user account.

Image 5.6 Second option of connection via InteliConfig

You can also select controller from "Detected controllers" feature. If this controller is connected via
Communication peripherals (page 17) you will be prompted to fill Username and Password of actual user
account.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 62

 Connection using WinScope

Image 5.7 WinScope screen - select Ethernet

Use IP address which is stored in proper value (based on selected Ethernet peripheral) and fill Controller
address.
IMPORTANT: Never fill Access code!

IMPORTANT: In case of using Communication peripherals (page 17) you need to fill Username
and Password of actual user account.

AirGate connection
You may connect to the controller using AirGate which works only via Communication peripherals (page 17).
If the AirGate key in the Access Administration is empty the controller will not connect to the AirGate despite the
function is enabled. Access Administration is available in Tools of the InteliConfig.
Setpoints and values related to connection via AirGate:
AirGate Connection (page 418) - has to be ENABLED
AirGate Address (page 419) - manually adjusted address of AirGate server
AirGate Port (page 419) - manually adjusted port for communication between Controller and AirGate
server
AirGate Status (page 498) - has to be connected, operable
AirGate ID (page 498) - 9 numbers long ID of the controller

IMPORTANT: Controller has to be connected to the Internet.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 63

 Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.8 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller

Image 5.9 Second screen of InteliConfig - AirGate

Use AirGate ID, AirGate server with proper port (54441 for global.airgate.link), AirGate Key and Controller
address. Valid user account - Username and Password - is required for the connection.
IMPORTANT: Never fill Access code!

Note: Ask your administrator for AirGate Key. Administrator can always change the key via InteliConfig using
"Tools -> Access administration -> Change AirGate key"

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 64

 Connection using WinScope

Image 5.10 WinScope1000 screen - select AirGate

Use AirGate ID, AirGate Server with proper port (54441 for global.airgate.link), Device Access Key and
Controller Address. Valid user account - Username and Password - is required for the connection.
IMPORTANT: Never fill Access code!

5.3 Operator Guide

Image 5.11 Operator interface of InteliMains 510

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 65

 Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced
by one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The
button can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of
currently selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced
by one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.

HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.

FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and

deactivate the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and
status of active alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear
as soon as their reasons dismiss.

UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.

PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.

DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.

ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in
the history page.

START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the
start sequence of the engine.

STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the Controller. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current
phase of stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.

MCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close the MCB.

GCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close the GCB.

ALARMLIST button. Use this button to get to the alarmalist screen.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 66

 HISTORY button. Use this button to get to the history screen.

HOME button. Use this button to get to the main screen.

Multicolor (RGB) LED. The specified color and flashing function describes the actual
state of the unit. For more information see Status LED Indication on page 67.

5.3.1 Status LED Indication

LED intensity is directly connected with the actual setting of the backlight intensity in Administration menu
"Settings" accessible by shortcut Enter + Menu
the intensity respects the value of the Manual or External brightness control
The flashing of the status LED and indicative Alarm icon in the top statusbar have the same period
Meaning of the status LED colors is described below
Color and flashing function meaning:
Red is flashing
Active unconfirmed level2 (shutdown) alarm
Inactive unconfirmed level2 (shutdown) alarm
Lost of internal communication line
Controller unit in init state
Red lights
Active confirmed level2 (shutdown) alarm
Integrated color display unit in init state
Integrated color display unit booting procedure
Cyan lights
temperature inside the housing exceeded the 85 °C (185 °F)
Yellow lights
Active unconfirmed level1 (warning) alarm
Inactive unconfirmed level1 (warning) alarm
Active confirmed level1 (warning) alarm
Active unconfirmed fail sensor alarm
Inactive unconfirmed fail sensor alarm
Active confirmed fail sensor alarm
Green lights
unit is running correctly without any errors or alarms
Color state priority:
1. Red is flashing
2. Red lights
3. Cyan lights
4. Yellow lights
5. Green lights

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 67

 Pages
There are several screens called pages in the graphical user interface (GUI), which are accessible by
pressing the Menu button or concrete user button in the bottom status bar. Each page has a different function
and different structure. Pages are described in special chapters in this manual.
The actual GUI consists of 6 different pages:
Metering screen
Alarmlist
Setpoints
History
Trends
Values (applicable only in supported controllers)
Administration
Page administration is accessible only by pressing the combination of the Enter and Menu buttons
from only Metering screen.

Screens
Each type of controller has special set of screens stored in the controller configuration. The description of the
each metering screens is by default predefined by ComAp. Scrolling between the screens is performed using
the arrow up and down buttons.
Note: The metering screens are adjustable using the Screen Editor (in InteliConfig). The Screen Editor tool
also has its own manual.

Service screen
The service screen is the special screen (bitmap) defined and stored in the controller. The service screen is
also accessible from administration as a last list item. The purpose of the service screen is to allow the site
administrator to put into the display (resp. controller) important data for technical support. The status screen
can be uploaded using the InteliConfig. By default the service screen is predefined by ComAp.

Image 5.12 : Service screen overview

Note: Service screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the metering
screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 68

 Dialogs
Values and parameters and other can be set in the controller via dialogs. There are several dialogs in the
GUI. Dialogs for numbers, texts and lists.
Note: Function and User buttons work on background (e.g. if any dialog is displayed).

IMPORTANT: Each dialog has its own structure corresponding to the value type.

IMPORTANT: QR Code is displayed on each dialog. Together with ComAp Smart Hint application
the QR Code is dedicated for further help. Simply read the QR Code using Smart Hint application
to get a help about actually edited setpoint.

Dialog Value
The dialog value is dedicated for number setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are
used for number selection. Enter button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.13 : Dialog Value overview

Dialog Value Extended

The dialog value extended is dedicated for number setting with combination with one or more string value.
When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are used for number/item selection. Enter button
confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.14 : Dialog Value Extended overview

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 69

 Dialog String List
The dialog string list is dedicated for list item selection. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and
down are used for item selection. Enter button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without
saving.

Image 5.15 : Dialog String List overview

Dialog Text
The dialog text is dedicated for text inserting or modification. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up
and down are used for letter selection. Arrow up means the selection in left direction, arrow down means the
selection in right direction. Arrows right/left are used for moving between the letters to the next/previous letter
position in the text field. If actual position is very right letter then the arrow right inserts new letter to the right.
Letter DEL deletes actualy selected letter (using left or right arrow). Insert letter (empty letter - just behind the
DEL letter) inserts the letter to the actual position (using left or right arrow) Enter button confirms the text
modification. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.16 : Dialog Text overview

Improved dialog for text inserting from version ICD 1.4.0 allows users better and user frinedly control. Arrows
are used for movement in letter table. Enter is used for letter selection/confirmation. Function buttons is used
for another functions. F1 button is used to delete letter. F2 button is used for changing the letter table to
special characters and vise versa. F3 and F4 buttons are used for movement inside the text field between the
letters. F5 button confirms the dialog and save changes. Menu button cancels the dialog without the saving
changes.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 70

 Image 5.17 : Dialog Text from ICD firmware version 1.4.0

Note: Enter button is used for dialog confirmation and saving the entire text to the configuration and because
of this the DEL and INS letter is inserted using the left or right arrow button.

Dialog IP address
The dialog IP address is dedicated for IP address insertion. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up
and down are used for number selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the IP cells. Enter
button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.18 : Dialog IP address overview

Dialog Message
The dialog message has informal character about the result of any action. Enter or Menu button cancels the
dialog without saving. There is no need to confirm the selection. There two types of message dialogs :
Stop - dedicated for error indication
Information - dedicated for general message

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 71

 Image 5.19 : Dialog Message overview

Dialog Progress
The dialog progress has informal character about the result of any action. The progress bar and percents are
also displayed during the action performing. Enter or Menu button cancels the dialog without saving. There is
no need to confirm the selection.

Image 5.20 : Dialog Progress overview

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 72

 Dialog Date
The dialog date is dedicated for date setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are
used for number selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the date cells. Enter button
confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.21 : Dialog Date overview

Dialog Time
The dialog time is dedicated for date setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are
used for number selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the time cells. Enter button
confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.22 : Dialog Time overview

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 73

 Dialog Login
The dialog login is dedicated for login insertion. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are
used for number selection. Enter button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 5.23 : Dialog Login overview

Status bars
Bottom status bar
The bottom status bar is used for the user button functions. There are several status bars in the GUI. Bottom
status bar consists of 5 areas (user buttons) dedicated for emitting the command to the controller unit, jump to
the specified page (e.g. alarmlist, history) or special functions on some pages.

Image 5.24 : Example (bottom status bar on Home metering screen)

1. User button 1 – emitting the command to the controller or link to page in GUI or special function
2. User button 2 – emitting the command to the controller or link to page in GUI or special function
3. User button 3 – emitting the command to the controller or link to page in GUI or special function
4. User button 4 – emitting the command to the controller or link to page in GUI or special function
5. User button 5 – emitting the command to the controller or link to page in GUI or special function
Note: The button press is visually indicated by black frame around the button area. The indication does not
mean that requested command is performed, it is only press indication.

Note: Concrete status bar views for concrete page are described in specific chapters in this manual.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 74

 Top status bar
The top status bar can NOT be adjusted. Information in the top status bar is fixed and controlled by ComAp.

Image 5.25 Top Status Bar description

Image 5.26 : Top Status Bar – Mode selector dialog

1. Mode selector – Mode selector is dedicated for the controller mode selection. Using arrow left and right
the controller mode is changed (only on the metering screens). The choice must be always confirmed by
enter button. There is 5s timer for the automatic mode selector dialog cancellation. The mode selector
dialog can be also canceled by menu button.
2. Page title – Each page and each metering screen has its own title. The first number in square brackets
describes the actual metering screen position. The second number describes the total available number of
metering screens.
3. Trending – The icon is active when the trending is running. Icon is inactive when the trending is stopped.
4. USB Stick – The icon is active if the USB stick is plugged in the display unit. Icon is inactive if there is no
USB stick plugged in.
5. Access Lock – Access lock icon is active if the display is locked for security reasons. Icon is inactive if the
controller unit is not locked.
6. PC connection – PC connection icon is active if the unit established connection to the PC using the USB
cable. Icon is inactive if there is not established connection to the PC.
7. Alarm indication – The alarm icon is flashing red if there is at least one unconfirmed alarm (shutdown or
warning) in the alarmlist. The icon lights red if there is at least one confirmed active alarm and no
unconfirmed alarm in the alarmlist. The icon is inactive if the alarmlist is empty.
8. User – The user icon lights green if the user is logged in to the controller. The icon is inactive if the user is
logged out.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 75

5.3.2 Metering screens
Metering screens are dedicated for important controller values and setpoints.
InteliMains 510 metering screens are predefined by ComAp and covers all the application types.
The movement between the metering screens is done using the arrow up and down buttons in the front
panel.
The entire screens and instruments on the screens are dynamically displayed or hidden based on the
following state of the controller unit:
Application type
Wiring controller settings
Connected Plug-In modules
Configured CAN modules
Aftertreatment ECU list settings

InteliMains 510 metering screens by default

1. Home
2. Power
3. Generator
4. Mains
5. Bus
6. Synchro
7. Power Management
8. Analog inputs
9. Binary Inputs | Outputs
10. Statistics
11. Ethernet
12. After-treatment
13. CM-4G-GPS
14. EM-BIO8-EFCP-A
15. EM-BIO8-EFCP-B
16. CAN modules
17. ECU modules
18. Virtual modules
Note: Some of the screens are added automatically If external modules, ECU modules and others are added
using InteliConfig software. The screens are automatically removed if the respective module is removed from
the configuration.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 76

5.3.3 Alarmlist
The alarmlist page is intended for displaying the controller alarms. If any of the following type of the controller
alarm occurs The alarmlist page is displayed and also the alarm icon in the Top status bar starts flashing
RED, even if it is not the shutdown alarm. The Automatic jump to the Alarmlist page is performed only in case
the actual GUI position is the Home metering screen. The alarm icon in the top status bar is informative icon
where the display unit informs the user that there is any alarm stored in the controller unit. Pressing the User
button 3 opens the alarmlist page. The alarmlist page is displayed until the alarmlist contains at least one
unconfirmed alarm.
There are 4 different types of controller alarms:
Warning (often also known as 1st level alarm) – represented by the YELLOW color. These types of
alarms inform the user that something is wrong and need to be checked and confirmed.
Shutdown (often also known as 2nd level alarm) – represented by the RED color. These types of
alarms protects the Gen-set or Engine during the wrong state.
ECU alarm – represented by the BLUE color. This type of alarm comes from the connected external ECU
units.
Sensor fail alarm – represented by the WHITE color. A special kind of alarm that appears if any
connected sensor emits the wrong state.

Image 5.27 : Alarmlist Page

1. Alarm item number – displays the number of the concrete alarm.

2. Alarm item star – describes if the alarm is CONFIRMED or NOT CONFIRMED. The confirmation action
is performed by the Alarm reset button in the front panel
a. Star is displayed – alarm is NOT CONFIRMED
b. Star is not displayed – alarm is CONFIRMED (using alarm reset button)
3. Alarm description – The short description of the alarm
4. Alarm coloring – There are specified the color and asterix combination
Level 1 (warning) alarm

Active/unconfirmed : * / yellow background / dark text (asterix active)

Active/confirmed : yellow background / dark text (asterix inactive)

Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / yellow text / asterix active

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 77

 Level 2 (shutdown) alarm

Active/unconfirmed : * / red background / white text (asterix active)

Active/confirmed : red background / white text (asterix inactive)

Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / red text (asterix active)

Sensor fail alarm

Active/unconfirmed : * / white background / dark text (asterix active)

Active/confirmed : white background / dark text (asterix inactive)

Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / white text (asterix active)

ECU alarm

Active/unconfirmed : * / blue background / white text (asterix active)

Active/confirmed : blue background / white text (asterix inactive)

Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / blue text (asterix active)

5. Topstatus bar Alarmlist icon – The alarm icon is flashing red if there is at least one unconfirmed alarm
(shutdown or warning) in the alarmlist. The icon lights red if there is at least one confirmed active alarm
and no unconfirmed alarm in the alarmlist. The icon is inactive if the alarmlist is empty. This is information
that something is wrong and need to be checked and resolved.
Note: The Alarmlist displays maximum 8 alarm items at the same time. If there is more than 8 alarms in the
alarmlist it is possible to list in the page to another alarm items by arrow up and down buttons.

Note: The alarmlist page is automatically displayed and backlight is turned on if the new alarm appears (only
in case the actual GUI position is the Home metering screen).

IMPORTANT: InteliMains 510 controller displays maximum 16 alarms.

IMPORTANT: Alarm reset button confirms all the unconfirmed alarms stored in controller.

IMPORTANT: If the actual GUI position is Alarmlist page and there is at least one uncofirmed
alarm in the Alarmlist the jump to the home metering screen and backlight timeout are ignored.

5.3.4 Setpoints
The setpoint page is intended for setting the controller values. Each type of controller has specific setpoints to
be set. The setpoints also depend on the type of application like SPTM / MINT or MCB / MGCB etc.
Availability of the setpoint item also depends on configuration level settings in Administration page. Setpoint
is set in 2 steps.
1st step – Setpoint group is selected using buttons arrow up and down and confirmed using enter button.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 78

 Image 5.28 : Setpoints Page overview

1. Setpoints group – the column setpoint group displays the available groups based on the controller,
application type and configuration level settings. Respective setpoint group is selected using enter button.
2. Available setpoints in actually selected group – each setpoint group contains specific setpoints. The
informative column Setpoint name displays the available set of setpoints to be set in each Setpoint group.
This column is only informative and can NOT be set using the arrow left and right. The setpoint setting is
done using the 2nd step – see below.
2nd step – Setpoint item is selected using the buttons arrow up and down and the dialog for value setting
is called using the enter button. The dialogs are described in the chapter Dialogs.

Image 5.29 : Group Setpoints Page

1. Setpoint name – Setpoint is set using the enter button. Specific dialog is displayed and the value can be
set. There are several types of dialogs (text, numeric, stringlist) and the type of called dialog depends on
the setpoint type. The dialogs are described in the chapter Dialogs.
2. Actual value – Informative actual value for specific setpoint is displayed. Value range, original value and
default value for the selected setpoint are displayed inside the dialog.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 79

 Protected Setpoint Indication
If the setpoint is protected by password then the icon (crossed hand) is displayed just behind the setpoint
value. The setpoint protection is set using PC Tool InteliConfig.

Force Value Indication

If the setpoint is forced by another setpoint then the icon (double right arrow) is displayed just behind the
setpoint value.
Green Icon – Forcing is active
Grey Icon – Force Value is set to the specific setpoint and forcing is inactive

Image 5.30 : Force Value and Protected Setpoint Indication

IMPORTANT: If the controller is locked (Access Lock function is active) then the attempt for
setpoint editation is denied and the information dialog is displayed (Controller is Locked). See
chapter Administration and Access Lock.

Login screen
The group Password is not setpoint group. This Password item is manually placed to the first group position
on the program code level just for this controller unit.

Image 5.31 : Main Setpoints Page

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 80

 Password item – the item dedicated for the login and logout to the controller.

Image 5.32 : Setpoints Password Page

Image 5.33 : Login Dialog

Currently Logged-in User – the information about actually logged in user or his ID if loged using ID and PIN.
Access Rights – Access rights of the actually logged in user
0 – user has access rights 0, which means "logged-out" user
0,1 – user has access rights 0 + 1 access rights
0,1,2 – user has access rights 0 + 1 + 2 access rights
0,1,2,3 – user has access rights 0 + 1 + 2 + 3, which means administrator rights
Login and Logout buttons
Login button calls the login dialog.
Logout button performs the logout action.

5.3.5 History
The history page displays the records of the important moments in the controller history.
There are 2 types of history records :
Event records – are also known as standard history records. This type of record appears in case the
controller event has been made. The time stamp history also belongs in the event history. The time record
is stored for a specified period of time.
System records – are also known as text history record. These type of records are generated during the
user login/off, controller programming or other system actions.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 81

 Image 5.34 : History page overview

1. Fixed column – has a different shade of colour. Fixed column is always merged and anchored on the left
side of the history page.
2. Event history record – this type of record appears in case the controller event has been made. The time
stamp history also belongs in the event history. The time record is stored for a specified period of time.
Pressing the enter button the dialog with detailed information for selected record is displayed.
3. System history record – this type of record appears in case the controller system action has been made.
The time stamp history also belongs in the event history. The time record is stored for a specified period of
time. Pressing the enter button the dialog with detailed information for selected record is displayed.
4. Jump to first row and column – the jump to the first row and first column is performed if the button is
pressed.
5. Listing mode – by pressing this button the listing mode is changed. There are available 3 modes : listing
by 1 item, listing by 1 page, listing by 10 page. The mode is useful if the history is full of records. Listing
mode is also automatically changed if the listing buttons arrow up and down are pressed for longer time.
Original mode is set when the listing buttons are released.

Image 5.35 : History page – Item detail dialog

Note: Pressing the enter button on the actually selected row the dialog with detailed information for selected
record is displayed.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 82

 IMPORTANT: Each controller unit supports the specific number of history records. E.g. controller
InteliMains 510 supports 500 history records. Default configuration consists of 33 columns.
Maximal column amount is approximately 100 columns based on the type of the observed value.

5.3.6 Trends

Image 5.36 : Trends page overview

The Trends page is divided on to 3 main blocks :

Main Trends Window is intended to display all trends. The view and chart movement is fully automatic.
Channel panel displays the actual values and sample period.
Function buttons is intended for start, stop and settings of the trends.

Image 5.37 : Trends page description

1. X axis – X axis displays the time stamps. The view of X axis is fully automatic.
2. Y axis – If the default range is not suitable for the displaying of the value it can be adjusted in settings
option. See bellow for more information.
3. Grid – the grid is displayed behind the trends charts. The grid is fully automatic.
4. Trend line – each channel have different color for better value identification. The color of the trend line
match to the Value color in channel panel.
5. Actual period – actual period settings. The period can be adjusted in settings option.
6. Actual channel value panels – display the values of the newest (actual) sample.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 83

 7. Trend Icon (Top Status bar) – if the trends are running the informative icon is shown in the top status bar
8. Start / Stop button – the button is dedicated for manual start and stop of the trends. It is possible to setup
the automatic start of trending based on the trigger. There are 2 trigers : Return to Home metering screen
and the specified bit of the available binary value.
9. Channel settings button – There are some settings available for the trends. See more information
bellow.

Trends settings
Trends settings page is dedicated for the available trends settings. The navigation in trends settings page is
done by buttons arrow up, arrow down, arrow left, arrow right, enter, user button 1 and 2.

Image 5.38 : Trends page settings overview

1. Channel value – the channel value menu appears if the enter button is pressed just on the position.
Inside the channel value menu the requested channel value can be selected. The value availability
depends on the type of configuration stored in the controller.
2. Low limit value – the low limit value is intended for changing the low border of the value range. For the
best view of the displayed trends it is highly recommended to set this limit to the minimum expected value
with some reserve.
3. High limit value – the high limit value is intended for changing the high border of the value range. For the
best view of the displayed trends it is highly recommended to set this limit to the maximum expected value
with some reserve.
4. Quick channel removal – pressing the enter button on the trash bin icon the actual channel is not
configured.
5. Period – section is dedicated for setting of the sample time period.
6. Run – the section is intended for the selection of the run mode
a. once – trending only until the trend chart window is full
b. circular – cyclic mode (trending is repeated continuously) – be aware the samples are stored only in
internal temporal memory, the trend chart starts moving when the trend chart window is full, the
oldest samples are trashed out
7. Start option – The start of trends are triggered by the start option. There are 3 start options.
a. Binary state - the trigger is the bit of the selected binary value. Manual start and stop is still active.
b. Manual (by default) – the trigger is the start button called by user.
c. Home – the trigger is the return to the Home metering screen from any GUI position. Manual start
and stop is still active.
8. Bit of binary value selection – If the start option is set to Binary state then the field for the bit of the
concrete binary value is activated.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 84

 9. Acknowledgment button – Pressing the user button 1 (Confirm) the settings are saved.
10. Cancel button – Pressing the user button 2 (Cancel) the settings are canceled and the main trends page
is displayed without any change of the trends configuration.
Note: To get the best view of the displayed trends it is recommended to manually set the typical value range
for each channel.

IMPORTANT: If the trending is started and the changes have been made in the settings the
trending is restarted based on the new settings.

IMPORTANT: Be aware the samples are stored only in internal temporal memory. Trend chart
starts moving when the trend chart window is full, the oldest samples are trashed out.

IMPORTANT: There is no option to store the trends to the external memories like USB stick, etc.

5.3.7 Values
The values page is intended to monitor the controller values. Each type of controller has specific set of values.
Values screen is visually similar to setpoins screen.
To list across the values the navigation, enter and menu buttons is used.

Image 5.39 : Values screen overview

5.3.8 Administration

Image 5.40 : Administration Screen Overview

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 85

 Init screen
The init screen is the special screen (bitmap) defined and stored in the controller. The init screen is displayed
during the booting procedure. The init screen is also accessible from administration as a first list item. The
purpose of the init screen is to allow the user to create and show his own initial logo screen during the booting
procedure. The init screen logo can be uploaded using the InteliConfig. By default the init screen is predefined
by ComAp.

Image 5.41 : Init screen overview

Note: Init screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the metering
screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

Controller Info
Controller info page is dedicated for important information about the entire unit. These information is useful
mainly for issue troubleshooting .
Controller info page is divided into 3 main blocks of information :
Integrated Color Display unit
Controller unit
Configuration

Image 5.42 : Administration Page – Controller Info

Note: Similar values with similar structure can be displayed using InteliConfig PC tool.

Note: Controller Info screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the
metering screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 86

 Modules Info
Modules Info screen is dedicated for important information about the connected CAN and Plug-In modules
information. The page Modules Info displays the information from the following type of connected modules :
Plug-In modules
CAN peripheral extension modules

Image 5.43 : Administration Page - Modules Info

Note: The availability of the connected module depends on the type of controller unit.

Note: Modules Info screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the
metering screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

Electronic Devices
Electronic Devices screen is dedicated for important information about the connected ECU.

Image 5.44 : Administration Page – Electronic Devices

Note: The availability of the connected Electronic Device depends on the type of controller unit.

Note: Electronic Devices screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the
metering screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 87

 Settings

Image 5.45 : Administration Page – Settings

1. Backlight Control – can be controlled using Internal settings or external signal over LBI Dark Mode
a. Internal – Backlight timeout and backlight intensity is respected from the manual settings
b. LBI Dark Mode – if controller LBI Dark Mode is activated then the Status LED and LCD backlight is
completely diabled. Be aware that the application and controller is still running. Keyboard is still in
functional state. The Backlight Timeout is still respected in this option.
2. Backlight Timeout – if the cell area is pressed the dialog for time settings is displayed. The user is able to
set the period from 1 up to 241 minutes. There is also the option to set NO Timeout which means the
display unit is backlighted forever. Note that in remote displays like IntelIVision 5.2 the Backlight Timeout
option is not mirrored with controller setpoint Backlight Timeout (it is mirrored in Integrated Color Display).
3. Brightness Control:
a. Manual (by default) – the value of the backlight is set manually using the value dialog (point 3)
b. External– - the value of the backlight is given by the Analog Input settings in InteliConfig and
connected value of resistor, voltage or current (based on the type of the selected sensor).
4. Brightness intensity – the value is selected using the value dialog. Note the value is applied immediately
during the change of the value.
5. Internal Temperature information – gives the actual inside temperature of the unit. There is
implemented automatic mechanism for lowering the backlight intensity based the internal derating
backlight curve. If the inside temperature exceeds 35 °C the area behind the temperature lights yellow.
The yellow color indicates that the display backlight curve is applied and automatically starts derate the
backlight intensity. The backlight intensity returns to normal when the temperature is decreased bellow
35 °C. This feature saves the lifetime of the internal components.
IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to use backlight on the standard level max. 60%.
Maximal backlight intensity level of 100% is suitable only for application with higher amount of
the ambient light. Be aware that higher intensity level means higher surface front glass
temperature and lower lifetime.

IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to use Backlight Time (timer) set on the reasonable
amount of time (approximately 30 minutes) during the normal running genset or engine phase. It
is because of saving lifetime of the display unit. The display unit is still running if the backlight is
off. For switching on the LCD backlight the simple pressing any button is necessary.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 88

 Note: Settings screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the metering
screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

Languages

Image 5.46 : Administration Page – Languages

Language settings – the list of languages stored in the controller configuration is displayed in the list of
possible languages.
The integrated color display unit supports the following languages
English
Chinese
Japanese
The integrated color display unit partially supports the following languages
Bulgarian, Taiwan, Czech, German, Greek, Spanish, Finnish, French, Hungarian, Icelandic, Italian,
Korean, Dutch – Netherlands, Norwegian, Polish, Roman, Russian, Croatian, Slovak, Swedish,
Turkish, Ukrainian, Slovenian, Estonian, Latvian, Lithunian, Vietnamese, Italian, Portuguese, Bosnian
The integrated color display unit supports the following Unicode standard character sets
Basic Latin, Latin-1 Supplement, Latin Extended-A, Latin Extended-B, Latin Extended Additional,
Cyrillic, Greek, Greek Extended, Arabic, Arabic Supplement, General Punctuation, Superscripts and
Subscripts, Currency Symbols, Arrows, CJK Unified Ideographs, Kanji, Hiragana, Katakana, Hangul
Jamo, Thai
IMPORTANT: Even the language is configured in InteliConfig the specific language is unavailable
if the language is available in configuration (but empty) or the language is not supported by
integrated color display unit.

Note: The flag is not displayed if the language is supported but the flag icon does not exist in the integrated
color display unit.

Note: Languages screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the
metering screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 89

 Configuration Level

Image 5.47 : Administration Page – Configuration Level

Standard – Limited amount of settings are available for configuration. The description which settings are
available in chapters concerning to controller functions.
Advanced – Set by factory default. All the settings are available for configuration. Be aware that only
experiences users should perform the settings of extended functions.
Note: By default the Advanced settings is selected which means all the setpoints are available by default. To
restrict the availability the Standard setting must be performed. The advanced and standard category are set
in InteliConfig PC application.

Note: Configuration Level screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from
the metering screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

Export / Import

Image 5.48 : Administration Page – Export & Import

Import Package – is dedicated for integrated color display unit firmware updated, controller firmware
update, controller archive update. Extension modules firmware update is not supported.
If the USB stick is not connected the import function is not available and visually indicated as a
greyed text.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 90

 File packages used for firmware import can be prepared only in InteliConfig PC application only.
The files (*.pcg3) prepared in InteliConfig (for import) must be stored in the root of USB stick
folder – the only root folder is supported for import.
Import function is always protected by Administrator password. Until the correct credentials are
not inserted the import function is unavailable. Be aware that there is implemented algorithm to
have password protected against the brute force attempts. It is possible to insert credentials using
UserID and PIN or Username and Password.

The message dialog (Controller unit is not ready) is displayed if the controller is not in state ready
for programming (e.g. Gen-set running)
Export Archive – is dedicated for the entire archive export.
If the USB stick is not connected the export function is not available and visually indicated as a
greyed text.
The archive files (.aig4) is exported to the fixed directory in the USB stick (eg:
"root:/IG500/Archive"). The directory structure is automatically created if does not exist.
Export function is not protected by password.
The message dialog (Controller unit is not ready) is displayed if the controller is not in state ready
for archive export (e.g. Gen-set running)
Waiting dialog is displayed during the export process.
The message dialog is displayed after archive process.
Archive Export Successful if successfully exported.
Archive Export Failed if any error occurs during the export process.
Integrated color display unit is restarted after export process.

Note: Once the USB stick is inserted to the display unit the directory and its subdirecotries are created
automatically if does not exist.

IMPORTANT: Requested files to be imported must be saved in the root directory on a USB Stick.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 91

 Imported File selection

Image 5.49 : Administration Page – Export & Import - File selection

File selection – is available if the conditions above (in section Import Package) is fulfilled
Only files with pcg3 extension is displayed.
Maximum 100 files (*.pcg3) in root is displayed.
The message dialog (Package Incompatible) is displayed if the incompatible pcg3 file is used
The message dialog (Invalid File) is displayed if the pcg3 file is invalid or corrupted

Import proccess

Image 5.50 : Administration Page – Export & Import – Import process

Import process – is available if the correct and compatible file is selected conditions above (in section
Import Package) is fulfilled
The import process is not allowed if at least one file in the package is not compatible with each other
– the Import button is not displayed.
When the Import process is started it is not possible to interrupt it.
Bar Message is displayed
Package Import Successful (green colored) – if success
Package Import Failed (red colored) – if any error during the process

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 92

 the user is informed about the actual item progress

– the file has been imported correctly

– the file import is under progress

– the file is incompatible

The device is rebooted after import process.

IMPORTANT: Integrated color display unit firmware is updated in two steps. Firstly the firmware
is uploaded to the internal memory (indicated by icon ). The second step is the firmware
update from internal memory. The firmware is updated immediately after reboot using bootloader
(Indicated by progress bars and messages in limited GUI). After all the unit is automatically
started with new firmware.

IMPORTANT: Only in some special cases the import process using USB stick must be performed
twice. This situation is always described in New Feature List with more detailed information.

IMPORTANT: Only FAT16 and FAT32 file system on USB stick are supported.

Note: If the USB stick is plugged in the Import/Export page is automatically displayed.

Note: If the import proccess fails try the import proccess again.

Note: If the import proccess fails try to create new package file using InteliConfig.

Note: Export / Import screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the
metering screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

Service QR Codes
Service QR Codes screen is dedicated for easy maintenance and technical support. Together with ComAp
Smart Hint application the usage of the small display is even easier.

Image 5.51 : Administration Page – Service QR Codes

1. Password Reset – Password Reset function is dedicated for simple handling of the password reset
procedure. Scan the QR code using the Smart Hint application and send the reset code to the ComAp
technical support.
2. Controller Statistics – Controller statistics data gathered during the controller operation. Smart Hint
application displays the controller statistic data in one place in a readable text form and could be further
investigated.
3. System Info – System data info in one place in Smart Hint application.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 93

 IMPORTANT: Each dialog in Setpoints screen consists of the small QR code which represents
the name of the setpoint. Smart Hint application gives you additional help or hint of the setpoint.

Note: Settings screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the metering
screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

Service screen
The service screen is the special screen (bitmap) defined and stored in the controller. The service screen is
also accessible from administration as a last list item. The purpose of the service screen is to allow the site
administrator to put into the display (resp. controller) important data for technical support. The status screen
can be uploaded using the InteliConfig. By default the service screen is predefined by ComAp.

Image 5.52 : Service screen overview

Note: Service screen is accessible using the buttons combination Enter + Menu just only from the metering
screens. Enter button has to be pressed first.

5.3.9 Quick help

6 back to Table of contents

Logging in/off to the Controller

The user is able to log in/off to/from the controller via the menu Passwords in Setpoint page.

Image 5.53 : Password menu

1. Current Access Rights are shown on the top of the page.

2. Press the button on item Enter Password, the Password dialog will appear.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 94

 3. Insert the correct password. If the password is not correct, the user is informed about it. Be aware there is
a brute force algorithm protection implemented.
4. The icon (user) in the top status bar turns green when the user is logged in.

Image 5.54 : Password dialog

Note: Each Access Rights password can be changed by inserting old password and new password.

IMPORTANT: If the setpoint is protected by password the password dialog appears when the
attempt to password change is performed.

IMPORTANT: Be aware there is a brute force algorithm protection implemented. If the brute force
protection is active then the user is informed by Invalid Password message even the password is
inserted correctly.

Important values
The important controllers values and system buttons are displayed by default and accessible from the Home,
Power and Synchro metering screens. The breaker status, controller status and system timer are also
displayed on the Home metering screen.

Image 5.55 : Important values

Note: The adjustment of the important values can be made using powerfull tool Screen Editor (in
InteliConfig).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 95

 Controller mode change

Image 5.56 : Controller mode change

1. Press the button arrow left or right in any metering screen

2. Change the controller mode using button arrow left or right and confirm the selection using enter button.
3. If all the controller conditions are fulfilled the Controller mode is changed.
IMPORTANT: If the controller mode setpoint is protected by password the password dialog
appears when the attempt to confirm the selection is performed.

Password change
The password change can be performed using the Password menu in Setpoint page.

Image 5.57 : Password menu

1. Choose the item for which access right you want to change password.
2. Using password change dialog enter correct old and new requested password and confirm the choice.
3. The password for respective Access Rights level is changed.

Display brightness settings

The display brightness setting is adjustable using the Administration Menu - InteliVision Settings.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 96

 Image 5.58 : Display brightness settings

Backlight Timeout - can be set at a range of 1 to 254 minutes or Disabled. Disabled means the backlight
never shuts down.
Brightness control
1. If the manual mode is chosen the user is responsible for his own backlight intensity.
2. If the External mode is chosen the display unit expects the external resistor (potentiometer) on its Analog
input. The type of sensor can be set in InteliConfig.
Brightness intensity - The backlight intensity can be adjusted using the value dialog from 1 up to 100%. It is
not possible to set 0 to avoid total shutdown of backlight intensity.
IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to use maximum backlight if it is really needed. The
temperature of the LCD grows linearly with the set of LCD backlight intensity. The product
lifetime is temperature dependent. In general it means higher temperature lower lifetime.

IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to set the Backlight Timeout to reasonable time (e.g
5 minutes). If the backlight is off then any button press switch on the backlight again.

State messages

State message Description

Running Indication of correctly running controller.
Controller unit initialization is under progress. The message is displayed during
Initialize control unit
the booting procedure.
Control unit is programmed The controller upgrade process is under progress.
Controller configuration reading is in progress. Text disappears when controller
Configuration Reading
is detected.
Detecting main CU failed Internal communication error.
Unsupported configuration format Configuration version is not supported
Screens template has unsupported screen format. Screens template is missing
Unsupported screen format
in configuration.
Control unit firmware is corrupted Controller unit is not in valid state.
Wrong configuration content Content of the configuration in controller unit does not match to configuration.

6 back to Quick help

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 97

 Hints

UI Position Issue Hint / Description

1. Download the latest FW from the ComAp webpage.
StartUp Screen Detecting main CU failed
2. Import or reimport the newest ICD firmware.
Not compatible application 1. Download the latest FW from the ComAp webpage.
StartUp Screen
branch in CU 2. Import or reimport the newest ICD firmware.
StartUp Screen Firmware is corrupted 1. Import or reimport the newest ICD firmware.

Unsupported configuration 1. Import the newest ICD firmware.

StartUp Screen
format 2. Upgrade the controller firmware to the newest version.
1. Import the newest ICD firmware.
2. Upgrade the controller firmware to the newest version.
StartUp Screen Unsupported screen format
3. Check if there is at least one language in configuration
using InteliConfig.
1. Check the controller configuration using InteliConfig
StartUp Screen Wrong configuration content Tool.
2. Try to rewrite the controller configuration.
StartUp Screen Controller unreachable 1. Check if the expected controller is online
1. Double check the wiring.
Controller identification 2. Double check all the communication parameters.
StartUp Screen
timeout 3. Double check the missing or wrong Access Code in
Communication settings screen.
Connecting and connected state are marked red because at
that moment the user is not logged in yet. Login procedure is
Connecting / Connected automatic to InteliGen 500 controller on StartUp screen (user
StartUp Screen
(with InteliGen 500) with access rights 0 is always loged in). Due to this fact the
connecting and connected state are the transition states only
on StartUp screen.
The metering screens are adjustable using the Screen Editor
Metering Screens Adjustment (in InteliConfig). See chapter Screen Editor for more
information. The Screen Editor tool also has its own manual.
Administration screens is accessible using the buttons
Administration Access to administration combination Enter + Menu just only from the metering screens.
Enter button has to be pressed first.
Init Screen Both screens are adjustable only in Integrated Color Display
Adjustment
Service Screen unit. The feature is not available in InteliVision 5.2 1.0.0.
Inactive buttons are visually indicated as grayed button. It
Bottom Statusbar Inactive Buttons means that the button is not available for any reason (e.g.
password protected button).
Alarm reset button confirms all the unconfirmed alarms stored
Alarmlist Buttons Function in controller and resets the horn. Horn reset button resets only
the horn.
If the actual GUI position is Alarmlist page and there is at least
Alarmlist Automatic Jump one uncofirmed alarm in the Alarmlist the jump to the home
metering screen and backlight timeout are ignored.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 98

 UI Position Issue Hint / Description
The number of records is different for each controller. E.g.
InteliGen 500 supports 500 history records. Default
Number of Records in
History configuration consists of 33 columns. Maximal column amount
InteliGen 500
is approximately 100 columns based on the type of the
observed value.
To get the best view of the displayed trends it is recommended
to manually set the typical value range for each channel. If the
Trends View
channel is set the low and high limit values are automatically
set based on the default value in configuration.
If the communication between display and controller is
interrupted for any reason all the trends values are lost and the
trending is automatically stopped. If the Trends settings option
Trends Communication Interruption
(Start option) is set to Home then the trending is automatically
restarted in the moment the actual UI postiion becomes Home
screen.
If the import proccess fails try the import proccess again.
Export / Import
Import proccess Check if the import package is not corupted.
Screen
Try to use another USB stick.

5.4 General Functions

5.4.1 Alarm Management 100
5.4.2 AMF Function 102
5.4.3 Breaker Control 104
5.4.4 Connecting To Load 107
5.4.5 Control Groups 112
5.4.6 Crash Dump 113
5.4.7 Distributed Power Management Signals 114
5.4.8 Electric state machine 119
5.4.9 Event History 121
5.4.10 Exercise Timers 123
5.4.11 Firewall 130
5.4.12 Forced Value 131
5.4.13 I/O Configuration 132
5.4.14 Load Shedding 134
5.4.15 Mains Decoupling Protections 137
5.4.16 Mains Import Measurement 138
5.4.17 Multi soft start 139
5.4.18 Operating Modes 139
5.4.19 Output Control – Frequency/Load 141
5.4.20 Output Control - Voltage/PF 143
5.4.21 Parallel To Mains Operation 144
5.4.22 Peak shaving 152
5.4.23 PLC - Programmable Logic Controller 152
5.4.24 Power Formats And Units 164

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 99

5.4.25 Power Management 165
5.4.26 Protections 185
5.4.27 Pulse Counters 194
5.4.28 Regulation Loops 195
5.4.29 Sensor Curves 196
5.4.30 Soft unload 198
5.4.31 System Start/Stop 199
5.4.32 User Buttons 199
5.4.33 User management and data access control 201
5.4.34 User Setpoints 206
5.4.35 Voltage Phase Sequence Detection 208

6 back to Controller setup

5.4.1 Alarm Management

Alarms purpose is to indicate occurrence of unwanted situation such as unexpected opening of breaker,
generator overvoltage etc. But in certain situations, we use alarms as a way to visualize information that affects
current behavior of the controller.
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a non-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding the System control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the System or technology.
One alarm of level 1 and one alarm of level 2 can be assigned to each binary input
Multiple protections can be assigned on each analog input.
There are also Controller integrated protections (page 102) with Fixed Protection States (page
600).
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 102).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 100

 Image 5.59 Analog input alarm evaluation principle

Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.

Image 5.60 Alarm List

Visual interpretation of alarm is decided by terminal side. Commonly for active alarms whole row background
is colored (yellow/red/blue). Inactive alarms have transparent background color and text is colored
(yellow/red/blue)

Remote alarm messaging

The controller can sends emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist (page 102) or new
event is written in Event History (page 121). The message will contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 102) or
reasons from Event History (page 121). To enable this function, adjust setpoints MPR Message (page 431),
Wrn Message (page 431), or Event Message (page 431) to ON. Also enter a valid email address to the
setpoints, E-mail Address 1 (page 427), E-mail Address 2 (page 427), E-mail Address 3 (page 427), or E-
mail Address 4 (page 428).
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 101

 BOC
Terminal Event email Warning email Mains Protection email
email
RS485 NO NO NO NO
USB NO NO NO NO
Ethernet YES YES YES YES

Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a new
alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms
ECU alarms

Controller integrated protections

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Al, Hst, ALI,
MPR). Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.

User configured protections

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the protection type (e.g. Wrn, Al, Hst,
ALI). Protection type and alarm name are selected by user during the Configuration of protections in
InteliConfig (page 189). Then the alarm name follows.

ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the Electronic Control Unit. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic
Trouble Code, which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the
alarm occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric code
and the ECU fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.

5.4.2 AMF Function

The "AMF function" represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed and stop after the
mains has been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by setpoint AMF Start (page 286) and
can be affected by binary inputs AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 536) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 545).
IMPORTANT: The AMF function works only in AUTO mode.

Related setpoints are:

AMF Timers AMF Settings

AMF Start (page 286) Return From Island (page 288)
Emergency Start Delay (page 287) Return to Mains in TEST Mode (page 289)
Mains Return Delay (page 287) MCB Logic (page 289)
MCB Close Delay (page 288) MCB Opens On (page 290)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 102

 Mains failure detection
The mains is considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 282)) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 281) for a time period longer than Mains Undervoltage Delay (page 283)
respectively Mains Overvoltage Delay (page 281).
The mains voltage unbalance is out of limit given by setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 284) for a
time period longer than Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 284).
The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 285) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 285) for a time period longer than Mains <>f Delay (page 286).
Alarm ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 671) is active.

Healthy mains detection

The mains is considered to be healthy when all of following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 282) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 281).
The mains voltage unbalance is within the limits given by the setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page
284).
The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpointsMains Underfrequency (page 285) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 285).
Alarm ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 671) is not active.

The AMF procedure

IMPORTANT: The controller has this behavior only in AUTO mode and partly in TEST mode.

When the mains failure is detected and AMF Start (page 286) = Enabled, the following steps are performed:
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) is set to Mains Fail, the MCB is opened.
The timer for automatic start of the System Emergency Start Delay (page 287) begins to count down.
If Gen-sets are not in parallel with the mains (MCB or MGCB is opened) #System Start Delay (page 317)
is count down on Gen-set controllers, otherwise the timer is skipped after 1 second count down.
After the timers has elapsed, the System is started.

Note: The automatic start of the System due to AMF function can be disabled by the binary inputs AMF
START BLOCK (PAGE 536) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 545).

If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) is set to Gen Run / BUS Voltage, the MCB is opened once the
Gen-set / BUS voltage and frequency are within limits.
After Open Transfer Min Break (page 339) elapses, the MGCB and MGCB (in case of MGCB
application) is closed and the System begins to supply the load.
After the mains is restored to normal, the timer Mains Return Delay (page 287) begins to count down.
Transition of load back to mains is adjusted via setpoint Transfer Gen To Mains (page 341). Behavior of
transition is also affected by binary inputs FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537), FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538) and
REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560). After the transition the Gen-set goes to cooling.
If Gen-sets are not in parallel with the mains (MGCB is opened) #System Stop Delay (page 317) is count
down on Gen-set controllers, otherwise the timer is skipped after 1 second count down. After that the Gen-
set goes to cooling.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 103

 If mains fails during the transition the System takes the load again. The MGCB s and MGCB (in case of
MGCB application) are closed again if gen-sets are in cooling.
The AMF procedure ends when the System is stopped.
If AMF procedure is activated during TEST mode the System is normally loaded and once the mains is
restored the transfer of load to mains is defined by the setpoint Return to Mains in TEST Mode (page
289).

5.4.3 Breaker Control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The Master Mains Circuit Breaker or contactor – MGCB
The Mains Circuit Breaker or contactor – MCB (see the chapter MCB special requirements (page 107))
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when designing the
wiring of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at
any time.
After opening the breaker, there is internal delay for another closing of breaker. Delay is 6 seconds - 5
seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again. For
opening of breaker there is no delay.

Breaker control outputs

An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested
Close/Open by the controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or open command,
otherwise an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 2 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The
ON coil
output is intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts
OFF coil until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 2 seconds. The output is intended for
control of open coils of circuit breakers.
The MGCB UV coil output is active the whole time the System is running (not in idle or
cooling). The MCB UV coil output is active when the controller is switched on. The output
UV coil
is deactivated for at least 2 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off.
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 104

 Image 5.61 Breaker control outputs

Breaker fail detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback. If breaker feedback is not configured and breaker control mode is internal, the alarm will be activated
always because the change of the breaker close/open will not be followed by breaker feedback.
There is an exception for the MCB breaker. If the breaker feedback indicates the MCB has unexpectedly opened
without any command given by the breaker close/open the controller will accept it and following behavior will
depend on mains condition. The MCB breaker stay opened if mains fails or is closed if mains is healthy.
There are three different alarm types, see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker
fail is detected immediately without delay and alarm Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660) is issued. The alarm is
issued also after 500 ms when there is mismatch of LBI GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) and LBI GCB
FEEDBACK NEGATIVE (PAGE 553). Except opening of MCB.

Image 5.62 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - open

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 105

 Image 5.63 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - close

When binary output breaker close/open is opened, there is 2 seconds waiting time for feedback If
feedback doesn't match, the alarm Wrn MGCB Fail To Open (page 661)/Wrn MCB Fail To Open (page
659) is issued.

Image 5.64 Breaker fail - breaker close/open opens

When binary output breaker close/open is closed there is 2 seconds waiting time for feedback. If the
feedback doesn't match the output, close/open is opened and closed again after delay defined by setpoint
Delay Between Closing Attempts (page 256). If feedback doesn't match after second try and 2 seconds
delay elapsed, the alarm Wrn MGCB Fail To Close (page 661)/Wrn MCB Fail To Close (page 658) is
issued.

Image 5.65 Breaker fail - breaker close/open closes

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 106

 Note: In case of using both feedbacks (standard and negative), both of them have to be in correct position,
otherwise breaker fail is issued after 500 ms.

A new alarm ALI GCB Closing Is Blocked (page 1) is activated in case Setpoint GCB Control Mode
(page 254) is set to Internal and any of following generator protections are switched to Disabled
Generator <f Protection
Generator >f Protection
Generator <V Protection
Generator >V and >>V Protection (both overvoltage must be disabled)
Short Circuit Protection

MCB special requirements

If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in such a way
that the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the logical binary output MCB CLOSE/OPEN
(PAGE 579) closes. This behavior is called "negative logic" and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB
Logic (page 289). The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is
switched off.
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have failed,
because it will lose power for the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary to prevent
triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 657) alarm: MCB Opens On (page 290) = Mains Fail.
If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is not fitted, it
is not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no power for the motor
drive until the System is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290)
= Gen Run will prevent triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 657) alarm.

5.4.4 Connecting To Load

Connecting To Dead Bus 107
Synchronization 108
Connecting to load depends on the state of MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) and on the measured bus voltage. In
case the Load is without power (bus voltage is below 2 % of nominal voltage and MCB is opened) the
Connecting To Dead Bus (page 107) is applied, in other case the Synchronization (page 108) process is
needed.
Connecting Mains to Load
Connecting to load depends on application, for MGCB application it depends on the state of GCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 552) and on the measured bus voltage. In case of MCB application depends only on measured bus
voltage. In case the Load is without power (bus voltage is below 2 % of nominal voltage or MGCB is opened) the
connecting to dead bus is applied, in other case the synchronization process (reverse synchronization) is
needed. See more information about synchronization process in chapter Synchronization (page 108).

Connecting To Dead Bus

MGCB
The Bus (System) is connected to the Load by closing MGCB if Bus (System) voltage and frequency are
within limits.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 107

 Mains is connected to the Load by closing MCB if Mains voltage and frequency are within limits.

MCB
There is no circuit breaker between the Bus (Gen-sets) and the Load. The Load is powered immediately
from the Bus once Gen-sets are started (their MGCB are closed) or Bus is powered by another way.
Mains is connected to the Load by closing MCB if Mains voltage and frequency are within limits.

Synchronization
Synchronization Process 108
Synchronization Types 109

Synchronization Process
Behavior of synchronization process depends on, which breaker is used for synchronization and on which
Controller mode (page 267) is controller switched to.
It is possible to influence the behavior of the controller in MAN and AUTO mode and limit the process of
synchronization. Following setpoints have influence to synchronization process:
Note: When the controller starts to synchronize and the main measuring screen is displayed, it will be
automatically changed to the synchroscope screen for the entire duration of synchronization. The screen will
also show value Voltage Match 321 to inform you better about synchronization process. After synchronization
the synchroscope screen is automatically changed back to the main measuring screen. It is also possible to
change screens manually (arrows up and down) after displaying the synchroscope screen. In this case there is
no automatic return to the main measuring screen after synchronization is finished.

Synchronization via MCB in AUTO mode for MGCB application

Bus synchronization to the Mains via Mains Circuit Breaker. If MGCB is closed everything is the same as for MCB
application in AUTO mode.
If there is Bus voltage present from another Mains and MGCB is closed, the MCB will be closed in case
the setpoint Mains Coupling (page 248) is switched to ENABLE.
If there is Bus voltage present from Gen-sets and MGCB is closed, the MCB will try to synchronize Gen-
sets to Mains.
If the Mains voltage or the Mains frequency gets out of the limits during synchronization, then the
synchronization process is interrupted and can continue again when Mains parameters gets restored after
Mains Return Delay (page 287).
If the Bus (Gen-sets) voltage or frequency gets out of the limits during the synchronization, the
synchronization process continues until the Bus (Gen-sets) parameters fail is confirmed.
If the MCB synchronization timeout gets elapsed the Wrn Synchronization Fail (page 664) protection
gets active, M stays closed and synchronization is stopped.

Synchronization via MCB in MAN mode for MGCB application

Bus synchronization to the Mains via Mains Circuit Breaker. If MGCB is closed everything is the same as for MCB
application in MAN mode.
The behavior is exactly the same as in AUTO mode - but the synchronization does not start again
automatically in case of Mains parameters gets out of limits and back. The breaker control button must be
pressed again.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 108

 When the MCB button is pressed during the synchronization, then the synchronization process is
interrupted.

Synchronization via MGCB in AUTO mode

Bus synchronization to the Mains via Master Mains Circuit Breaker.
If there is Bus voltage present from another Mains and MCB is closed, the M will be closed in case the
setpoint Mains Coupling (page 248) is switched to ENABLE.
If MCB is closed (Mains healthy), the M will try to synchronize Gen-sets to Mains only if the system start is
activated (e.g. by the LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560), REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 561)).
If the Mains voltage or the Mains frequency gets out of the limits during synchronization, then the
synchronization process is interrupted and can continue again when Mains parameters gets restored after
Mains Return Delay Mains Return Delay (page 287).
If the Bus (Gen-sets) voltage or frequency gets out of the limits during the synchronization, the
synchronization process continues until the Bus (Gen-sets) parameters fail is confirmed.
If the M synchronization timeout gets elapsed the Wrn Synchronization Fail (page 664) protection gets
active, MCB stays closed and synchronization is stopped.

Synchronization via MGCB in MAN mode

Bus synchronization to the Mains via Master Mains Circuit Breaker.
The behavior is exactly the same as in AUTO mode - but the synchronization does not start again
automatically in case of Mains parameters gets out of limits and back. The breaker control button must be
pressed again.
When the MCB button is pressed during the synchronization, then the synchronization process is
interrupted.
6 back to Synchronization

Synchronization Types
There are two types of synchronization. Type of synchronization is adjusted via setpoint Synchronization Type
(page 347).

Phase Match
The phase match synchronization consists of voltage matching and frequency/angle matching. The maximum
duration of synchronization is given by the setpoint Synchronization Timeout (page 348). If the
synchronization is not successful within this period of time, the alarm will be issued.

Slip Synchronization
The slip synchronizing is based on frequency/angle matching. The maximum duration of synchronizing is given
by the setpoint Synchronization Timeout (page 348). If the synchronizing is not successful within this period of
time, the alarm will be issued.
The Bus frequency is regulated to match the Mains frequency + Slip Frequency (page 350) value and the
window is set by setpoint Slip Frequency Window (page 350). When the Bus frequency reaches (Mains
Frequency + Slip frequency) value regulation loop is stopped (output is frozen at the actual value). If the Bus
frequency remains inside the window for the time longer than setpoint Dwell Time (page 349) the controller will
allow MGCB or MCB closing. The controller calculates periodically so called preclosing angle (based on the
actual value Slip Frequency (page 448) and CB closing delay given by the setpoints MGCB Latency (page
350) or MCB Latency (page 351)). When the preclosing angle is reached the controller issues CB closing

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 109

command. The breaker will close and CB feedback confirms that to the controller. When the breaker is closed the
controller goes to parallel and activates regulation loops again (parallel to Mains regulation loop).

Image 5.66 Slip synchronization

Whenever the Bus Frequency (page 458) leaves off the Slip Frequency Window (page 350) (either because
of Bus Frequency (page 458) or setpoint Slip Frequency Window (page 350) changes) the controller will
reactivate frequency regulation loop and try to reach the target value again. The Synchronization Timeout
(page 348) timer runs regardless of this while whole slip synchronization process is repeated. If the Bus
Frequency (page 458) reaches the target frequency again the regulations are frozen and if the Bus Frequency
(page 458) remains in the window for the time longer than setpoint Dwell Time (page 349) the controller will
continue in the standard sequence as seen in the previous case. *If the Synchronization Timeout (page 348)
elapses the controller will immediately stop synchronization and issue alarm .

Image 5.67 Slip synchronization

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 110

 Image 5.68 Slip synchronization

Slip synchronization has a dead band. When the dead band is reached the frequency regulation is disabled.
Once it is disabled it will be enabled again only when the frequency goes out of the slip frequency window. Dead
band is introduced to allow the controller to detect the match.

Image 5.69 Slip synchonization - deadband

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 111

Note: Due to the nature of this function it is possible that in limit cases the controller will regulate the Bus
frequency outside of protection limits. Example: Mains frequency is high but within its protection limits (e.g. 50.9
Hz, limit is 51 Hz). Slip Frequency (page 350) is set to 0.5Hz. This will cause regulation loop of the controller
can push the Bus frequency to 51.4 Hz and eventually the controller will issue overfrequency alarm. It is
recommended to set the setpoint Slip Frequency (page 350) as low as possible that still enables succesfull
synchronization. This minimizes the risk of this problem happening. Furthermore when slip synchronization is
used it is recommended to set Mains Frequency protection limits to more rigid values than the Bus frequency
protection limits. In this case the setpoint Slip Frequency (page 350) can be set to 0.1Hz and the Mains
Frequency overfrequency protection limit is set to 50.9Hz instead of 51Hz. This will ensure that problematic state
cannot be reached.

6 back to Synchronization

5.4.5 Control Groups

Note: This chapter is relevant for all ComAp controllers working in Multiple Island-Parallel operation.

The physical group of the controllers (i.e. the site) can be separated into smaller logical groups, which can work
independently even if they are interconnected by the CAN2 bus. The logical groups are intended to reflect the
real topology of the site when the site is divided into smaller groups separated from each other by bus-tie
breakers. If the bus-tie breakers are closed the sub-groups have to work as one large group (system) and if the
bus-tie breakers are open, the sub-groups have to work independently.
The group which the particular controller belongs to is adjusted by the setpoint Control Group (page
337). Use the default setting 1 with all controllers, if there is no bus-tie breaker.
The information which groups are currently linked together is being distributed via the CAN. Each
controller can provide information about one BTB breaker. The breaker position is detected by the input
function GroupLink (i.e. this input is to be connected to the breaker feedback).
The two groups which are connected together by the BTB, are defined with parameters Group Link L
(page 337) and Group Link R (page 338). BTB controller sends via CAN2 (page 17) (Communication
peripherals (page 17)) information that controllers from groups Group Link L and Group Link R are linked
together.
If external BTB is used (there is no CAN communication between external BTB and other controllers) or in
case of redudant information about BTB position is required , the Group link function in any ComAp
controller can be used. If the LBI GROUP LINK (PAGE 542) is activated the controller will send information to
all controllers on CAN that the groups defined by setpoints Group Link L (page 337) and Group Link R
(page 338) are connected together.
A history record is written into every controller that is affected by the group link whenever the BTB is
closed / opened (control groups are linked / unlinked).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 112

Note: The "group link" function is independent on the group, where the controller itself belongs to. The controller
can provide "group link" information about any two groups and it may not belong to one of the groups.

All controllers in linked groups cooperate with each other and perform Power Management, Load sharing
and VAr sharing together. Thementioned functions are performed independently in each group, when the
groups are separated.
Example: 4 controllers separated by a BTB breaker into two groups of 2. The BTB position is detected by
the controllers 2 and 3. The reason, why there are 2 controllers used for detection of the BTB position, is to
have a redundant source of the group link information, if the primary source (controller) is switched off.

Image 5.70 Example of control groups

Once the BTB breaker is closed, the control groups 2 and 3 become new group 2+3. Power management, Load
sharing and VAr sharing are performed within newly established group 2+3. Merging of the groups may result in
a Controller stopping, if power management evaluates that available Actual Reserve is high enough to stop a
Controller.

5.4.6 Crash Dump

Crash dump is new functionality which allows controller to collect and store important information related to
controller's failure before the controller is restarted. These information are stored in controller's nonvolatile
memory for later evaluation and easier solution of a problem.

Collecting crash dump

To collect Crash Dump from the controller, you need to connect to the controller using InteliConfig either via USB
(page 59) or Ethernet (page 60).
Log in as user with administrator rights.

In top right corner click wrench icon and select "Collect logs".

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 113

 InteliConfig begins to collect Crash Dump data from the controller and also adds its own crash logs. User
is informed about the ongoing process in InteliConfig, before prompt to save *.zip file appears.

Image 5.71 Crash Dump Collection

Note: It is recommended to use connection via Ethernet to reduce time required for data collection.

IMPORTANT: This action may take significantly long period.

Contacting TSUP with crash dump

After collection of Crash Dump, you shall contact TSUP. To help resolve your issue:
Send description of the issue from your side of view
Send approximated time of the event
Send Crash Dump data collected in *.zip file

5.4.7 Distributed Power Management Signals

Note: This chapter is relevant for all ComAp controllers working in Multiple Island-Parallel operation.

Signals which are considered to be visible the same way for every controller on CAN. Synchronization of these
signals is the internal part of the Power management function.
Basic principle:
For every signal, there is a LBI with the same function as the signal.
If the LBI is not configured on any input (physical binary, virtual in PLC etc.), its value is taken from CAN
and the value is not being shared back on CAN.
If the LBI is configured, its value is taken from the input and the value is shared on CAN.
The relevant function is activated only by the state of the signal, which is configured on LBI. That
means that function cannot be activated by the state of relevant CAN signal.
In case of the collision, there is a predefined behavior. If any controller with configured LBI receives a
logical "1", it then activates the signal on CAN.
Distributed Power Management Signals are shared only in the scope of logical Control Groups (page
112). If you merge Control Groups together (GROUP LINK (PAGE 542)), signals are applied in both groups.
The BTB controller is used to connect the groups together. When the Bus Tie Breaker is closed the BTB
informs appropriate controllers that their groups has been connected.
Note: For example see chapter System Start/Stop (page 199).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 114

 Description for the Gen-set controller
Distributed signal Description for Mains controller
(MINT application)
LBI REMOTE START/STOP Accepted only in controllers
(PAGE 560) is the request to belonging to the same logical
start the group (part of the group.
system). It is shared to SYSTEM Accepted only in controllers where
System Start/Stop START/STOP (PAGE 591) and the Distributed signal is not
distributed trough CAN2 (page configured.
17) or Communication If the Distributed signal is
peripherals (page 17) to the
configured to any binary input
controllers in the same group.
(physical or virtual), the signal is
automatically shared to other
Min Run Power 1,
controllers via CAN2 (page 17) as
2, 3
CAN Distributed signal.
N/A
If distributed signal is shared on
Load Reserve 1, 2,
CAN2 (page 17) by more sources,
3, 4
it is accepted from any of them.
The mains controller set this
Accepted only in controllers
signal on whenever there is a
belonging to the same logical group
closed path between the Mains
as the source Mains Controller only.
MCB Feedback and the Load side.
Accepted only in controllers where
The signal is shared only inside
the Distributed signal is not
the logical group (or
configured.
interconnected logical groups).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 115

 Distributed
Scheme for Mains + Gen-set controllers
signal

System
Start/Stop

Min Run
Power 1, 2, 3

Load Res 1,
2, 3, 4

Sharing of multiple Logical Binary Input (LBI) functions is critical for power management system operation,
because several power management functionality require simultaneous activation of LBI functions in controllers,
which are involved in power management operation. It can be done either automatically using CAN2 (page 17)
bus link between controllers or using dedicated LBI functions.
These LBI functions are shared automatically:
System Start/Stop
Min Run Power Act
Load Res Active
MCB Feedback

Note: InteliMains 510 controller activates the System Start/Stop signal in case of all system activations (e.g.
AMF, TEST Mode, ...)

The following rules applies to the automatic sharing of the selected signals between Mains / Gen-set
controllers.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 116

 1. LBI state is automatically shared via CAN2 (page 17) bus, if corresponding LBI function is not configured in
a controller.
Example: Logical input Remote Start/Stop is configured with a controller. State of the signal is
automatically transmitted to other controllers via CAN2 (page 17) bus as System Start/Stop.

Image 5.72 Distributed signals case 1

2. LBI state received from CAN2 (page 17) bus is automatically used, if corresponding LBI function is not
configured in a controller.
Example: LBI Remote Start/Stop is not configured with a controller, but automatically shared System
Start/Stop is received from CAN2 (page 17) bus. Controller follows state of the shared LBI signal then.

Image 5.73 Distributed signals case 1&2

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 117

 3. LBI state received from CAN2 (page 17) bus is not used, if corresponding LBI function is configured in a
controller.
Example: LBI Remote Start/Stop is configured with a controller. Controller follows only state of signal
linked with the Remote Start/Stop function. The function is not activated by a shared System Start/Stop
signal.

Image 5.74 Distributed signals case 3

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 118

 4. LBI function state transmitted via CAN2 (page 17) bus is used only by controllers, which are in the same
group as controller, which is source of the shared signal. Signal coming from controller in a different group is
accepted only if the “source controller” group is linked with the “receiving controller” group.

Image 5.75 Distributed signals case 4

5. LBI function can be configured with multiple controllers, which transmit through CAN2 (page 17) bus state
of the function. Or function applies to the function evaluation in controllers, in which the function is not
configured. It means that function is activated by shared signal coming from any controller (rule 4. applies).

5.4.8 Electric state machine

State Description
Init Initialization of the controller. The application is not active yet.

Application MCB is opened (LBO MCB Close/Open is not active and LBI MCB
Mode = MCB Feedback is not active either).

BrksOff MCB is opened (LBO MCB Close/Open is not active and LBI MCB
Application Feedback is not active either) and MGCB is opened (LBO MGCB
Mode = MGCB Close/Open is not active and LBI MGCB Feedback is not active
either).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 119

 LBO Mains Healthy is not active, MCB is opened (LBO MCB
Application
Close/Open) is not active and LBI MCB Feedback is not active
Mode = MCB
either) and LBO Any GCB Closed is active.
IslOper LBO Mains Healthy is not active, MCB is opened (LBO MCB
Application Close/Open is not active and LBI MCB Feedback is not active either)
Mode = MGCB and MGCB is closed (LBO MGCB Close/Open is active and LBI
MGCB Feedback is also active).

LBO Mains Healthy is active, MCB is closed (LBO MCB Close/Open

Application
is active and LBI MCB Feedback is active as well) and LBO Any
Mode = MCB
GCB Closed is not active.
MainsOper LBO Mains Healthy is active, MCB is closed (LBO MCB Close/Open
Application is active and LBI MCB Feedback is active as well) and MGCB is
Mode = MGCB opened (LBO MGCB Close/Open is not active and LBI MGCB
Feedback is not active either).

LBO Mains Healthy is active, MCB is closed (LBO MCB Close/Open

Application
is active and LBI MCB Feedback is active as well) and LBO Any
Mode = MCB
GCB Closed is also active.
ParalOper LBO Mains Healthy is active, MCB is closed (LBO MCB Close/Open
Application is active and LBI MCB Feedback is active as well) and MGCB is
Mode = MGCB closed (LBO MGCB Close/Open is active and LBI MGCB Feedback
is also active).

This state is active during synchronization via MCB. LBO Reverse Synchronization is
RevSync
active.

Application
This state cannot occure.
Mode = MCB

Synchro This state is active during synchronization via MGCB. MCB is closed
Application
(LBO MCB Close/Open is active and LBI MCB Feedback is active
Mode = MGCB
as well) and LBO Forward Synchronization is active.
Bus is being synchronized to healthy Mains (or vice versa). LBO Synchronization is active.
This state is active when LBO Mains Healthy is deactivated and until Emergency Start
MainsFlt
Delay timer expires.

Application This state is active during Mains Return Delay timer after LBO
Mode = MCB Mains Healthy is reactived.
This state is active when LBO Mains Healthy is active, MCB is
MainsRet Application opened (LBO MCB Close/Open is not active and LBI MCB
Mode = MGCB Feedback is not active either) and MGCB is closed (LBO MGCB
Close/Open is active and LBI MGCB Feedback is also active).
This state is active during Mains Return Delay timer or if LBO Mains Healthy.
ValidFlt State activated after Emergency start del.
MCB Off This state is never activated and stays here for backward compatibility.
This state is active while LBI Emergency MAN is active. All control functions e.g. BO are
EmergMan
disabled.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 120

5.4.9 Event History
The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records “snapshots” of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
The event which caused the record (e.g. “Overfrequency alarm, undervoltage alarm, MCB closed, MGCB
closed, etc.).
The date and time when it was recorded.
All important data values like frequency, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.
The number of events is fixed to 500 lines.
Values are recorded based on actual column selected, on special events values are recorded in text form.
Special events:
When the user logs in

Modifying a setpoint

Fault Reset

Horn Reset

Start/Stop

Configurable history
It is possible to configure the columns (values) which will be displayed in the History window. The
configuration can be found in the Controller Configuration → Others → History. See the picture below.

Image 5.76 Configurable history

In the left part of the configuration window there are all available binary and analog values (columns) which
can be configured to history event log. In the right side of the configuration window there is a table with all
already configured columns. By buttons Add and Remove in the middle of the configuration window or by

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 121

 double click on value in the left / right part of the configuration, it is possible to add / remove any analog or
binary value to / from the history event log.
Under the table with already configured values there are buttons for the operations. By the buttons Move up
and Move down it is possible to change the position of the history columns so you can sort all columns
according to your priorities. Next to these buttons there are buttons for export and import data so you can
import history columns configuration from another controller. And it is also possible to change the
abbreviation for each history column. In the down part of the configuration window there is a progress bar
which shows how much memory for history events is used. For one history record maximum 499 Bytes can
be used.
In the next chapter are shown history columns used in the default archive.

Default history columns

Column name Short name Value Units
Bus frequency Bfrq Bus Frequency (page 458) Hz
Bus Voltage L1-N Vb1 Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458) V
Bus Voltage L2-N Vb2 Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458) V
Bus Voltage L3-N Vb3 Bus Voltage L3-N (page 458) V
Bus Voltage L1-L2 Vb12 Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458) V
Bus Voltage L2-L3 Vb23 Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) V
Bus Voltage L3-L1 Vb31 Bus Voltage L3-L1 (page 459) V
Mains Frequency Frqm Mains Frequency (page 444) Hz
Mains Voltage L1-N Vm1 Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445) V
Mains Voltage L2-N Vm2 Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) V
Mains Voltage L3-N Vm3 Mains Voltage L3-N (page 445) V
Mains Voltage L1-L2 Vm12 Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445) V
Mains Voltage L2-L3 Vm23 Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) V
Mains Voltage L3-L1 Vm31 Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446) V
Mains Current L1 Im1 Mains Current THD L1 (page 444) %
Mains Current L2 Im2 Mains Current THD L2 (page 444) %
Mains Current L3 Im3 Mains Current THD L3 (page 444) %
Battery Volts VBat Battery Voltage (page 468) V
Binary Inputs BIN Binary Inputs (page 468) -
Binary Outputs BOUT Binary Outputs (page 469) -
Controller Mode Mode Controller Mode (page 472) -
Forced value status FVST Forced Value Status (page 474) -
Running Nominal Power Of All TRPN Running Nominal Power Of All (page 463) kW
Available Nominal Power In PM (page
Available Nominal Power In PM APN kW
463)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 122

5.4.10 Exercise Timers
Mode Once 124
Mode Daily 125
Mode Weekly 126
Monthly mode 127
Mode Short period 129
The exercise (general-purpose) timers in controller are intended for scheduling of any operations such as e.g.
periodic tests of the System, scheduled transfer of the Load to the System prior to an expected disconnection of
the Mains etc. These timers can be also used in the PLC.
The function of each timer can be changed by respective Timer Function setpoint. The functions which are
supposed to change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The following timer
functions are available:
Disabled - The Timer is disabled.
Manual On - The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing purposes).
No Func - There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the condition is
fulfilled.
Mode OFF - The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary input.
TEST - The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd - The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On Load binary
input.
MFail Blk - The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block binary input.
The activation condition of each Timer is configured via respective Timer Setup setpoint.
Each Timer has its LBO Exercise Timer which is closed regardless of chosen timer function once the Timer is
activated. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated immediately
after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled. The LBO is activated always when the Timer
should be activated e.g. even when controller is in different mode than AUTO.
See the list of related setpoints and LBOs below.

Related setpoints for choosing of the timer function: Related setpoints for the timer setup:
Timer 1 Function (page 365) Timer 1 Setup (page 366)
Timer 2 Function (page 367) Timer 2 Setup (page 368)
Timer 3 Function (page 369) Timer 3 Setup (page 370)
Timer 4 Function (page 371) Timer 4 Setup (page 372)
Timer 5 Function (page 373) Timer 5 Setup (page 374)
Timer 6 Function (page 375) Timer 6 Setup (page 376)

Related LBOs:
Exercise Timer 1 (page 572)
Exercise Timer 2 (page 573)
Exercise Timer 3 (page 573)
Exercise Timer 4 (page 573)
Exercise Timer 5 (page 574)
Exercise Timer 6 (page 574)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 123

 Note: This manual shows step by step guide only for Timer 1 setup because the procedure is same for the all
timers.

Available modes of each timer:

This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for
Once
preset duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and
Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer
can be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the
period period.

Mode Once
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup
(page 366).
Note: Setpoint Timer 1 Setup (page 366) is visible only if setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 365) has any
other value than disabled.

Image 5.77 Mode Once - InteliConfig

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 124

In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration
of timer.

Set-up via external display

Navigate to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 365) setpoint.
Then go to Timer 1 Setup (page 366) and press enter button.
Note: Use left and right arrow to move in a single row. Use up and down arrow to adjust time or date. Use
enter button for confirmation.

6 back to Exercise Timers

Mode Daily
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup
(page 366)
Note: Setpoint Timer 1 Setup (page 366) is visible only if setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 365) has any
other value than disabled.

Image 5.78 Daily mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th day of repetition
and behavior of timer on weekends.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 2015-01-01 at 12:00. Duration will be 5 minutes.
Timer will be again activated every 3rd day at 12:00 for 5 minutes including weekends.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 125

 Set-up via external display
Navigate to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 365) setpoint.
Then go to Timer 1 Setup (page 366) and press enter button.
Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and
duration. Select Daily occurrence, set amount of days between occurrences and decide which behavior shall be
applied during weekends.
Note: Use left and right arrow to move in a single row. Use up and down arrow to adjust time or date. Use
enter button for confirmation.

6 back to Exercise Timers

Mode Weekly
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup
(page 366).
Note: Setpoint Timer 1 Setup (page 366) is visible only if setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 365) has any
other value than disabled.

Image 5.79 Mode Weekly - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
and days when timer should be active.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 2015-01-12 at 12:00. Duration will be 5 minutes.
Timer will be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 5 minutes.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 126

 Set-up via external display
Navigate to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 365) setpoint.
Then go to Timer 1 Setup (page 366) and press enter button. Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you
will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and duration. Select Weekly occurrence, set amount of
weeks between occurrences and select days which will be timer triggered (use arrows left, right for
activating/deactivating of day and arrow up, down for moving to another day).
Note: Use left and right arrow to move in a single row. Use up and down arrow to adjust time or date. Use
enter button for confirmation.

6 back to Exercise Timers

Monthly mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup
(page 366).
Note: Setpoint Timer 1 Setup (page 366) is visible only if setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 365) has any
other value than disabled.

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.

Image 5.80 Mode Monthly - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 2015-01-02 at 12:00. Duration will be 5 minutes.
Timer will be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 5 minutes.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 127

Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.

Image 5.81 Mode Monthly - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition, the x-th week of repetition and days in week. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 2015-01-05 at 12:00. Duration will be 5 minutes.
Timer will be again activated every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00
for 5 minutes.

Set-up via external display

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
Navigate to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 365) setpoint.
Then go to Timer 1 Setup (page 366) and press enter button. Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you
will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and duration. Select Monthly occurrence, then Daily and
choose which day in a month will be timer triggered. Set amount of months between occurrences and confirm the
selection
Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
Navigate to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 365) setpoint.
Than go to Timer 1 Setup (page 366) and press enter button. Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you
will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and duration. Select Monthly occurrence, then Weekly and
choose which week and week days in a month will be timer triggered. Set amount of months between
occurrences and confirm the selection
Note: Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and
duration.

6 back to Exercise Timers

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 128

 Mode Short period
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup
(page 366).
Note: Setpoint Timer 1 Setup (page 366) is visible only if setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 365) has any
other value than disabled.

Image 5.82 Mode Short period - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the interval of repetition
(shorter than 1 day).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 2015-01-01 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hours.
Timer will be again activated every 4th hour for 1 hour.

Set-up via external display

Navigate to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 365) setpoint.
Then go to Timer 1 Setup (page 366) and press enter button. Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you
will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and duration. Select Period occurrence, then set period of
repetition (shorter than 1 day).
Note: Select mode Repeat and confirm it. After that, you will set the first occurrence date, time of occurrence and
duration.

6 back to Exercise Timers

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 129

5.4.11 Firewall
The firewall function allows to restrict the access to the controller application services (ComAp/TCP server,
MODBUS/TCP server etc.), to the specific computers, or networks using Ethernet (page 17) and
Communication peripherals (page 17) ports. The firewall can be enabled by the setpoint IP Firewall in the
Group: Ethernet (page 377). The firewall settings is made in the InteliConfig: Control → Controller
Configuration → Others → Firewall.
Example:
Adress: 192.168.1.0
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Port: 23
Any computer with IP address from the network range 192.168.1.0 - 192.168.1.255 can connect to
ComAp/TCP server (= connect to the controller with InteliConfig via Ethernet).

Example:
Adress: 192.168.1.100
Netmask: 255.255.255.255
Port: 502
Only the single computer with IP address 192.168.1.100 can connect to MODBUS/TCP server

IMPORTANT: When enabling the firewall, If the rules are not set up properly and the connection is
made remotely, loss of connection can happen.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 130

5.4.12 Forced Value
This function allows forcing of preconfigured value into selected setpoints via activation of LBI. Each LBI can
force only one value into one setpoint. There are 16 LBIs - FORCED VALUE INPUT 01 (PAGE 538) ... FORCED VALUE
INPUT 16 (PAGE 541). You can see current states of all LBIs in value Forced Value Status (page 474). Setpoints
for which is Forced Value already configured are marked with gray arrow in InteliConfig and on display.
Note: LBIs can be renamed during configuration. We suggest you to rename them based on used function.

IMPORTANT: You cannot change value of setpoint which has active Forced Value function.

Force Value Indication

If the setpoint is forced by another setpoint then the icon (double right arrow) is displayed just behind the
setpoint value.
Green Icon - Forcing is active
Grey Icon - Force Value is set to the specific setpoint and forcing is inactive
Integrated color display / InteliVision 5.2

Image 5.83 : Force Value and Protected Setpoint Indication

InteliConfig

Image 5.84 : Force Value Indication in InteliConfig

Note: Setpoints that are currently being forced their arrow turns to green color and they also have the option
for writing of different value manually disabled.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 131

5.4.13 I/O Configuration
Binary Inputs 132
Binary Outputs 133
Functions Configuration 133
Protections Configuration 133
Transfer I/O Configuration 134
Remove I/O Configuration 134

Note: This is only quick illustration for I/O configuration, see the InteliConfig manual for more information
about configuration via PC tool InteliConfig.

Image 5.85 I/O Configuration window

A. Device tree – contains groups of devices with inputs/outputs to configure

B. Configuration panel – the list of available inputs/outputs related to device tree selection
C. Tool bar
Expand All Details - Expands the configuration part of all inputs/outputs
Transfer IO Configuration - see Transfer I/O Configuration on page 134
Remove IO Configuration - see Remove I/O Configuration on page 134

Binary Inputs
The configuration of the binary input consists of:
1. Name - the name identification of the binary input
2. ECU Value - electronic control unit value, available only for ECU devices (otherwise disabled)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 132

 3. Functions - the set of functions see Functions Configuration on page 133
4. Protections - the set of protections see Protections Configuration on page 133

Image 5.86 Binary input configuration

Binary Outputs
The configuration of the binary output consists of:
1. Name - the identification name of the binary output
2. Source - the source value for the binary output
3. Contact Type - represents the default state of output (Normally Open/Normally Closed)
4. ECU Value - electronic control unit value, available only for ECU devices (otherwise disabled)
5. Protections - the set of protections see Protections Configuration on page 133

Image 5.87 Binary output configuration

Functions Configuration
It is possible to assign more functions (Logical Binary Inputs) to the specific input (BIN, AIN)

Add new function to the input

Remove function from the input

For the binary input functions the contact type for each function can be set

- Normally Closed/Normally Open

Each function (LBI) has the link to the help through button

Protections Configuration
It is possible to assign one level 1 and level 2 protection to the specific input or output (BINT, BOUT, AIN).

Add new protection

Remove protection

Edit protection
For more information about protections see Protections on page 185

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 133

 Transfer I/O Configuration
This functionality offers to transfer the whole input/output configuration to another compatible input/output in
the same category. The icon for transfer is available in the bottom toolbar.
After clicking on the transfer icon is displayed window for selecting the target input/output. Offered are only
compatible inputs/outputs of the same category. When the required input/output is selected and confirmed by
the OK button, the transfer operation starts.
Note: The configuration is transferred completely (functions, protections, sensor, PLC configuration) except
Modbus definition.

Image 5.88 The window for selecting the target for I/O configuration transfer

Remove I/O Configuration

This functionality offers to remove the whole input/output configuration. The icon for remove is available in
the bottom toolbar. The name of input/output is after remove set to "Not Used".
Note: The configuration is removed completely (functions, protections, sensor, PLC configuration) except
Modbus definition.

5.4.14 Load Shedding

The Load Shedding is controlled disconnection of less important load groups when the object consumption is too
high.

Load shedding stages

The Load Shedding function consists of 6 stages which are numbered 1-6. Stages are disconnected in
ascending order up to the last configured stage. Reconnecting of stages is in descending order and starts with
higher configured stage. Stage is considered as configured when respective Load Shedding Output is
configured. Highest activated load shedding stage is stored in value Load Shedding Status (page 472).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 134

 Load shedding outputs

Stage LBO
Stage 1 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 577)
Stage 2 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 577)-
Stage 3 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 577)
Stage 4 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 4 (PAGE 578)
Stage 5 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 5 (PAGE 578)
Stage 6 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 6 (PAGE 578)

How the load shedding controls the load shedding outputs

The Load Shedding function can be used if Controller mode (page 267) != OFF.
Activation of the function is adjusted via setpoint Load Shedding Active (page 311). Function could be active
when:
Entering Breaker state (page 473) = IslOper/MultIslOp - all stages are disconnected.
Change from Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper/MultParOp
to Breaker state (page 473) = IslOper/MultIslOp - all stages are disconnected.
During Breaker state (page 473) = IslOper/MultIslOp - only one stage is disconnected/reconnected at a
moment
Decisive level for disconnecting of load is adjusted via setpoint Load Shedding Level (page 312) and the
minimal delay between two disconnections is adjusted via setpoint Load Shedding Delay (page 313). When
relative Total Running P (page 462) or Mains Import P (page 439) (depends on the setpoint Load Shedding
Based On (page 312)) exceeds Load Shedding Level (page 312) and delay Load Shedding Delay (page
313) elapsed from last disconnection of stage, another stage is disconnected.

Image 5.89 Load shedding

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 135

 Reconnection of load
Disconnected load can be also reconnected. Reconnecting of stages is in descending order and begins with
highest disconnected stage. Behavior of this function is adjusted via setpoints Auto Load Reconnection (page
314), Load Reconnection Level (page 313) and Load Reconnection Delay (page 313).

Manual reconnection
Conditions:
Setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 314) = Manual
LBI MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 546) has to be configured
When relative Total Running P (page 462) or Mains Import P (page 439) (depends on the setpoint Load
Shedding Based On (page 312)) drops below Load Reconnection Level (page 313) rising edge of LBI
MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 546) reconnects the highest disconnected stage.
Note: Setpoint Load Reconnection Delay (page 313) is not considered

Image 5.90 Manual Load reconnection

Auto reconnection
Conditions:
Setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 314) = Auto
When relative Total Running P (page 462) or Mains Import P (page 439) (depends on the setpoint Load
Shedding Based On (page 312)) drops below Load Reconnection Level (page 313) and delay Load
Reconnection Delay (page 313) elapsed from last reconnecting of stage, another stage is reconnected.

Image 5.91 Auto Load reconnection

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 136

5.4.15 Mains Decoupling Protections
Vector shift
The vector shift function is the fast protection for mains decoupling. It monitors the Load angle of the Systemand
if it gets changed dramatically, the protection is issued. The Vector shift is evaluated from the Mains Voltage L1-
N (page 445).
Protection is enabled via setpoint Vector Shift Protection (page 305). Limit of protection is adjusted via
setpoint Vector Shift Limit (page 291). When protection is activated, the breaker is opened. Which breaker is
opened is adjusted via setpoint Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector (page 292) (For MCB application is fixedly
opened only MCB breaker). Maximal value of vector shift is represented by value Max Vector Shift (page 448).
Note: VectorShift protection gets active (is unblocked) right 500 ms after the condition for activation of protection
gets fulfilled = when Controller goes to parallel to mains operation (When Vector Shift Protection = PARALLEL
ONLY) or when MCB gets closed (when Vector shift protection = Enabled).

The settings can lead to these situations:

Vector
MCB MGCB Vector Shift
Shift/ROCOF CB
STATUS STATUS Protection Action
Selector (page
(PAGE 582) (PAGE 587) (page 305)
292)
Enabled or Opens MCB or MGCB based on
1 1 MCB or MGCB Parallel Only(no Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector
influence) (page 292)
Enabled or
MCB or MGCB (no No action (MGCB stays always
0 1 Parallel Only(no
influence) closed)
influence)
MCB or MGCB (no
1 0 Parallel Only No action (MCB stays closed)
influence)
1 0 MCB Enabled Opens MCB
1 0 MGCB Enabled No action (MCB stays closed)

If a vector shift is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and frequency remain
in limits, the MCB is then closed again (synchronized) after Mains Return Delay (page 287) as the mains is
evaluated as healthy.
If a vector shift is detected and consequently the MGCB is opened, however mains voltage and frequency remain
in limits, the MGCB is then closed again (synchronized) immediately (no delay).
Note: If the MCB application is chosen, then MCB is always opened even there are some gen-set controllers
connected on the bus.

ROCOF
The Rate of Change of Frequency function is the fast protection for mains decoupling. It monitors the change of
frequency and if it gets changed dramatically, the protection is issued.
There are in total 4 independent ROCOF protections devided to 2 kinds.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 137

 Common behavior
Protections are enabled/disabled by setpoints ROCOF Protection (page 306).

Vector Shift/ROCOF CB
Option Behavior
Selector (page 292)
MCB Protection is reactivated with closing of MCB
Enabled
MGCB Protection is reactivated with closing of MGCB
Parallel Protection is reactivated with entering Parallel Operation
Not relevant
Only Mode Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper

Sample based ROCOF

These protections are based on controller's sampling. This means that protection is evaluated after certain
amount of samples have been obtained by the controller.
ROCOF Protection (page 306)
Protection is evaluated from last ROCOF Windows Length (page 291) samples. If ROCOF (page 448)
is over ROCOF df/dt (page 292), breaker selected by Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector (page 292) is
opened. Maximal measured ROCOF, from start of evaluation, is stored in Max ROCOF (page 449).

5.4.16 Mains Import Measurement

The Mains measurement can be measured by dedicated CT terminals or by analog inputs, and it is divided to
Mains Measurement P (page 250) and Mains Measurement Q (page 251). The Mains Measurement P has to
be enabled for proper work of active power Import/Export. The both measurements has to be enabled for proper
work of reactive power Import/Export and power factor control.

Mains Measurement P
If Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Mains CT then Mains Import P (page 439) is counted from the
current which is measured on Terminal Diagram (page 33) .
If Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Analog Input then Mains Import P (page 439) is taken from LAI
MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597). Mains current can still be measured if Mains Measurement Q (page
251) = Mains CT.
If Mains Measurement P (page 250) = None then Mains Import P (page 439) is not counted because
there is no current measurement. This affects load transfering.
Note: When Mains Measurement P (page 250) is set to None or Analog Input (and LAI MAINS
MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is not configured or has invalid value) alarm Wrn Load IMP/EXP Fail (page
656) is activated if Import/Export P is required and alarm Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail (page 663) is activated if
Import/Export Q is required.

MainsMeasurement Q
If Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = MainsCT then Mains Import Q (page 439) is counted from the
current which is measured on Terminal Diagram (page 33) .
If Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = Analog Input then Mains Import Q (page 439) is taken from the
LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597). Mains current can be still measured if Mains Measurement P
(page 250) = Mains CT.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 138

 If Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = None then Mains Import Q (page 439) is not counted because
there is no current measurement. This affects load transferring.
Note: When Mains Measurement Q (page 251) is set to None or Analog Input (and LAI MAINS
MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is not configured or has invalid value) alarm Wrn Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail
(page 663) is activated if Import/Export Q is required.

5.4.17 Multi soft start

Multi soft start is a ComAp feature set that allows faster connection of multiple Mainss to the Load while Start up
Synchronization (SUS). This function is used once there is the request for starting of Gen-sets with SUS
sequence and it determinate whether the Load will be connected before or after all Gen-sets are started.
This function can be enabled by the setpoint Multi Soft Start (page 255). If the setpoint is Enabled, the MGCB
will be closed together with Gen-sets' MGCBs during SUS sequence if there is no voltage on the Bus. If the
setpoint is disabled the MGCB will be closed after the SUS sequence is successfully / unsuccessfully finished
(Gen-sets are excited and Bus voltage is in the voltage window).
This function can be used only if the application is MGCB and MCB is opened so the Load is without power and
Gen-sets are starting into Island / Multiple Island operation.

5.4.18 Operating Modes

The operating mode can be selected by pressing Left and Right buttons on the front panel/display, by
changing the Controller mode (page 267) setpoint, or by activating respective LBI.
Note: If the setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.

The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 559)
Remote TEST (page 560) + REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 561)
Remote MAN (page 559)
Remote AUTO (page 558)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original position
given by the setpoint.
Another chapter related to the Operating modes is in the Operator Guide see Basic operating modes
description on page 1.

OFF
System start activation is blocked, if mains is healthy and MCB is opened, then MCB is automatically closed after
the delay given by setpoint MCB Close Delay. The MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On (page 290) =
GenRun) or is open or closed according to whether the mains is present or not (MCB Opens On (page 290) =
MainsFail). In case of MGCB application, the MGCB is opened if it is closed.

No AMF or Power management function will be performed. The buttons MCB ON/OFF , MGCB ON/OFF ,
START , and STOP including the appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not active.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 139

 MAN
The system can be started and stopped manually using the START and STOP buttons (or external buttons wired
to the appropriate binary inputs). If there is present Gen-set controller, their system start/stop is
activated/deactivated via internal communication line. In case of MCB application can be controlled only the MCB
breaker by pressing the MCB button or by activating the binary input MCB Button. In case of MGCB application
the control of MCB breaker and MGCB breaker is depending on the setting of the Setpoint CB Control In MAN
Mode (page 248). MGCB breaker can be controlled also by pressing the MGCB button or by activating the
binary input MGCB Button.
IMPORTANT: Control of MGCB is affected by SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) even in Controller
mode (page 267) = MAN. SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) has to be active or bus must be already
powered before MGCB can be closed. You can activate SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) for
example by pressing the Start Button.

AUTO
System activation is controlled based on external signal (REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) ) or by conditions
(AMF, Peak shaving, Power management system, etc.). When one condition deactivates the System does not
stop if another condition for automatic starts is active.
The controller does not respond to the buttons START, STOP, MCB ON/OFF, and MGCB ON/OFF.
If peak shaving stop condition occurs, but REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) is active, System stays running.

TEST
The behavior of the controller in TEST mode depends on the setting of the setpoints and binary inputs.
The test mode behavior is common for both SPTM and MINT applications.
The Bus will be started when the controller is put to the TEST mode and will remain running unloaded. To
perform test on load the LBI REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 561) must be activated, or System Start/Stop for the
Bus's Control Group (page 337) must be activated (for MINT application).
If a Mains failure occurs, the MCB will be opened after Open Transfer Min Break (page 339), the MGCB will be
closed, and the Bus will supply the load.
The SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) is activated when the controller is put into the TEST mode.
MCB application - system start is active, if Gen-sets will be started their GCBs will be closed in to the parallel
state.
MGCB application - system start is active, if Gen-sets will be started their GCBs will be closed but MGCB stays
opened.
To perform test on load the LBI REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 561) must be activated.
If a Mains failure occurs, the MCB is opened, after Open Transfer Min Break (page 339), the MGCB (only for
MGCB application) will be closed and the Gen-sets will supply the load.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 140

After the Mains return and the setpoint Return to Mains in TEST Mode (page 289) is Enabled, the delay Mains
Return Delay (page 287) will count down. When it elapses the back synchronization is activated, the controller
will transfer the load back to the Mains after Open Transfer Min Break (page 339) and the System will remain
running unloaded again until the mode is changed. If the setpoint Return to Mains in TEST Mode (page 289) is
Disabled the Load is kept supplied from the System until this situation is resolved by user e.g. putting the
controller back into the AUTO mode.
The load transfer is depending on the settings Subgroup: Load Transfer (page 339) and on binary inputs
FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537) and FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538).
The controller does not respond to the buttons START, STOP, MCB ON/OFF, and MGCB ON/OFF.

5.4.19 Output Control – Frequency/Load

The frequency control output is used to control the frequency (speed) of the Controllers presented on the bus.
The frequency regulation, load regulation and load sharing are realized through the frequency control. The
frequency request is internal value of the regulator which is transformed to range 0 .. 100 % of the Loadsharing
Output (page 467) which comes out of the controller via communication line. Gen-set controller accepts this
value and transform this to his speed control output.

Frequency/Load Control Adjustment

IMPORTANT: Prior to Frequency/Load control adjustment, the Voltage/PF control has to be adjusted.

Frequency & Synchronization Adjustment

Frequency and Angle control loop is active during synchronization process.
1. Set the Frequency Gain (page 351) to 0 and start the system in MAN Mode.
2. In case of MCB application follow the synchronization procedure over the MGCB according to rules
described in particular Gen-set guide.
3. Change the Gen-sets Speed Bias a little bit to get different frequency than Mains frequency.
4. Set Angle Gain (page 352) to 0 and start the synchronization by pressing MGCB ON/OFF button. MGCB
LED starts to flash to indicate synchronization. To stop synchronization press again MGCB ON/OFF.
5. Adjust Frequency Gain (page 351) to unstable frequency control and decrease value by 30 % to insure
stable performance.
6. Adjust Frequency Int (page 352) to stable (fast and smooth) frequency control and change Gen-sets
Speed Bias back to original vlaue.
7. Synchroscope movement on the controller measure screen should slow down and stop (in any position,
because Angle Gain (page 352) control is off).
8. Set Angle Gain (page 352). Synchroscope on the controller measure screen should move slowly and
stop in “up“ position. Set Angle Gain (page 352) to unstable value (synchroscope swings) and decrease
value by 30 % to insure stable performance.
9. Now your frequency regulation loop setup is done.

Load Control Adjustment

MINT application
Load control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is closed). Switch off other
parts of the system (Gen-sets) while adjusting.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 141

 1. Set #System Baseload (page 241) setpoint to 30 % of one Controller.
2. Set Load Gain (page 338) to the same value as Angle Gain (page 352) and Load Int (page 339) to 0.
3. Start theController in MAN Mode, press MGCB ON/OFF button to synchronize and close Controller to
mains.
4. When MGCB is closed, Controller load slowly increases to the #System Baseload (page 241) value.
Check that Controller power is positive (CT polarity).
5. Increase Load Int (page 339) to unstable load control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance. When Load Int (page 339) factor is set to zero Controller load can differ from required
#System Baseload (page 241).
6. To adjust and optimize Load Int (page 339) change #System Baseload (page 241) several times
between 30 and 70 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258).
7. Now your Load regulation loop setup is done.

SPTM application
Load control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is closed).
1. Set Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) = BASELOAD, BESS P request source (page 1) = Setpoint,
BESS Charge Power (page 1)/BESS Discharge Power (page 1) setpoint to 30 % Nominal DC Shore
Power (page 258) of Controller and activate LBI BATT CHARGE ENABLE (PAGE 1)/BATT DISCHARGE
ENABLE (PAGE 1).
2. Set Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) = BASELOAD, set Baseload (page 1) setpoint to 30 %
Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258) of Controller.
3. Set Load Gain (page 338) to the same value as Angle Gain (page 352). Set Load Int (page 339) to
zero.
4. Start the Controller in MAN Mode, press MGCB ON/OFF button to synchronize and close Bus to mains.
5. When MGCB is closed, Controller load slowly increases to BESS Charge Power (page
1)/BESS Discharge Power (page 1) valueBaseload (page 1) value. Check that Controller power is
positive (CT polarity).
6. Increase Load Gain (page 338) to unstable load control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance. When Load Int (page 339) factor is set to zero Controller load can differ from required
BESS Charge Power (page 1)/BESS Discharge Power (page 1)Baseload (page 1).
7. To adjust and optimize Load Int (page 339) change BESS Charge Power (page 1)/BESS Discharge
Power (page 1)Baseload (page 1) several times between 30 and 70 % of Nominal DC Shore Power
(page 258). Usually setting Load Int (page 339) to 100% gives optimal performance.
8. When Controller is running under full load check if speed governor output voltage value is not limited (it
does not reach Speed Governor Low Limit (page 1) or Speed Governor High Limit (page 1)).
a. Speed governor output voltage value is not limited (it does not reach Speed Governor Low Limit
(page 1) or Speed Governor High Limit (page 1))
b. Speed governor actuator is not mechanically limited or operates in a small section of the throttle
range.
9. Now your Load regulation loop setup is done.
Load control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is closed). 1 Gen-set is
enough fo settings, switch off other Gen-sets while adjusting.
1. Set #System Baseload (page 241) setpoint to 30 % of one Gen-set.
2. Set Load Gain (page 338) to the same value as Angle Gain (page 352) and Load Int (page 339) to 0.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 142

 3. Start the system in MAN Mode, press MGCB ON/OFF button to synchronize and close Gen-set to mains.
4. When MGCB is closed, Gen-set load slowly increases to #System Baseload (page 241) value. Check
that Gen-set power is positive (CT polarity).
5. Increase Load Int (page 339) to unstable load control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance. When Load Int (page 339) factor is set to zero Gen-set load can differ from required
#System Baseload (page 241).
6. To adjust and optimize Load Int (page 339) change #System Baseload (page 241) several times
between 30 and 70 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258).
7. Now your Load regulation loop setup is done.

5.4.20 Output Control - Voltage/PF

The voltage control output is used to control the voltage or the power factor of the Gen-set. The voltage
regulation, PF regulation and VAr sharing are realized through the voltage control. The voltage request is internal
value of the regulator which is transformed to range 0...100% of the Varsharing Output (page 468) which
comes out of the controller via communication line. Gen-set accepts this value and transform this to its AVR
control output.

Voltage/PF control adjustment

Voltage Adjustment
1. Set Voltage Gain (page 353), Voltage Int (page 353) to 0 .
2. Start the System in MAN Mode without load.
3. Increase Voltage Gain (page 353) to unstable voltage control and decrease value by 30 % to insure
stable performance.
4. Adjust Voltage Int (page 353) to stable (fast and smooth) voltage control.
5. Now your voltage regulation loop setup is done.

PF Adjustment
Power factor control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is closed).
1. Set PF Gain (page 345) to the same value as parameters Voltage Gain (page 353) and Voltage Int
(page 353) to 0.
2. Set #System Baseload (page 241) = 30 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258) and #System
Power Factor (page 245) = 1.0.
3. Start and synchronize the system in MAN Mode by pressing MGCB ON/OFF (in case of MCB application
press the MGCB button on Gen-set controller).
4. When running in parallel to mains loaded on 30%, increase slowly PF Gain (page 345) to unstable point
and then decrease the value by 30 % to insure stable performance.
5. Increase Load Int (page 339) to unstable load control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance. When Load Int (page 339) factor is set to zero Controller load can differ from required
#System Power Factor (page 245).
6. Now your PF/Q regulation loop setup is done.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 143

5.4.21 Parallel To Mains Operation
Ramping the power 144
Load control 145
PF/Q control 146
Transfers of Load 149
This chapter describes the situation where the multiple Gen-sets are running parallel to mains. This situation will
occur when the common bus bar is connected to the mains (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is present) and
thegroup of Gen-sets has been connected to the bus. If the bus bar is healthy, all Gen-sets will synchronize to the
already energized bus bar.
IMPORTANT: The controller in MINT application does not control the MCB! Only the MCB position is
evaluated from the binary input MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) and the position is the basic source of
information for switching between island and parallel to mains operation. If MCB Feedback is not
configured the state is automatically shared via intercontroller CAN.

Ramping the power

Power up
Ramp up starts when value Required P Target (page 465) is increased above value Required P (page 466).
The first phase of the parallel to mains operation is the ramp of the system up to the desired power level. Ramp
starts when value Required P Target (page 465) rises. If the MGCB has been just closed, value Required P
(page 466) is ramped from 0 kw up to the new value of Required P Target (page 465) based on Load Ramp
(page 343), otherwise is value Required P (page 466) ramped from Total Running P (page 462). Setpoint
Load Ramp (page 343) determines how long it shall take to ramp up from 0 kW to Running Nominal Power Of
All (page 463).

Examples Description
Nominal Mains Import = 100 kW
MGCB gets closed, Required P is ramped from 0 kW
Load Ramp = 10 s
to 50 kW in 5 s.
#System Baseload = 50 kW
Nominal Mains Import = 100 kW MGCB is closed, Total Running P = 50 kW, #System
Load Ramp = 10 s Baseload is changed to 70 kW. Required P is
#System Baseload = 70 kW ramped from 50 kW To 70 kW in 2 s.

Power down
Ramp down starts when value Required P Target (page 465) drops, value Required P (page 466) is ramped
from Total Running P (page 462) down to the new value of Required P Target (page 465) based on Load
Ramp (page 343). Setpoint Load Ramp (page 343) determines how long it shall take to ramp down from
Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258) to 0 kW.

Soft unload
When MGCB is about to be opened (MGCB open command or stop command have been received), controller
uses for ramping to Generator Unload MGCB Open Level (page 342).
6 back to Parallel To Mains Operation

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 144

 Load control
If MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is active (parallel to mains operation) the load of Gen-set group is controlled to
reach the power defined by setpoint #System Baseload (page 241) or Import Load (page 242) or by Load
Sharing line. If the setpoint #System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar the system load is regulated
by the InteliMains supervisor controller, otherwise the load is controlled locally in each controller by load control
regulation loop. The regulation loop is adjusted via setpoints Load Gain (page 338) and Load Int (page 339).

System Baseload
System baseload ensures that the system keeps certain Total Running P (page 462), which is given by
Required P (page 466). Required P (page 466) is ramped to Required P Target (page 465) using Load
Ramp (page 343).
#System Load Control PTM (page 239) has to be adjusted to Load Shar, Load Control PTM Mode (page
240) has to be adjusted to Baseload and Required P Target (page 465) is given by:
If Load Request Source (page 238) = Setpoint, Required P Target (page 465) = #System Baseload
(page 241).
If Load Request Source (page 238) = Analog External Value, Required P Target (page 465) is equal
to value from LAI LOAD CONTROL: ANEXT BASELOAD (PAGE 596).
Note: Required P Target (page 465), (Mains Import P (page 439)) can be limited in case of applied
Import/Export Limitation (page 241).

Note: In case LAI LOAD CONTROL: ANEXT BASELOAD (PAGE 596) is not configured or has Invalid flag (page
434), the setpoint source is used instead of AIN.

Import/Export
Import/Export ensures that the Gen-sets regulates their power to keep certain Mains Import P (page 439).
Total Running P (page 462) is given by Required P (page 466) which is ramped to Required P Target (page
465) using Load Ramp (page 343).
#System Load Control PTM (page 239) has to be adjusted to Load Shar, Load Control PTM Mode (page
240) has to be adjusted to Import/Export and Required P Target (page 465) is given by:
If Load Request Source (page 238) = Setpoint, Mains Import P (page 439) = Import Load (page
242).
If Load Request Source (page 238) = Analog External Value, Mains Import P (page 439) is equal to
value from LAI LOAD CONTROL: ANEXT IMP/EXP LOAD (PAGE 597).
Note: In case LAI LOAD CONTROL: ANEXT IMP/EXP LOAD (PAGE 597) is not configured or has Invalid flag
(page 434), the setpoint source is used instead of AIN.

6 back to Parallel To Mains Operation

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 145

 PF/Q control
PF Control 146
Q Control 146
Q(Um) 147
Q(P) 148
Qref/Ulim 149
If MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is active (Parallel To Mains Operation) the PF/Q of Gen-set is controlled to reach
the PF/Q defined by setpoint #System Power Factor (page 245)/#System Base Q (page 246) or Import
Power Factor (page 247)/Import Q (page 247).Var Sharing line is used automatically if Load Sharing is active
or while island operation. If the setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Var Shar the system PF/Q is
regulated by the InteliMains supervisor controller, otherwise the load is controlled locally in each controller by var
control regulation loop. The regulation loop is adjusted via setpoints PF Gain (page 345) and PF Int (page 346).
InteliMains controller offers 6 modes for controlling of PF/Q. PF/Q control ensures that the system keeps a
certain Total Running Power Factor (page 462) or Total Running Q (page 462) (based on selected mode) in
parallel to Mains operation(Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper) and at least one Gen-set is excited.
Note: Mains controller plays active role in case of the PF/Q control only in case the sepoint #System PF
Control PTM (page 244) is set to Var Shar, otherwise the PF/Q control is controlled by Gen-set controllers and
their PF control loops.

PF Control
PF Control ensures that the system keeps certain Total Running Q (page 462), which is given by Required PF
(page 467). To enable this control, adjust #System PF Control PTM (page 244) to Var Shar and PF/Q Control
PTM Mode (page 244) to PF Control.

System Base PF
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Base PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page 467) with
Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:
System PF/Q Control (page 466) = PF Control BASE and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Required PF (page 467) is given by the Setpoint
#System Power Factor (page 245) or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, Required PF (page 467) is given by
value from LAI PF CONTROL: ANEXT BASE PF (PAGE 1).
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Import/Export PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page
467) with Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:

Q Control
Total Running Power Factor (page 462) is adjusted to reach Required Q (page 467). To enable this control,
adjust #System PF Control PTM (page 244) to Var Shar and PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) to Q
Control.

System Base Q
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Base PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page 467) with
Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 146

 System PF/Q Control (page 466) = Q Control BASE and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Required Q (page 467) is given by #System Base Q
(page 246) or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, Required Q (page 467) is given by
value from LAI Q Control: ANEXT Base Q (page 1).

Import/Export Q
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Import/Export PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page
467) with Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:
System PF/Q Control (page 466) = Q Control IMP/EXP and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Mains Import Q (page 439) is given by Import Q
(page 247) or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, Mains Import Q (page 439) is given by
value from LAI Q CONTROL: ANEXT IMP/EXP Q (PAGE 1).
Note: Alarm Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail (page 663) is activated if:
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = None
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Analog Input and LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is either
not configured or has Invalid flag (page 434).
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = None
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = Analog Input and LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT Q (PAGE 597) is either
not configured or has Invalid flag (page 434).

6 back to PF/Q control

Q(Um)
Total Running Q (page 462) is automatically adjusted to correspond with predefined Required Q (page 467)
upon change of relative Mains voltage. The predefined Required Q (page 467) is adjusted by application curve
Q(UM) (PAGE 1)

Base Q(Um)
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Base PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page 467) with
Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:
System PF/Q Control (page 466) = Q(Um) BASE and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Required Q (page 467) is given by Q(UM) (PAGE 1)
curve. The curve can be offset horizontally by Q(um) 0 Reference (page 1) and in case of Mains
Voltage changes too fast, there is Q(Um) Deadband (page 1). Actual value of the curve is stored in Q
(Um) Curve (page 1). Or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, Required Q (page 467) is still given by
Q(UM) (PAGE 1) curve, but the horizontal offset is given by value of LAI Q(UM): 0 REF ANEXT BASE Q
(PAGE 1)System PF/Q Control (page 466) Q(Um) Deadband (page 1) can also be applied. Actual
value of the curve is stored in Q(Um) Curve (page 1).
Note: Alarm Wrn Q(Um) Fail (page 1) is activated if LAI Q(UM): 0 REF ANEXT BASE Q (PAGE 1) is not
configured or has Invalid flag (page 434). Power is controlled as if PF/Q Request Source (page 243) =
Setpoint.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 147

 Import/Export Q(Um)
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Import/Export PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page
467) with Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:
System PF/Q Control (page 466) = Q(Um) BASE and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Required Q (page 467) is given by Q(UM) (PAGE 1)
curve. The curve can be offset horizontally by Q(um) 0 Reference (page 1) and in case of Mains
Voltage changes too fast, there is Q(Um) Deadband (page 1). Actual value of the curve is stored in Q
(Um) Curve (page 1). Or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, Required Q (page 467) is still given by
Q(UM) (PAGE 1) curve, but the horizontal offset is given by value of LAI Q(UM): 0 REF ANEXT BASE Q
(PAGE 1)System PF/Q Control (page 466) Q(Um) Deadband (page 1) can also be applied. Actual
value of the curve is stored in Q(Um) Curve (page 1).
Note: Alarm Wrn Q(Um) Fail (page 1) is activated if LAI Q(UM): 0 REF ANEXT BASE Q (PAGE 1) is not
configured or has Invalid flag (page 434). Power is controlled as if PF/Q Request Source (page 243) =
Setpoint.

Note: Alarm Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail (page 663) is activated if:
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = None
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Analog Input and LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is either
not configured or has Invalid flag (page 434).
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = None
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = Analog Input and LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT Q (PAGE 597) is either
not configured or has Invalid flag (page 434).

6 back to PF/Q control

Q(P)
Total Running Q (page 462) is automatically adjusted to correspond with predefined Required Q (page 467)
based on Total Running P (page 462). The predefined Required Q (page 467) is adjusted by application curve
Q(P) (PAGE 599) To enable this control, adjust #System PF Control PTM (page 244) to Var Shar and PF/Q
Control PTM Mode (page 244) to Q(P).

Base Q(P)
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Base PF/Q Control. The Total Running Q (page 462)
is based on:
System PF/Q Control (page 466) = Q(P) BASE and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Required Q (page 467) is given by Q(P) (PAGE 599)
curve in x-axe range 0 to 100 %. Or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, alarm Wrn Q(P) Fail (page 664) is
immediately activated because this control mode does not support external analog value. Power is
controled as if PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint.

Import/Export Q(P)
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Import/Export PF/Q Control. The Required Q (page
467)is based on:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 148

 System PF/Q Control (page 466) = Q(P) IMP/EXP and
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint, Mains Import Q (page 439) is given by Q(P) (PAGE
599) curve in x-axe range -100 to 100 %. Or
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value, alarm Wrn Q(P) Fail (page 664) is
immediately activated because this control mode does not support external analog value. Power is
controled as if PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Setpoint.
Note: Alarm Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail (page 663) is activated if:
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = None
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Analog Input and LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is either
not configured or has Invalid flag (page 434).
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = None
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = Analog Input and LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT Q (PAGE 597) is either
not configured or has Invalid flag (page 434).

6 back to PF/Q control

Qref/Ulim
Total Running Q (page 462) is automatically adjusted to correspond with predefined Required Q (page 467)
upon change of relative Mains voltage. The predefined Required Q (page 467) is adjusted by application curve
QREF/ULIM (PAGE 1). To enable this control, adjust #System PF Control PTM (page 244) to Var Shar and PF/Q
Control PTM Mode (page 244) to Qref/Ulim.

Base Qref/Ulim
PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) has to be adjusted to Base PF/Q Control. The Required PF (page 467) with
Required PF Character (page 467) are based on:
6 back to Parallel To Mains Operation

Transfers of Load
Type of transfer of load between mains and bus and vice versa is adjusted via setpoints Transfer Gen To Mains
(page 341) and Transfer Mains To Gen (page 340).

Types of transfers

Transfer of the load from bus to mains and vice versa without parallel work and
Open synchronization (one breaker opens and second is closed - checking feedbacks). The
setpoint Open Transfer Min Break (page 339) sets the minimal duration of break.
Transfer of the load from bus to mains and vice versa with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max Duration
Close Only
(page 339).
In case of synchronization fail, MCB stays closed and system start is deactivated.
Transfer of the load from bus to mains and vice versa with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max Duration
Close Primarily
(page 339).
In case of synchronization fail, open transfer is done.

Soft Transfer Transfer of the load from bus to mains and vice versa with parallel work and soft

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 149

 loading/unloading of the Gen-sets. This function is proceeded like the closed transfer,
but there is time limitation of loading/unloading of the Gen-sets adjusted via setpoint
Load Ramp (page 343). The transfer is succeed only when the Gen-sets are fully
loaded/unloaded (level of load when mains is considered as unloaded – Gen-sets are
loaded is adjusted via setpoint Mains Unload MCB Open Window (page 342)), level
of load when Gen-sets are considered as unloaded is adjusted via setpoint Generator
Unload MGCB Open Level (page 342)).

Transition in MAN
Behavior of transfer of load in MAN mode is adjusted via setpoint CB Control In MAN Mode (page 248).

No limitation of CB control in MAN mode (operator can close any breaker manually or evoke
Full Ctrl
the synchronization and consequential operation in parallel to mains).
Operator can control both MCB or MGCB breaker. However once synchronization is evoked
Aut Trans the controller performs the automatic transfer of the load (depends on adjustment of setpoints
Transfer Gen To Mains (page 341) and Transfer Mains To Gen (page 340)).
Behaves like the full manual control but the Island operation is disabled.
Islnd Disl Example: When MCB opened and MGCB pressed, controller don’t go to island.

Example: In parallel operation when MCB button pressed, MCB is not opened.

IMPORTANT: Control of MGCB is affected by SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) even in Controller
mode (page 267) = MAN. SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) has to be active before MGCB can be
closed. You can activate SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) for example by pressing the Start
Button.

Transition in AUTO
Behavior of transfer of load in AUTO mode is affected by binary inputs FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537), FORCE
PARALLEL (PAGE 538) and REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560).
When more binary inputs are activated at the same time, their priority is shown in the list below:
FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537) (highest priority).
REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560).
FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538) (lowest priority).

Note: AMF function has the highest priority (if it is enabled).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 150

 Logical
binary AUTO mode TEST mode
input
The System Start/Stop is
activated anyway due to the
When activated:
TEST mode.
System Start/Stop is activated
FORCE When activated:
the transfer of load from mains to Mains is done
ISLAND the transfer of load from
When deactivated:
(PAGE 537) mains to Mains is done
the transfer of load from Mains to mains is done
When deactivated:
System Start/Stop is deactivated
the transfer of load from
Mains to mains is done
The System Start/Stop is
When activated: activated anyway due to the
System Start/Stop activated TEST mode.
if mains parameters ok - synchronize, run in When activated:
REMOTE
parallel if mains parameters ok -
START/STOP
if mains parameters not ok - run in island synchronize, run in
(PAGE 560)
When deactivated: parallel

unloading (if Gen-set was in parallel), System When deactivated:

Start/Stop deactivated unloading, System
Start/Stop is deactivated
The System Start/Stop is
When activated: activated anyway due to the
check mains parameters - if not ok no action, if TEST mode.
ok the procedure follows When activated:
System Start/Stop activated, synchronize, check mains parameters
FORCE
parallel operation - if not ok no action, if ok
PARALLEL
in case of mains fail - System Start/Stop is the procedure follows
(PAGE 538)
deactivated (if AMF function is disabled, synchronize, parallel
otherwise it goes to island operation) operation
When deactivated: When deactivated:
unloading, deactivated System Start/Stop unloading, deactivated
System Start/Stop

Type of transfer of load between mains and Gen-sets and vice versa is adjusted via setpoints Transfer Gen
To Mains (page 341) and Transfer Mains To Gen (page 340).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 151

5.4.22 Peak shaving
IMPORTANT: This chapter is relevant only for SPTM application.

The function compares the mains import with some certain limit and start the Gen-set when the load excised this
limit to decrease the mains import for some certain time.
The Peak shaving function is active only in AUT mode in parallel to mains operation. Peak shaving is based on
active power only. If load consumption increases over Peak Shaving Start Level (page 252) and for period
longer than Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 253) the Gen-set is started. If load consumption decreases
below Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 252) and period longer thanPeak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page
253) the Gen-set is stopped. The activation of the function is indicated by LBO:PEAK SHAVING ACTIVE (PAGE
589).

Image 5.92 Peak shaving

5.4.23 PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

List of available PLC blocks 154
PLC Editor 154
PLC logic execution rules 160
PLC monitor 161
Other functions 163

The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) built into the ComAp controllers is generally a simple process unit
used for the automation of processes. The major benefit of the PLC is you don’t need any extra control
devices in your control system. The PLC is tightly integrated with the standard line of controllers. That allows
the PLC editor to be a seamless experience directly in the programming software. Flexibility is at the core of
ComAp's software design and the PLC meets both simple and complex application requirements while using
the same intuitive interface. PLC Editor is a powerful tool that helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It
has a user-friendly graphical interface which makes it easy to use.
ComAp PLC Editor has been developed to help you deal with even the most demanding applications. It
allows you to add control logic, additional alarm functions, or even new features to meet complex or unique
requirements. This easy-to-use PLC Editor means you can customize the way the controller works to match
the application precisely without compromise or limitation.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 152

 Intuitive design, visual programming, and easy modification.
All PLC function blocks can be moved both horizontally and vertically.
Color-coded and linked to relevant functions.
Blocks can be organized to reflect the real process flow.
Groups of blocks can be separated on each sheet to form sub-sets within the design.
Detailed descriptions of inputs and outputs come complete with useful hints

Image 5.93 PLC Editor - main page

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 153

 List of available PLC blocks
In the table below you can find all available PLC blocks.

Group PLC blocks Number of blocks

OR/AND (page 608) 128
Logical
XOR/RS (page 610) 128
Comp Hyst (page 611) 16
Comparators Comp Time (page 612) 8
Comp Win (page 613) 16
Delay (page 614) 16
Time functions
Timer (page 616) 4
Interpolation (page 619) 8
Math Operations Math AxB/C (page 620) 4
Math Fc. (page 621) 16
Inc/Dec (page 622) 2
LowPassFlt (page 624) 2
Ramp functions
Ramp (page 624) 4
Up/Down (page 625) 4
Analog Switch (page 627) 8
Analog Switch 8 (page 627) 8
Others Convert (page 629) 8
Counter (page 631) 4
Decomp. 4 (page 632) 4
For more information about PLC blocks go to the chapter PLC (page 607)
6 back to PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

PLC Editor
Toolbar 154
Working with sheets 155
Blocks Selection Tree 155
Adding PLC blocks 156
PLC Block Configuration 157
Define inputs and outputs 158
Creating wires 159
The PLC Editor is available in InteliConfig Control tab: use Control → Controller Configuration → PLC Editor.

Toolbar
In the upper part of the PLC editor panel there is a toolbar with buttons for working with PLC blocks and PLC
sheets.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 154

 Operations PLC Sheets
Select all elements in sheets Add and remove sheets
Unselect all selected elements Move selected sheet down and up
Delete all selected elements Import sheet
Rerote selected items - wiring optimization Export selected sheet
Delete whole content of currently selected sheet Expand and Colapse all sheets
Others
Enable/Disable hints

6 back to PLC Editor

Working with sheets

PLC editor supports working with multiple sheets. You can add or delete sheets and move them up and down.
Every sheet can be also renamed by double-click on sheet name "Sheet 1". Each sheet can be re-sized
according to your needs by dragging the sheet edges. InteliConfig also supports importing and exporting of
the individual sheet.
Note: The number of PLC blocks on one PLC sheet is limited to 30 blocks.

Image 5.94 Adjusting PLC sheet

6 back to PLC Editor

Blocks Selection Tree

On the left side of PLC Editor panel is available PLC blocks selection tree. Blocks are grouped into groups of
similar functionality next to the name of each block the number of used /available blocks of that type is
indicated in brackets.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 155

 Image 5.95 Blocks selection treet

6 back to PLC Editor

Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is using simple and intuitive drag and drop system. Follow the procedure below to add PLC
block.
Select required PLC block by LMB (left mouse button) from the list of available PLC blocks on the left side
and drag it into the sheet.
Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. It is also possible to connected inputs
and outputs via properties of selected PLC block.
Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can be used.

Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.

Image 5.96 Adding PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 156

 6 back to PLC Editor

PLC Block Configuration

Double-click on the block by LMB (left mouse button) to invoke the configuration panel specific for each block
type. In general, the definition of the block inputs and outputs is accompanied by some settings of block
properties. See PLC (page 607) for more information about blocks.

Selecting the Inverted input check box means using negated input when evaluating the block.
Selecting the Inverted output check box means issuing a negated output value after the block has been
internally evaluated.
The binary values can be either controller Values, Setpoints or PLC binary outputs.
The analog values can be either controller Values, Setpoints, PLC analog outputs or entered as direct
constant block values. Non-numeric Setpoint values (e.g. IP address) cannot be used.
If a variable (binary signal) is connected via wire, the connection appears directly in the field - otherwise
the variable (binary signal) can be set using the dialog invoked by the '...' button.
Specific properties of the block (e.g. function type, mode of operation, etc.) can be set in the
corresponding panel object (list box, check box).
If the block has a variable number of inputs, the '+' button (in the upper left corner) adds an additional input
(channel) up to the maximum number of channels. Use 'X' button to remove a channel.
Note: If the constants are used (i.e. set by block configuration dialog) they cannot be changed dynamically
during PLC execution.

6 back to PLC Editor

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 157

 Define inputs and outputs

Image 5.97 PLC Inputs and Outputs

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. Values - this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs, logical
binary outputs etc.
PLC Outputs - You can connect any PLC Output to another PLC Input.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. Values - this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All Setpoints - this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC setpoints.
Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.

Image 5.98 PLC Inputs

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 158

 Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an output.
Double-click on a free output position to add new sheet output (binary or analog).
Draw the wire from the PLC block output to the PLC output on the right side of the sheet.
Doubleclick on an already created output to open it's configuration.
Use the button + Connect to connect the PLC output onto a controller output terminal or a logical binary
input.
Use the button - Disconnect to disconnect the PLC output from a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input.
Note: PLC block output has to be connected to the PLC output to enable configuration of the PLC output.

Note: It is necessary to click on the Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC output is not
connected to output.

Image 5.99 PLC Outputs

6 back to PLC Editor

Creating wires
Wires can be created between PLC inputs and PLC block inputs, PLC block outputs nad PLC block inputs, or
PLC block outputs and PLC outputs.
Follow the procedure below to create wire.
Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire (dot). If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the connection point changes to bold dot.
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point
(from dot to dot connection). If you point over a valid connection point, the connection point changes to
bold dot.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 159

 Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points (dots). The wire is routed
automatically.
Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value
(binary or analog). Binary values are marked by black dot, analog values are marked with green dot.

Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can be used.

IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values are
converted and the name of block is displayed as red in the PLC Monitor. It is strongly
recommended to fix the configuration = use the signals/values with the same range and decimal
numbers.

Image 5.100 Wiring PLC blocks

6 back to PLC Editor

6 back to PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms (this time is given by the PLC controller system integration) and
cannot be changed. PLC execution starts automatically after the ComAp controller is powered on and the
firmware initialization is completed.
The inital values for PLC inputs are given by the respective signals (e.g. actual power value) or determined by the
specific PLC block settings.
PLC blocks are executed in the order of the block numbers (Item numbers), that appear in each block. Block
numbers are assigned automatically according to the block position on the sheet based on the following scheme.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 160

 Image 5.101 PLC execution logic

IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!

The execution order is Item 1 → Item 2 → Item 3, so in the second case the AND block evaluation will use
Timer block output before the update.

PLC monitor
PLC monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC Monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see you PLC in the run time. The refresh rate is given by the system integration. The PLC Monitor is
available in InteliConfig Control tab.
PLC monitor supports working with multiple controllers - on the left side of the panel there is a selection tree for
choosing the desired controller for PLC monitoring.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 161

 Image 5.102 PLC Monitor panel with multiple controllers

Note: In the PLC Monitor it is not possible to modify the PLC, not even the position of the blocks.

Active binary inputs, outputs and wires are blue, analog inputs, outputs and values are green. The values of
analog signals (as well as constants set in the blocks configuration) are also visible.

Image 5.103 PLC Monitor sheet with invalid value

Note: If the analog signal have an invalid value, the red "####" string is displayed and the connecting wire is
also red.

The PLC monitor also supports multi-sheet monitoring - individual sheets can be hidden/expanded using the
button in the top title bar.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 162

 Image 5.104 PLC Monitor with multiple sheets

6 back to PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

Other functions
Consistency check
This performs a check of the PLC schematic
for the validity of the block interconnection = all inputs that are in internal design rules marked as
mandatory are connected and/or configured
for the consistency of the dimensions (setting attribute Dimension) and the number of decimal place
(setting attribute Resolution) at both ends of the interconnection wire

Image 5.105 Consistency Check valid output

Use this function during the design phase to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected
properly, and the design is consistent. The check is also performed automatically when the configuration may
be written to controller.
If the Consistency Check detect any problems, all findings will be displayed in the message window.

Image 5.106 Consistency Check report output

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 163

 Message Meaning Remedy
Connected wire is not Probably Resolution and/or Use correct Resolution and/or
supported for function block Dimension mismatch on Dimension on both ends of
(Item X) the wire wire
Mandatory inputs of the
Not connected connector/s for Connect and/or configure all
block are not connected /
function block (item X) mandatory inputs
configured
Some connectors which must Probably Resolution and/or Use correct Resolution and/or
have same unit or resolution Dimension mismatch on Dimension on both ends of
are different for function block the wire or on Inputs and/or wire of between block inputs
(Item X) Output and output

Note: The Consistency Check checks whole configuration so it can report findings outside the PLC
configuration.

Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).
IMPORTANT: The sheet content is deleted immediately, without confirmation dialog (and there is
not any Undo or Redo button)!

Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).
Note: Each PLC block has help which is opened by selecting the block and pressing "F1".

5.4.24 Power Formats And Units

InteliMains 510 allows users to choose from several Power Formats that affect dimensions in which values and
some setpoints are interpreted or adjusted. Power formats and units can be changed with InteliConfig in the
following way. Control tab → Controller configuration → Others tab → Units/Power format
Power formats are available in decimal and non decimal format. Units can be changed to metric or US units.

Units
Metric 20 °C 10.0 bar 11.4 l/h
US 68 °F 145 psi 3.01 gph

Power Format
Small 0.1 kW / kVA / kVAr 1V
Standard 1 kW / kVA / kVAr 1V
Large HV 0.01 MW / MVA / MVAr 0.01 kV
Large LV 0.01 MW / MVA / MVAr 1V

Note: Range of some setpoints and values is changed significantly when different Power Formats are selected.
Affected setpoint are displayed during selection of power format.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 164

5.4.25 Power Management
Basic power management 165
Principle of power management 166
Load reserve 167
Starting sequence 168
Stopping sequence 169
Absolute power management 170
Relative power management 173
Priorities 175
Priority auto swap 176
Minimal running power 183
Dynamic Spinning Reserve 184

IMPORTANT: The Controller will take part of the power management (will be active) only if the
controller is in AUTO mode!

The Power management function decides how many Controllers should run and selects particular Controllers to
run. The power management is applicable in cases multiple Controllers run in parallel to mains or in the island
operation. The function is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available running power.
Since it allows the system to start and stop Controllers based on the load demand, it can vastly improve the
system fuel efficiency. In other words, an additional Controller starts when the load of the system raises above
certain level. The additional Controller stops, when the load of the system drops down below a certain level. The
process of determining Controller start and stop is done in each controller; there is no "master slave" system.
Therefore, the system is very robust and resistant to failures of any unit in the system. Each of the controllers can
be switched off without influencing the whole system. Except the situation the respective Controller is not
available for the power management.
The power management evaluates so called Load reserve (page 167). The load reserve is calculated as
difference between actual load and nominal power of running Controllers. The reserve is calculated as absolute
value (in kW / kVA) or relatively to the nominal power of Controller(s) (in %). The setpoint #Power Management
Mode (page 315) is used to select the absolute or relative mode.
The Load Reserve can be influenced by the Dynamic Spinning Reserve (page 184) which is used to provide
the system with extra power (running Controllers) in case of anticipated output drop of a renewable source of
energy.
The function Priority auto swap (page 176) focuses on efficient run of Controller in regards to running hours
and Controller size (power).
IMPORTANT: The function of the controller is designed to handle the maximum sum of nominal
power at 32000 kW (or 3200,0 with decimal number).

Example: There are 20 Controllers each with 1000 kW of nominal power. The sum of the nominal power is
20000 kW. Therefore the decimal power format in 0.1 kW cannot be used because the sum exceeds
32000. Therefore power format in kW needs to be chosen.

Basic power management

The Logical binary input REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) requests the system to start or stop. If the input is not
active, the system stops with delay #System Stop Delay (page 317) after the input has been deactivated and
will not start again if in AUTO mode. If the input is activated again, the delay #System Start Delay (page 317)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 165

starts to count down. Once the delay elapsed, the system is activated and can be started by the power
management. In other words, the power management is activated only if the Logical binary inputs REMOTE
START/STOP (PAGE 560) is activated.
Note: The Controller performs load and VAR sharing whenever it is connected to the bus bar i.e. it is
independent on whether the controller is in AUTO or MAN mode or whether the power management is active or
not.

Function of power management can be temporarily blocked after REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) activation a
count down of #System Start Delay (page 317). The delay is given by setpoint Power Management Delay. In
this delay all Controllers where power management is enabled are running. After this period elapses, only the
Controllers needed according to the Power Management calculation stay running and the rest is stopped.
6 back to Power Management

Principle of power management

Internal conditions based on remaining load reserves and priorities are evaluated once a delay is elapsed. If the
load reserve is insufficient the Controller is started after delay given by the setpoint #Next Engine Start Delay
(page 332) is elapsed. Once the Controller runs the controller evaluates stopping conditions based on load
reserves and priorities. If the reserve is sufficient enough to stop a particular Controller, it is stopped after delay
given by the setpoint #Next Engine Stop Delay (page 333) is elapsed. All the time the system stop condition –
i.e. the Logical binary inputs REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) deactivated – is evaluated as well. Once the delay
given by the setpoint #System Stop Delay (page 317) has elapsed all Controllers in AUTO mode are stopped.
Following figure depicts the system activation and deactivation logic.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 166

Setpoint #Overload Next Start Delay (page 335) is used in case that #Overload Next Start Protection (page
334) is enabled and Controllers are running at #Overload Next Start Level (page 334) or more of their nominal
power.
6 back to Power Management

Load reserve
The power management is based on the load reserve concept. The load reserve is defined as a difference of the
running nominal power of the group within power management and the total load of the system. There are two
ways how to determine the load reserve. The absolute power management allows the system to keep the load
reserve higher or equal to value in kW given by a relevant setpoint. The relative power management assures that
load reserve is kept higher or equal to relative portion in % of the nominal power of the group given by a relevant
setpoint. Depending of the situation, load reserves are calculated differently in two cases:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 167

 Island operation

Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

ARstrt = ∑PgNom - ∑PgAct ARstrt < ARstp >
Absolute kW
ARstp = ∑Pg*Nom - ∑PgAct #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop
RRstrt = [(∑PgNom - ∑PgAct) / ∑PgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >
Relative %
RRstp = [(∑Pg*Nom - ∑PgAct) / ∑Pg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop

Parallel to mains operation

Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

ARstrt = ∑PgNom - BaseLoad ARstrt < ARstp >
Absolute kW
ARstp = ∑Pg*Nom - BaseLoad #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop
RRstrt = [(∑PgNom - BaseLoad) / ∑PgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >
Relative %
RRstp = [(∑Pg*Nom - BaseLoad) / ∑Pg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop

List of abbreviations:
ARstrt .. Actual Absolute reserve in kW or kVA - for System start calculation.
ARstp .. Actual Absolute reserves in kW or kVA - for System stop calculation.
RRstrt .. Actual Relative reserve in % - for System start calculation.
RRstp .. Actual Relative reserves in % - for System stop calculation.
ΣPgNom .. Sum of Nominal power of all Controller on the bus.
ΣPg*Nom .. Sum of Nominal power of all Controller on the bus apart of the one, which is going to be
stopped.
ΣPgAct .. Sum of Actual power of all Controller on the bus = system load.
BaseLd .. Baseload is given by the setpoint #System Baseload (page 241)

Note: System starting sequences may be very different due to their complexity (i.e. Controller which do not take
part in power management, various nominal powers etc.). Each system should be considered individually.

6 back to Power Management

Starting sequence
As written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available
running power. An additional Controller starts when the load of the system raises above certain level to keep the
load reserve big enough. Following figure depicts the situation when an additional Controller is requested to join
the already running Controller(s) to the bus.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 168

 Image 5.107 Start sequence of power management

As shown above, the load of the system has increased above the level defined by the start condition – i.e. the
load reserve is not sufficient as required by the appropriate setpoint. Further explanation is provided in chapters
Absolute power management (page 170) and Relative power management (page 173).
The level is illustrated by the green dashed line. If the load reserve keeps insufficient for longer time than defined
by the setpoint #Next Engine Start Delay (page 332), the next Controller is actually started. The standard
starting sequence follows. Once the synchronization procedure is done, the MGCB breaker is closed and the
Controller power is ramping up. Once loaded, the system load reserve is raised and becomes sufficient again.
Please note the sum of nominal power of all Controllers on the bus is increased by the nominal power of the
additional Controller.
6 back to Power Management

Stopping sequence
As it is written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of
available running power. An additional Controller stops when the load of the system drops below certain level to
avoid inefficient run of the Controller. Following figure depicts the situation when a Controller is requested to stop
due to the power management.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 169

 Image 5.108 Stopping sequence of power management

As shown above, the system load has decreased below the level defined by the stop condition – i.e. the load
reserve is over a limit given by the appropriate setpoint. Further explanation is provided in chapters Absolute
power management (page 170) and Relative power management (page 173).
The level is illustrated by the red dashed line. If the load reserve keeps over this limit for longer time than defined
by setpoint #Next Engine Stop Delay (page 333), the next Controller is actually requested to stop. Once the
Controller is unloaded, the MGCB breaker is opened. Please note the sum of nominal power of all Controllers on
the bus is decreased by the nominal power of the stopped Controller. The cooling sequence follows before the
Controller is actually stopped. The Controller is ready to be started if the system load increases again.
6 back to Power Management

Absolute power management

The power management based on absolute load reserves can be successfully used in cases the load portions
are similar to the Controller capacity or even bigger. The goal of the absolute reserve mode is to provide the
same load reserve all the time independently on how many Controllers are currently running. The mode perfectly
fits for industrial plants with large loads.
The absolute power management guarantees adjustable load reserve in kW. This mode is active when #Power
Management Mode (page 315) is set to ABS [kW] mode.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 170

 Image 5.109 Power management based on absolute load reserve

Example: An example of absolute power management is shown on the figure below. There are three
Controllers with following choice of setpoints:

#Starting
Power #Power #Priority #Stopping
Nominal Load
Controller managemen managemen Priority Auto Load
power Reserve
t t mode Swap Reserve X
X
Controller
200 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 1 Disabled 100 kW 125 kW
#1
Controller
500 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 2 Disabled 100 kW 125 kW
#2
Controller
1 000 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 3 Disabled 100 kW 125 kW
#3

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 171

 Image 5.110 Absolute power management example

As it is shown on both figures above, the additional Controller is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the appropriate setpoint of load reserve. The additional Controller is removed once the actual load
reserve is above the level set by appropriate setpoint of load reserve.
The green dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional Controller is requested to start. This value
of the load value is linked with the setpoint #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 319) (or other selected reserve set)
in following way:
Sum of nominal power for start - #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 319) (or other selected reserve set) = value of
load when additional Controller requested to start (e.g.: 700 kW – 100 kW = 600 kW).
The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional Controller is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) (or other selected reserve set)
in following way:
Sum of nominal power for stop - #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) (or other selected reserve set) = value
of load when additional Controller requested to stop (e.g.: 700 kW – 125 kW = 575 kW).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 172

There are 4 sets of setpoints for starting and stopping Controllers in absolute power management.
#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 319) and #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320)
#Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 322) and #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 323) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543) is activated
#Starting Load Reserve 3 (page 325) and #Stopping Load Reserve 3 (page 326) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 3 ACTIVE (PAGE 544) is activated
#Starting Load Reserve 4 (page 328) and #Stopping Load Reserve 4 (page 329) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545) is activated
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set selected.

Relative power management

The power management based on relative load reserves perfectly fits to those applications with such load
portions connected to the group at once are much lower than the Controller nominal power. This mode helps to
achieve the maximal lifetime of the Controllers, as they can be operated within optimal load range. The maximal
size of the load connected at once depends on number of actually working Controllers. The more Controllers are
connected to the bus bar the bigger load portion can be connected at once.
The relative power management guarantees that the engines are not continuously loaded more than to a certain
level. This mode is active when #Power Management Mode (page 315) is set to REL [%] mode.

Image 5.111 Power management based on relative load reserve

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 173

 Example: An example of relative power management is shown on the figure below. There are three
Controllers with following choice of setpoints:

#Starting
Power #Power #Priority #Stopping
Nominal Rel Load
Controller managemen managemen Priority Auto Rel Load
power Reserve
t t mode Swap Reserve X
X
Controller
200 kW Enabled REL (%) 1 Disabled 35 % 40 %
#1
Controller
500 kW Enabled REL (%) 2 Disabled 35 % 40 %
#2
Controller
1 000 kW Enabled REL (%) 3 Disabled 35 % 40 %
#3

Image 5.112 Relative power management example

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 174

As it is shown on both figures above, the additional Controller is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the appropriate setpoint of load reserve. The additional Controller is removed once the actual load
reserve is above the level set by appropriate setpoint of load reserve.
The green dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional Controller is requested to start. This value
of the load value is linked with the setpoint #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321) (or other selected reserve
set) in following way:
(100 % - #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321) (or other selected reserve set)) * Sum of Nominal power =
Value of load when additional Controller requested to start in kW (in % of nominal power), e.g.: (100 % – 35 %) *
700 kW = 455 kW (65 % of nominal power).
The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional Controller is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321) (or other selected reserve
set) in following way:
(100 % - #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321) (or other selected reserve set)) * Sum of Nominal power =
Value of load when additional Controller requested to stop in kW (in % of nominal power), e.g.: (100 % – 40 %) *
700 kW = 420 kW (60 % of nominal power).
There are 4 sets of setpoint for starting and stopping Controllers in relative power management.
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321)
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 324) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 324) considered
if binary input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543) is activated
#Starting Load Reserve 3 (page 325) and #Stopping Load Reserve 3 (page 326) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 3 ACTIVE (PAGE 544) is activated
#Starting Load Reserve 4 (page 328) and #Stopping Load Reserve 4 (page 329) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545) is activated
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set selected.

6 back to Power Management

Priorities
The priority of the Controller within the group is given by the setpoint Priority. Lower number represents "higher"
priority, i.e. a Controller with lower number starts before another one with higher number. In other words, the
setpoint Priority means order in which Controllers are started and connected to the bus. An example is shown on
the figure below. There are four Controllers with following choice of setpoints:

#Starting
Power #Power #Priority #Stopping
Nominal Load
Controller managemen managemen Priority Auto Load
power Reserve
t t mode Swap Reserve X
X
Controller
200 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 4 Disabled 50 kW 70 kW
#1
Controller
200 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 3 Disabled 50 kW 70 kW
#2
Controller
200 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 2 Disabled 50 kW 70 kW
#3
Controller
200 kW Enabled ABS (kW) 1 Disabled 50 kW 70 kW
#4

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 175

 Image 5.113 Example of priorities in power management

By choosing the setpoint Priority = 1, the Controller #4 is running all the time in the example shown on the figure
above (AUTO mode selected, Power management enabled and LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) activated).
The LBI Top Priority can be used to force priority 0 into the setpoint Priority. Priority 0 is the "highest" one, which
means the Controller will be running all the time while the power management is switched on.
If more than one Controller have the same priority, they will act as "one big" Controller. There are methods of
automatic optimization of the priorities to achieve specific behavior of the group such as equalizing engine hours
of the Controllers or selection of optimal Controllers to run according to their size and current load demand.
6 back to Power Management

Priority auto swap

As stated in the chapter Priorities (page 175), the operator is able to select the order of Controller starting.
There is also the option of automatic priority selection. The controllers are sharing data concerning the running
hours and all important information relevant to the actual load. Thanks to the Automatic priority swapping function
the controllers choose the Controller(s) to be running with consideration of their running hours and the actual
load.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 176

The running hours equalization function keeps a constant maximal difference of Controller’s running hours. The
efficient function keeps running only the Controllers with suitable nominal power to avoid inefficient fuel
consumption or Controller overload.
Note: The Automatic priority swapping function does not change the setpoint Priority. The function sets the order
of Controllers by virtual values “engine priority”.

Run hours equalization

The Controllers engine priorities are automatically swapped to balance engine running hours. In other words, the
controllers compare running hours of each Controller and select Controller(s) to run in order to maintain constant
maximal difference of running hours. Up to 32 controllers are supported. This function is activated via setpoint
#Priority Auto Swap (page 316) = RUN HOURS.
The value of running hours which is used in run hours equalization is calculated by following formula:
RHE = Running Hours - Run Hours Base
RHE is considered value for running hours equalization, Running Hours is a cumulative sum of run hours
available in statistic values of the controller, Run Hours Base is a setpoint. This setpoint may be used in the case
of Controllers with different runs hours are intended to be set at the same initial point (e.g. a new Controller and a
used Controller after retrofit maintenance inspection).
The Running hours equalization function compares RHE value of each controller in the group. Once the
difference between RHE of individual controllers is higher than #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) (i.e.
#Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) + 1), the Controller(s) with the lowest RHE is/are started.
Example: The system structure and its settings is shown on the figure below.

Image 5.114 Example of the system

3 cases are considered:

Case #1: 2 Gen-sets available
Case #2: 3 Gen-sets available with same initial RHE.
Case #3: 3 Gen-sets available with different initial RHE.

Case #1:
Controller 1 running hours = 250 -> running hours considered in RHE = 100 (150 - Run Hours Base)
Controller 2 running hours = 450 -> running hours considered in RHE = 200 (250 - Run Hours Base)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 177

Both Controllers have the same nominal power of 700 kW. Originally, priority of Controllers was G1 = 2, G2 = 1.
Load demand in this example is constant and it is 500 kW (i.e. only one engine is running at any time). In this
case, the controllers set the engine priority of the Controller 1 to 1 because it has the lowest considered RHE and
the difference between RHE2 (i.e. considered RHE of Controller 2) and RHE1 is higher than #Run Hours Max
Difference (page 335) that is set to 10h.

Run hours #RunHoursBase RHE

Controller #1 250 150 100
Controller #2 450 250 200

The Controller 1 runs for 100 hours to equalize the RHE of both Controllers. The Controller 1 keeps running until
the difference between RHE1 and RHE2 exceeds #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) (i.e. 10h). The
Controller 1 runs 100 + #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) + 1 = 100 + 10 + 1 = 111 hours. After 111 hours
the Controllers 2 has the lowest RHE and the difference between RHE1 and RHE2 is higher than #Run Hours
Max Difference (page 335). The Controller 2 runs 11 hours to equalize the RHE of both Controllers and then
additional #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) + 1 hours (i.e. 11 + 10 + 1 = 22 hours). The evaluation of
RHE1 and RHE2 is shown on the figure below.

Image 5.115 Run hours equalization - case #1

Step 0 1 2 3 4 5
RHE1 100 211 211 233 233 255
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244
Run G1 (ΔRHE1) 0 111 0 22 0 22
Run G2 (ΔRHE2) 0 0 22 0 22 0

From the example of the case #1, it can be concluded that the Controllers are swapped after the duration
determined by following formula:
SwapTime = Second lowest considered running hours – Current lowest considered running hours + #Run Hours
Max Difference (page 335) +1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 178

 Case #2:
Controller 1 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Controller 2 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Controller 3 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Each Controller has the same RHE = 0 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of Controller 1
before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 0 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 11
Similar way, we get the run time of Controller 2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 11 + 10 + 1 = 11
Finally, we get the run time of Controller 3 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 22
Please refer to figure below to understand the evaluation of RHE of Controllers in this particular case.

Image 5.116 Run hours equalization - case #2

step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 0 11 11 11 11 33 33 33 33 55 55 55 55 77
RHE2 0 0 11 11 22 22 33 33 44 44 55 55 66 66
RHE3 0 0 0 22 22 22 22 44 44 44 44 66 66 66
Run G1
0 11 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22
(ΔRHE1)
Run G2
0 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0
(ΔRHE2)
Run G3
0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0
(ΔRHE3)

Case #3:
Controller 1 running hours = 250 -> running hours considered in RHE = 100 (150-RunHoursBase)
Controller 2 running hours = 450 -> running hours considered in RHE = 200 (250-RunHoursBase)
Controller 3 running hours = 750 -> running hours considered in RHE = 250 (500-RunHoursBase)
The Controller 1 has the lowest RHE1 = 100 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of
Controller 2 before next swapping:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 179

SwapTimeG1 = 200 – 100 + 10 + 1 = 111
Till the step 5, the evaluation of the Controller swapping is the same as in the case #1, just Controller 1 and
Controller 2 involve. In the step 6 the Controller 2 can run only 17 hours (previously 22 hours) because the
Controller 3 involves. The evaluation of RHE1, RHE2 and RHE3 is shown on the figure below.

Image 5.117 Run hours equalization - case #3

step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 100 211 211 232 233 255 255 255 272 272 272 288 288 288
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244 261 261 261 277 277 277 294 294
RHE3 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 266 266 266 283 283 283 299
Run G1
(ΔRHE 0 111 0 22 0 22 0 0 17 0 0 16 0 0
1)
Run G2
(ΔRHE 0 0 22 0 22 0 17 0 0 16 0 0 17 0
2)
Run G3
(ΔRHE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 16
3)

Note: Setting #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) = 5 does not mean that Controllers swap every 5 hours.
The Swap time is determined by the formula stated above. Please read the entire chapter Running hours
equalization for better understanding.

Note: In the case #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335) is set to 0 and all Controller in the group are at the
same initial point (RHE are equal), the Controller swapping happens every hour.

Efficiency
The Controllers engine priorities are automatically swapped to best fit to the actual load demand (load demand
swap - LDS). Also engine running hours are taken to the calculation (run hours equalization - RHE). This function
is activated via setpoint #Priority Auto Swap (page 316) = Efficiency.
Algorithm of function:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 180

 In the first step, the Controllers are sorted according to their nominal power.
In the second step, the Controllers with the same nominal power are sorted according to their RHE
The Controller(s) with nominal power which fits the most actual load demand are chosen. From those with
same nominal power, the Controller(s) with lowest RHE are chosen. Selection formula:
#Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS (kW)
Nominal power of Controller > actual load demand + #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 319)
#Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL (%)
Nominal power of Controller > (actual load demand × 100)/(100 - #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1
(page 321))
If two or more Controllers are available for taking over the load always the one with the lowest CAN
address is chosen.
If load demand is higher than nominal power of the biggest Controller, this one is fixed and the whole
process repeats from point the third bullet.
Example: The system structure and its settings is shown on the figure below.

Image 5.118 Example of the system

Following table provide an example of Controller selection in function of system load evaluation. The table is an
example of Efficiency priority optimization function (#Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS (kW) and
#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 319) = 20 kW).

Total Running
System Running Relative load
Description power within PM
Load [kW] Controllers of Controllers [%]
[kW]
40 5 100 40
60 5 100 60
5 2 start
80 LDS 300 26
2 [0h] 5 stop
100 2 [10h] 200 50
120 2 [20h] 200 60
120 2 [30h] 3 start RHE Swap 400 30

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 181

 Total Running
System Running Relative load
Description power within PM
Load [kW] Controllers of Controllers [%]
[kW]
3 [10h] 2 stop
120 3 [20h] 200 60
140 3 [30h] 200 70
3 [40h] 1 start
180 LDS 500 36
1 3 stop
200 1 300 67
240 1 300 80
1
280 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 400 70
5
1
340 400 85
5
1
4 start
380 5 LDS + RHE Swap 600 63
5 stop
4 [20h]
1
400 500 80
4
1
440 500 88
4
1
480 4 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 600 80
5
1
540 4 600 90
5
1
4 2 start
580 LDS 800 73
5 5 stop
2 [30h]
1
600 4 700 86
2
1
640 4 700 91
2
1
4
680 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 800 85
2
5
740 1 800 93

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 182

 Total Running
System Running Relative load
Description power within PM
Load [kW] Controllers of Controllers [%]
[kW]
4
2
5
1
4
3 start
780 2 LDS 1000 78
5 stop
5
3 [40h]
1
4
800 900 89
2
3
1
4
840 900 93
2
3
1
4
880 2 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 1000 88
3
5
1
4
940 2 1000 94
3
5

6 back to Power Management

Minimal running power

Minimum Running Power function is used to adjust a minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running
Controllers. If the function is active, then the Controllers would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is
fulfilled. Function is activated via logical binary input MIN RUN POWER ACT 1 (PAGE 554), MIN RUN POWER ACT 2
(PAGE 554) and MIN RUN POWER ACT 3 (PAGE 555).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 183

 Image 5.119 Minimal running power

Setpoints #Min Run Power 1 (page 331), #Min Run Power 2 (page 331) or #Min Run Power 3 (page 332)
are adjusted to 400 kW. Once the #Min Run Power 1 (page 331), #Min Run Power 2 (page 331) or #Min Run
Power 3 (page 332) is activated, the available nominal running power has to be equal or higher to 400 kW. Even
if the load reserve is big enough to stop the Controller #2 (nominal power 500 kW), the Controller keeps running
as at least 400 kW has to be available. The Controller#1 (nominal power 200 kW) is not enough.
6 back to Power Management

Dynamic Spinning Reserve

The values Dynamic Spinning Reserve (page 461) and Dynamic Spinning Reserve Offset (page 461) are
used to affect power management operation in case of anticipated output drop of a renewable source of energy.
It enables to shift the load reserve start level and load reserve stop level for power management. The value
Dynamic Spinning Reserve (page 461) is added to required load reserve given by setpoints #Starting Load
Reserve 1 (page 319) and #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) (according to actual load reserve set 1, 2, 3
or 4). The value Dynamic Spinning Reserve Offset (page 461) is added only to required stopping load reserve
given by setpoints #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) (according to actual load reserve set 1, 2, 3 or 4) to
create some dynamic offset between starting and stopping load reserve.
6 back to Power Management

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 184

5.4.26 Protections
Protection types 186
Protection activation 187
Protection blocking 187
Fixed protections 187
User protections 189
Protection states 194

InteliMains 510 combines Fixed protections (page 187) with User protections (page 189) which allows
users to configure their own protections to any analog or binary input. Multiple protections can be configured
on each analog input, number of configured protections are not limited. Only one protection of 1st level
and/or one protection of 2nd level can be configured on logical binary output. The maximum number of
configured User protections (page 189) is limited to 200. The maximum number of configured fast User
protections (page 189) is limited to 50.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 185

 Protection types
Level 1 Protections
LBO COMMON ALARM LEVEL 1 (PAGE 569)

LBO COMMON ALARM ACTIVE LEVEL 1 (PAGE 569)

Action: CB open

Alarm List +
History Alarm List
Name Warning Alarm Only History Record
Record Only Indication
Indication
Abbreviation Wrn Al Hst ALI AHI
Alarm List indication

History record

Fault Reset needed

LBO Alarm activation

LBO Horn activation

COMMON COMMON
COMMON
ALARM HISTORY
Common LBO WARNING
ONLY (PAGE RECORD
(PAGE 571)
570) (PAGE 570)

Level 2 Protections
LBO COMMON ALARM LEVEL 2 (PAGE 569); except Mains Protection

LBO COMMON ALARM ACTIVE LEVEL 2 (PAGE 569) ; except Mains Protection

Name Mains Protection Mains Protection + FltRes System Stop

Abbreviation MP MPR Stp
Alarm List indication

History record

Fault Reset needed

Action: CB open

LBO Alarm activation

LBO Horn activation

COMMON MAINS COMMON MAINS PROTECTION COMMON SYSTEM
Common LBO
PROTECTION (PAGE 570) + FLTRES (PAGE 570) STOP (PAGE 571)

6 back to Protections

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 186

 Protection activation
The table below shows the availability of conditions for analog and binary values

Type Name of activation Protection is activated if value is

Over Limit over limit
Over Limit+Fls over limit or in fault state
Analog Under Limit under limit
Under Limit+Fls under limit or in fault state
Fls only in fault state
True logical 1
TrueOrFls logical 1 or in fault state*
Binary
False logical 0
FalseOrFls logical 0 or in fault state*

* Fault state can occur if there is loss of communication with configured CAN module.
6 back to Protections

Protection blocking
It is possible to configure one Protection Blocking to any User protections (page 189). This function is used to
block certain protections when their function is unwanted or meaningless. Each user protection has an option to
set the blocking condition.
The blocking conditions can be also applied on the Fixed protections (page 187).

General protections
Each of the LBI Protection Force Disable 1 is paired with an option of protection condition "Force Block 1–3" and
can be used for Blocking / Disabling of protections, however on user defined protections the option causes
protection Blocking instead of Disabling.
6 back to Protections

Fixed protections
Some selected fixed protections has an option to DISABLE the protection.
The setting is done by using the setpoint which is associated to the fixed protection. Each setpoint offers these
options.

Setpoint options
Alarms Fixed Protection States
Enable Protection is enabled
Disable Protection is disabled
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556)
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) Disabling of the protection can be forced by LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557)

Table 5.1 Bus protections

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 187

Mains protections
Fixed Protection
Protection Alarms / Protection name
States
MP Mains Overvoltage L1-N (page
678)
MP Mains Overvoltage L2-N (page
678) FIXED PROTECTIONS
MP Mains Overvoltage L3-N (page STATES 1 (PAGE
Bus <>V Protection 679) 601)
Voltage
(page 299) MP Mains Overvoltage L1-L2 (page FIXED PROTECTIONS
679) STATES 2 (PAGE
MP Mains Overvoltage L2-L3 (page 602)
680)
MP Mains Overvoltage L3-L1 (page
680)
MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
FIXED PROTECTIONS
Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 685)
STATES 1 (PAGE
Protection (page 298) MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
601)
(page 684)
FIXED PROTECTIONS
Bus <>f Protection (page
MP Mains Overfrequency (page 686) STATES 2 (PAGE
302)
602)
Frequency
FIXED PROTECTIONS
Short Circuit (page 278) MPR Short Circuit (page 687) STATES 2 (PAGE
602)
FIXED PROTECTIONS
IDMT Mains Overcurrent
MPR IDMT Mains >A (page 687) STATES 2 (PAGE
Protection (page 293)
602)
FIXED PROTECTIONS
Current Unbalance
MPR Current Unbalance (page 687) STATES 1 (PAGE
Protection (page 295)
601)
FIXED PROTECTIONS
Overload Protection
Power Hst IDMT Overload (page 687) STATES 2 (PAGE
(page 292)
602)
FIXED PROTECTIONS
Vector Shift Protection
Hst Vector Shift (page 676) STATES 2 (PAGE
(page 305)
Others 602)
ROCOF Protection (page
Hst ROCOF (page 676) -
306)

Table 5.2 Mains protections

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 188

Bus protections
Protection Alarms / Protection name Fixed Protection State
MP Mains Overvoltage L1-
N (page 678)
MP Mains Overvoltage L2-
N (page 678)
Bus <>V Protection (page MP Mains Overvoltage L3- FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES
299) N (page 679) 2 (PAGE 602)
Voltage
Note: This protection can not MP Mains Overvoltage L1- FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES
be disabled. L2 (page 679) 3 (PAGE 603)
MP Mains Overvoltage L2-
L3 (page 680)
MP Mains Overvoltage L3-
L1 (page 680)
Bus <>f Protection (page
302) MP Mains Overfrequency FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES
Frequency
Note: This protection can not (page 686) 3 (PAGE 603)
be disabled.

Table 5.3 Bus protections

User protections
Source upon which the protection is configured can be selected. It can be any analog value or binary state.

Source
Analog values Binary states
Analog inputs Binary inputs
Controller, Modules Controller, Modules, Shared I/O
Values Modbus server, Modbus Master
Measured values, Application, PLC, Binary outputs
Shared I/O PLC
Modbus server, Modbus Master Protection states
Statistics LBOs

Configuration of protections in InteliConfig

Control tab → Controller configuration → Protections tab → Analog / Binary protections

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 189

 Select the desired protections to be configured (Analog protections / Binary protections).

Add protection by clicking on the icon

Delete selected protection by clicking on the icon.

Edit selected protection by clicking on the icon.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 190

 Adding analog protection

Selecting the input source see User protections on page 189

Selecting the protection type see Protection types on page 186

Text input for Alarm / History message

Selecting the protection activation see Protection activation on page 187

Selecting the block type see Protection blocking on page 187

Selecting if the occurrence of a protection is recorded every time or only once after a Fault
Reset.

Selecting the evaluation period

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 191

 If Protection State is checked the protection is then shown in the Values in the group User
Protection States.
Selecting the input for limit.
Setpoints must have the correct resolution and dimension as protection source value.
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint
Prefix is added to the name based on protection type / level
Selecting the input for delay.
Setpoints must have the correct resolution 0.1 and dimension [s]
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint
Prefix is added to the name based on protection type / leve

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 192

 Adding binary protection

Selecting the input source see User protections on page 189

Selecting the protection type see Protection types on page 186

Text input for Alarm / History message

Selecting the protection activation see Protection activation on page 187

Selecting the block type see Protection blocking on page 187

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 193

 Selecting if the occurence of a protection is recorded every time or only once after a Fault
Reset.

If Protection State is checked the protection is then shown in setpoints under the group User
setpoints.

Selecting the input for delay.

Setpoints must have the correct resolution 0.1 and dimension [s]
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint

6 back to Protections

Protection states
Protection states is a new feature introduced inInteliMains 510, which helps with better management of alarms.
Until now, you could only use LBO ALARM (PAGE 566) which did not specify what is going on. Protection states
work in similar way, like any other LBO. The difference is, that protection state gets active only when there is
specific alarm present in the alarm list. Thanks to this, you can create PLC logic, which will react to specific
alarms only.

Fixed protection states

Important Fixed protections (page 187) have a protection state. The protection state is (usually) named exactly
as the alarm. Fixed protection states are in a group of 32.
Protection states groups:
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603)

User protections states

During the Configuration of protections in InteliConfig (page 189), you can decide whether you want to add
user protection state for the protection. The name is exactly same as the alarm's message.
When you're adding user protection state, it will try to fill in gaps (if there are any present) in an actual list of User
Protection States (page 604), if there is no gap, it will be automatically added to the end. User protection states
are in a group of 32 with maximally 10 groups i.e. 320 user protection states are available.
Note: Group of User protection states is showed only when there is at least 1 protection state in it.

6 back to Protections

5.4.27 Pulse Counters

InteliMains 510 has 2 "slow" pulse counters which are using LBIs. Value of the each pulse counter is increased
by one step whenever the number of pulses counted reaches the value of setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse.
The "slow" pulse counters are able to count reliably pulses longer than 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 194

 Conversion setpoint Value Binary Input
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page Pulse Counter 1 (page PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE
271) 471) 558)
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page Pulse Counter 2 (page PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE
271) 471) 558)

Note: Value of the internal counters remains even if the controller is unplugged from power.

Note: Counter counts leading edges.

5.4.28 Regulation Loops

Regulation loops overview
Regulation loops overview

Related
Loop type Related setpoints Related Operation
applications
Frequency Gain (page 351) Synchronization
Frequency MCB, MGCB
Frequency Int (page 352) Island
Voltage Gain (page 353) Synchronization
Voltage MCB, MGCB
Voltage Int (page 353) Island
Angle
MCB, MGCB Angle Gain (page 352) Phase Match Synchronization
regulation
Load Gain (page 338)
Load MCB, MGCB Parallel To Mains
Load Int (page 339)
PF Gain (page 345)
PF control MCB, MGCB Parallel To Mains
PF Int (page 346)

Frequency, Load sharing, Load regulation loops have one common output = Loadsharing Output (page 467)
which is sent to controllers trough CAN. The value of this output is always composed from the contribution of
each of the regulation loops.
Voltage, PF, VAr sharing have one common output = Varsharing Output (page 468) which is sent to controllers
trough CAN. The value of this output is always composed from the contribution of each of the regulation loop.
Note: All regulation loops are PID, but only PI components are visible as setpoints.

Loop type Description

The frequency loop is active in the first phase of synchronization when the bus frequency is
Frequency regulated to match the mains frequency and in island operation. The loop is deactivated when
the system start/stop is deactivated.
The voltage loop is active in the first phase of synchronization when the bus voltage is
Voltage
regulated to match the mains voltage and in island operation.
Angle The differential angle control loop is active during the second phase of synchronization to
regulation match the mains/bus angle when phase match synchronization type is used.
Load The load regulation loop is active when the system is running in parallel with mains and during

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 195

 Loop type Description
load transfers from mains to bus or vice versa.
The PF control loop is active when the system is running in parallel with mains and during load
PF control
transfers from mains to bus or vice versa.

Adjustment of regulation loops

The regulation loops have two adjustable factors: P-factor and I-factor (except angle regulation loop, which has
P-factor only). The P-factor (gain) influences the stability and overshoot of the regulation loop and the I-factor
(int) influences the steady-state error as well as the settling time. See the picture below for typical responses of a
PI regulation loop.

Image 5.120 Typical responses of PI regulator

For manual tuning of a control loop use following method:

Set both the I-factor and P-factor to 0.
Increase the P-factor slightly until the system starts to oscillate.
Adjust the P-factor back to approx. one half of the value where the oscillations started.
Increase the I-factor slightly to achieve optimal resulting response.

IMPORTANT: Be ready to press emergency stop button in case the regulation loop would start to
behave unacceptable while it is being adjusted.

5.4.29 Sensor Curves

IMPORTANT: The functionality requires to install and configure extern CAN modules with analog
inputs (Inteli AIO9/1, IS-AIN8).

Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 196

 Curve Min X [Ω] Max X [Ω] Min Y Max Y Units Y
General line 1 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 2 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 3 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 4 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 5 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 6 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 7 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 8 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 9 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 10 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 11 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 12 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 13 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 14 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 15 0 1 0 1 Ω
General line 16 0 1 0 1 Ω

Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. In InteliConfig are also prepared some standard curves.

Sensor curve HW configuration

InteliMains 510 analog inputs allows you to select Input HW type. Three HW configuration options are available:
0-15 kΩ
0-10 V
0-20 mA passive
Setup controller analog input in this way to use other than the default HW configuration (0-15 kΩ):
1. Start with a sensor configuration and select requested HW configuration

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 197

2. Use the adjusted sensor with an analog input and the requested HW configuration will be used with the analog
input automatically. There is no need to use a jumper, configured Input HW type is used by controller
automatically.

5.4.30 Soft unload

This function is designed for systems with multiple InteliMains 510 controller with MGCB application, it means
with multiple load nodes. In situation when more than one load node is supplied from the group of the gen-sets
the soft unload only based on the actual power of the group of gen-sets can not be performed. It is necessary to
know the real value of power flowing through MGCB. InteliMains 510 can measure this value using the auxiliary
measurement. The power is measured on one phase CT transformer connected to the 4th CT meas terminals.
The Aux Current CTs have to be located at the phase L1 for correct calculation of the Aux Power (page 450).
The Aux Current (page 450) measurement settings are done via setpoint Mains CT Ratio Prim (page 261)
and Mains CT Ratio Sec (page 261). The selection of unloading method of MGCB is to be done via setpoint
Soft Unload (page 344).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 198

5.4.31 System Start/Stop
The LBO SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) reflects whether the System (Gen-sets) shall be started or stopped.
There is a LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) that is used to start and stop System remotely in AUT or TEST
mode.
In case of using System Start/Stop functionality with multiple controllers proper configuration of the system is
necessary to ensure correct operation. For the system using just CAN wiring no physical wiring of binary logic is
needed to share the starting and stopping signal into all controllers in the same group. LBI REMOTE START/STOP
(PAGE 560) should be configured in one "master" controller which will be used to control starting and stopping of
other controllers in the group. All controllers with configured LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) will be started
only if their LBI is activated.

5.4.32 User Buttons

User Buttons can be used to assign function of user's choice to button on the internal display or like remote
switch. There are 16 user buttons and the behavior of each of them can be adjusted by it's relative setpoint.
Each setpoint has these options:

Option Description

COMMAND The relative User Button is controlled by command from internal display.
The relative User Button is controlled manually via the setpoint. Value of the user button
MAN OFF
is still 0.
The relative User Button is controlled manually via the setpoint. Value of the user button
is still 1.
MAN ON
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching to
COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button will be 1 until command is received.

Commands
If relative setpoint is set to COMMAND, the User Button will react to commands sent via button from internal
display. Type of command is selected during controller configuration in Screen Editor.
There are following commands:

Command Description
While this command is selected, pressing the button negate the actual value of the user
ON/OFF
button
While this command is selected, pressing the button sets the actual value of the user
ON button to 1.
Note: Will not have any effect if the value is already 1.
While this command is selected, pressing the button sets the actual value of the user
OFF button to 0.
Note: Will not have any effect if the value is already 0.
While this command is selected, pressing the button sets the actual value of the user
Pulse ON button to 1 for 200 ms.
Note: The command reacts only to rising edge of the button.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 199

 See list of MODBUS comands in chapter List of commands and arguments (page 219).

Configuration of user button command

To configure Command on User Button, navigate to Configuration in InteliConfig

Select Screen Editor tab

Select Status bar

Add "Button CMD", for example to position

Select required user button and COMMAND

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 200

5.4.33 User management and data access control
Accessing, monitoring or controlling the device via any communication interface requires a user to be
logged-in.
When a task (read data, write data , control) is to be performed the access level of the user who is
currently logged-in must be higher or equal to the access level required for the particular task.
User must have their user account defined by the administrator of the controller before the user can log-in
into the controller and perform monitoring, control or configuration tasks.
Note: For trusted interfaces there is an "implicit user"(see Implicit account on page 202) automatically
logged in always while no other explicit user is logged in.

Types of interfaces
The controller communication interfaces are split into two categories according to what kind of environment
the interface is exposed to.
Trusted
Trusted interfaces are operated locally inside a closed environment/ infrastructure where additional
measures against misuse or attack take place (e.g. physical access limitation). Due to the nature of
this interface less strict cybersecurity rules may be applied.
Trusted interfaces provide Implicit account (page 202) function which allows the performance of
certain operations without requiring an explicit user to log in.
Trusted interfaces are USB, RS232, RS485.
Untrusted
General-purpose interfaces, which may be exposed to public networks, such as the Internet, are
untrusted. The communication is running through networks which are not under control of the entity
who operates the controller. Thus, strict cybersecurity rules must apply for this type of interface.
Untrusted interface are Ethernet and cellular module.

User accounts
User account must be created in the controller by an administrator before the particular user can login to the
controller.

User account must have the following properties

Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter. This
Username
is the main identifier of the particular user account.
Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter and 1
Password digit. This is the password that is used together with user name to authenticate
(log-in).
Optional 4-digit identification string which can be used for simplified login at
User identifier (UID)
trusted interfaces (e.g. from InteliVision display when connected via Ethernet).
PIN 4-digit “password” to be used together with UID.
Access level Determines Access to controller data (page 205)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 201

 Implicit account
At trusted interfaces there is an implicit user automatically logged-in at any time if no other explicit user is
logged-in at the respective interface. This allows terminal devices (e.g. internal display) to show controller
values even without the need for a specific person to be logged-in.
The implicit account is fixedly defined in the firmware.
The implicit account has fixed access level 0, unless production mode is activated (see Production
mode on page 202).
Implicit user is logged in any time no other user is logged in at the respective interface.

User login
To login to the controller the username and password must be provided into the login form of the
application (InteliConfig (page 19), WebSupervisor (page 19).
Alternatively, at trusted interfaces, it is possible to login using UID and PIN instead of username and
password. This method of login is designed to simplify the login procedure at devices without alphanumeric
keyboard (e.g. InteliVision).
Note: The controller is featured with a protection against brute force attack to user account credentials. For
details see Account break protection on page 205.

Changing password and PIN

The password and/or PIN for currently logged user can be changed. The user must be logged with username
and password even if PIN has to be changed.

Production mode
Production mode is used to simplify working with the controller while manufacturing, putting into operation or
service works.
In production mode the Implicit account (page 202) has access level adjusted to administrator level.
Thus, in production mode at trusted interfaces (like USB) the operator is allowed to perform any operation
which normally requires administrator to log in without the need of logging in.
IMPORTANT: Production mode is intended only for the manufacturing and/or service purposes
while the controller is in the respective facility and must be turned off before the controller is put
into regular operation.

There is active alarm Wrn Production Mode (page 664) in the alarm list any time production mode is active.
To turn off the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or go
to Production Mode display screen and select disable.

Factory default accounts

Each controller comes from the production with one factory default administrator account having following
credentials:
Username: "administrator"
Password: <serial number of the controller>
Example: 12345678

User ID: "0001"

User PIN: "0000"

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 202

 When the controller is being configured for operation the desired user accounts including the administrator
account should be created and then the factory default account can be deleted.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the backup e-mail address before you delete the default administrator
account. This address is used as second authentication factor in password reset request and the
password reset action code will be sent to this and only this e-mail address.

Note: There must always remain at least one administrator account in the system. The controller will not
allow deleting last administrator account.

Wrn Default Password appears in Alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller might
be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is default
administrator password.

Reset accounts to factory default

If credentials (username and/or password) for administrator account are lost, it is possible to reset all user
accounts to the factory default state. For more information see Resetting the administrator password on
page 1.
After reset procedure user accounts are in factory default state.
Wrn Default Password appears in Alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of the alarm is to inform that the controller
might be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is
default administrator password.

Managing accounts
User accounts can be managed from InteliConfig while an online connection to the controller is established. A
user with administrator level must be logged with username/password and is prompted to re-enter accounts
password before the user management dialog is opened.
IMPORTANT: The total available number of accounts in the controller is 10.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 203

 Adding an account
Click on the "+" button in the lower left corner of the user management window, then provide the account
properties as described in User accounts (page 201).
Note: Rules for the User accounts (page 201) credentials apply and some items are optional

Deleting an account
Select the account that has to be deleted and click on the "-" button in the lower left part of the user
management window.
Note: You can not delete your own administrator account unless there is another administrator account
present in the controller.

Changing account properties

Select the account that needs to be deleted and click on the "pencil" button in the lower left part of the user
management window. Then modify the desired property or properties. You can modify one or more properties
at once.

Note: It is not possible to change user name or UID. Instead of this create a new account with the required
changes and delete the original one.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 204

 Account break protection
The controller protects the user accounts against a brute-force attack, i.e against breaking into the controller
by fast repeating attempts to login with credentials generated from the range of all possible combinations.
If the account break protection detects a possible attack and blocks an account or interface the alarm Wrn
Brute Force Protection Active (page 638) is activated. The alarm can be used to send an active message
(e.g. e-mail) to inform about that situation The exact behavior of the controller depends on the situation.

Password protection
1. If a user performs five consecutive attempts to login using username/password, providing correct
username but incorrect password, the respective user account is blocked for a time period of 1 minute.
The attempts count regardless of the interface from which it is performed.
2. During the blocking period it is not possible to login with the respective account (username) from any
interface even if the correct password is provided.
3. After the blocking period elapses, another attempt to login with the respective account (username) is
possible. If this attempt fails again the account is blocked again, now for period of 2 minutes.
4. The points repeats 1-3 times further, the duration of the blocking period is multiplied by 2 in each
consequential cycle. However, the maximal blocking time is 20 minutes, the blocking time is never higher.

PIN protection
If a user performs ten consecutive attempts to login using UID/PIN, providing correct UID but incorrect
PIN, the user account is permanently blocked for login using this UID/PIN. The user must login with
username/password and change the PIN to unblock this login method again.

Interface protection
If anyone performs twenty consecutive attempts to login via one particular interface and does not provide
either a valid username nor a valid uid the respective interface is blocked for 2 minutes.
During this period it is not possible to use that interface for any login. The blocking period is not progressive in
this case.

Access to controller data

Every request for reading data from the controller or writing data into it requires a user to be logged. This
user must have an access level higher or equal to the access level defined for the particular object
and operation.
There are 4 access levels available (level 0 to level 3). Level 3 is administrator level and users who have
this level have full control over the controller.

Reading data
The access level required for reading data from controller is fixedly adjusted to 0. That means reading of
data (except some system objects) is available for any user.

Writing data
The access level required to write (modify) application setpoints or invoke application commands is
configurable via InteliConfig.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 205

 Special situations
There are several operations that require administrator level:
Programming firmware
Programming configuration
Managing user accounts

5.4.34 User Setpoints

Controller allows user to create their own setpoints, edit and delete the created setpoints and choose a group in
which the setpoint will be located. Number of setpoints created by user is limited to 2047. All setpoints created by
user are located in setpoint group "User setpoints". The Comm. object number (CO) can be found via InteliConfig
(Tools tab → Generate Cfg image (COM)). User setpoints can be used to manage User protections and PLC.

Add User setpoint

Delete selected User setpoint

Edit selected User setpoint

Image 5.121 User setpoints tab in InteliConfig

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 206

 Image 5.122 Setting parameters of an user setpoint

Contents of the user setpoint

Max. 32 characters
Name Note: Does not consider duplicities (It is possible to have setpoints with the same
name, but it is not recommended.)
Can be chosen from a list or
Dimension
User can create their own with a limit of 32 characters.
Resolution Max. 4 decimal place
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
Low Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Max. value cannot exceed High Limit.
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
High Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Min. value cannot be lower than Low Limit.
Default value Must be in range between Low and High Limit (restricted by resolution).
Group Group in which setpoint will be shown.
Subgroup SubGroup in which setpoint will be shown.

Available groups and subgroups

The user setpoint can be put into some selected groups and subgroups.
Note: Setpoint is always added as last in selected subgroup.
List of available groups and it's subgroups:
Group Subgroup
Process control User setpoints
Basic Settings User setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 207

 Protections User setpoints
Power Management User setpoints
User setpoints User setpoints

5.4.35 Voltage Phase Sequence Detection

Controller detects phase sequence on both voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller
installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection. The phase sequence is adjusted via setpoint Phase
Rotation (page 266).
6 back to General Functions

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 208

6 Communication
6.1 PC 209
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 213

6 back to Table of contents

6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 209
6.1.2 Remote communication 211

6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.

Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 55.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 391) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.

Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used

Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485

Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.
If you use CM-RS232-485 module, make sure the module is correctly inserted and COM2 Mode (page 393)
setpoint is set to the option Direct. To find more information about installation of the modules see Plug-in
module installation on page 55.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 209

 Image 6.3 Built-in RS485 is used

Image 6.4 RS485 and USB is used

Connection via Ethernet

There are two options how to connect PC tool (InteliConfig, Winscope1000, etc.) to the controller via
Ethernet.
Onboard Ethernet interface
Plug-in communication module CM3-Ethernet interface (see Plug-in module installation on page 55).
Onboard Ethernet offers 6 clients to be connected at the same time by direct IP or AirGate.
CM3-Ethernet offers 6 clients to be connected at the same time by direct IP or AirGate.
The controller considers both interfaces as untrusted therefore correct userID and PIN or username and
password has to be filled in.

Image 6.5 Ethernet cable is used

Image 6.6 Onboard Ethernet cable is used

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 210

 Connection via USB
USB interface uses HID profile.

Image 6.7 Shielded USB type A cable is used

6 back to Communication

6.1.2 Remote communication

Ethernet LAN connection
Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the onboard ethernet or CM3-Ethernet module is reachable
from the client computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the onboard ethernet or CM3-Ethernet must
have static IP address in the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet try
using AirGate connection instead.

Image 6.8 Ethernet LAN connection

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 211

 Onboard Ethernet setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint group Ethernet.
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a group Ethernet.

CM3-Ethernet module setup

All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint group CM-Ethernet.
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a group CM-
Ethernet.

Setting-up static IP address

This settings is related to Group: Ethernet (page 377).
There are two basic ways how to setup static IP address for remote ethernet connection. The first way is to
switch the Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode to Manual option. In this
moment values for related Ethernet port are immediately changed to the default or previously setup values of
setpoints IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, DNS IP, etc. If you are using this Ethernet port for
connection to the controller you will lost the connection.
If this method is used several basic rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the remaining network
infrastructure:
The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which the
controller is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.

The second way is to switch the Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode to
Manual option. In this moment values for related Ethernet port are immediately changed to values given by
the DHCP server for the LAN. If you are using this Ethernet port for connection to the controller you will lost
the connection. It is possible to configure the DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static
IP address) to the particular controller according to it's MAC address.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 212

 Internet WAN connection
WAN connection is intended to be used to connect the controller using the internet. It is recommended to use
Ethernet 2 (untrusted interface) for remote connection using internet.

Image 6.9 Ethernet WAN connection

Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If the controller is connected to Internet via a local ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding must
be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of the controller at the
port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple port forwarding rules
in the same local network.
6 back to Communication

6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 SNMP 213
6.2.2 Modbus-RTU, Modbus/TCP 214

6 back to Communication

6.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a "SNMP Agent" while the supervisory system
plays the role of a "SNMP Manager".
Supported versions – SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 383). The setpoints SNMP
RD Community String (page 423) and SNMP WR Community String (page 424) in the same group can
be used to customize the "community strings" for the read and write operations which have function like
"passwords". All requests sent from the SNMP Manager have to contain community string which match with
the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller refuses the operation.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 213

 MIB table
The "MIB table" (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager description of all
objects provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using InteliConfig
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration share also identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root node of the MIB table of InteliLite controller is enterprises.comapProjekt.il, which is
1.3.6.1.4.1.28634.14. Under this node there are following sub-nodes :
Notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may
send to the Manager.
GroupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupW contains write-only objects.
NotificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.

SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and SMI version that it does support.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may be also used for
SNMP v1.

SNMP reserved objects

Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32 Reading: command return
value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code 1)
pfPassword groupW.24524 write Integer32 Password

1) For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the
description of the MODBUS protocol.

6.2.2 Modbus-RTU, Modbus/TCP

Modbus protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 214

 Modbus-RTU can be used via Terminal Diagram (page 33) . The serial speed for Modbus-
RTU communication is adjusted by the setpoint RS485 Modbus Speed (page 274) and the serial mode
is adjusted by the setpoint RS485 Modbus Mode (page 273). Only 1 client can be connected at once
through this type of connection.
Modbus/TCP (Modbus server) can be used with the Ethernet (page 17). Up to 2 clients can be connected
simultaneously through each Ethernet port. The Modbus Server must be activated by the appropriate
setpoint Modbus Server related to the respective Ethernet interface. Timeout after which controller would
terminate an inactive connection (when client is not sending any requests) is set by setpoint ComAp
Client Inactivity Timeout (page 421).
Note: The IP address of each device in the same network must vary.

Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual
mapping of specific controller data objects to specific Modbus addresses, which depends on configuration,
can be exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several
special registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.

Modbus MODICON object

Meaning Access Modbus function
address type
0000 .. Binary
Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
0999 objects
1000 ..
Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
2999
3000 .. Read: 03, 04
Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
3999 Write: 06, 16
4200 .. Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
7167 registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16

Configurable part of the map

The contents of the configurable part of the map is specified in the configuration table. It can be changed by
the customer as well as exported in a human-readable format using the configuration tool.

Discrete inputs
The discrete inputs are read-only objects located in the address range 0-999. The source ComAp objects for
discrete inputs can be:
Single bit of any value of any binary type.
Protection (e.g. 2nd-level protection of the state "xyz"). The input is high if the protection is active
regardless of if it is configured or not.

Input registers
The input registers are read-only numeric values located in the address range 1000-2999. The source
ComAp objects can be:
Any controller value of any data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is described in
Mapping data types to registers (page 216).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 215

 Holding registers
The holding registers are read-write numeric values located in the address range 3000-3999. The source
ComAp objects can be:
Any controller setpoint of a primitive data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is
described in Mapping data types to registers (page 216).
Note: Setpoint must be configured with access level 0 to allow writing it via MODBUS.

Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
Integer16 2-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
Unsigned16 2-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Integer32 4-byte signed integer 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Unsigned32 4-byte unsigned integer 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB = value, bits 8-15
Binary16 16-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
Binary32 32-bit binary value 2
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 216

 Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…
*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red)
**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8

Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfuly.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 217

 02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem
can be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.

Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 text data provided by Modbus (e.g.
alarmlist messages).
Last application error. To be read after
the device returns the exception code
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32
04. It contains specific information about
the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
Reading: Number of items in the
Alarmlist
4214 1 read/write Unsigned8
Writing: Required record format, 0 = text
(default), 1 = binary
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
4242 - 4268 27 read Alarm 2. record in alarm list
4269 - 4295 27 read Alarm 3. record in alarm list
4296 - 4322 27 read Alarm 4. record in alarm list
4323 - 4349 27 read Alarm 5. record in alarm list
4350 - 4376 27 read Alarm 6. record in alarm list
4377 - 4403 27 read Alarm 7. record in alarm list
4404 - 4430 27 read Alarm 8. record in alarm list
4431 - 4457 27 read Alarm 9. record in alarm list
4458 - 4484 27 read Alarm 10. record in alarm list
4485 - 4511 27 read Alarm 11. record in alarm list

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 218

 Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4512 - 4538 27 read Alarm 12. record in alarm list
4539 - 4565 27 read Alarm 13. record in alarm list
4566 - 4592 27 read Alarm 14. record in alarm list
4593 - 4619 27 read Alarm 15. record in alarm list
4620 - 4646 27 read Alarm 16. record in alarm list
Remote start/Stop: Suplements the set
of starting requests in AUTO mode (e.g.
Remote Start/Stop, AMF Start, Peak
4700 1 write Bool Shaving). Set the coil to log1 to start the
System, set the coil to log0 to stop the
System. There are no conditions in
relation to user access settings.

List of commands and arguments

IMPORTANT: Only commands configured with access level 0 can be invoked via Modbus.

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via Modbus is as follows:
1. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use
function 16.
2. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
3. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-
4208). Use function 3.
4. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the
specific situation etc.)

Command code Action Argument

MCB toggle* 0x12ED 0000
Breaker cmd
MCB on 0x12EE 0000
0x02
MCB off 0x12EF 0000
OFF Mode 0x0000 0000
Mode cmd MAN Mode 0x0001 0000
0x03 AUTO Mode 0x0003 0000
TEST Mode 0x0004 0000
Access lock Remove Access lock 0x0010 0000
0x197 Set Access lock 0x0020 0000

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 219

 User Button 1: Pulse 0x000A 0000
User Button 1: ON/OFF 0x000B 0000
User Button 1: ON 0x000C 0000
User Button 1: OFF 0x000D 0000
User Button 2: Pulse 0x0014 0000
User Button 2: ON/OFF 0x0015 0000
User Button 2: ON 0x0016 0000
User Button 2: OFF 0x0017 0000
User Button 3: Pulse 0x001E 0000
User Button 3: ON/OFF 0x001F 0000
User Button 3: ON 0x0020 0000
User Button 3: OFF 0x0021 0000
User Button 4: Pulse 0x0028 0000
User Button 4: ON/OFF 0x0029 0000
User Button 4: ON 0x002A 0000
User Buttons 1 .. 8 User Button 4: OFF 0x002B 0000
0x0047 User Button 5: Pulse 0x0032 0000
User Button 5: ON/OFF 0x0033 0000
User Button 5: ON 0x0034 0000
User Button 5: OFF 0x0035 0000
User Button 6: Pulse 0x003C 0000
User Butto 6: ON/OFF 0x003D 0000
User Button 6: ON 0x003E 0000
User Button 6: OFF 0x003F 0000
User Button 7: Pulse 0x0046 0000
User Button 7: ON/OFF 0x0047 0000
User Button 7: ON 0x0048 0000
User Button 7: OFF 0x0049 0000
User Button 8: Pulse 0x0050 0000
User Button 8: ON/OFF 0x0051 0000
User Button 8: ON 0x0052 0000
User Button 8: OFF 0x0053 0000

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 220

 User Button 9: Pulse 0x005A 0000
User Button 9: ON/OFF 0x005B 0000
User Button 9: ON 0x005C 0000
User Button 9: OFF 0x005D 0000
User Button 10: Pulse 0x0064 0000
User Button 10: ON/OFF 0x0065 0000
User Button 10: ON 0x0066 0000
User Button 10: OFF 0x0067 0000
User Button 11: Pulse 0x006E 0000
User Button 11: ON/OFF 0x006F 0000
User Button 11: ON 0x0070 0000
User Button 11: OFF 0x0071 0000
User Button 12: Pulse 0x0078 0000
User Button 12: ON/OFF 0x0079 0000
User Button 12: ON 0x007A 0000
User Buttons 9 .. 16 User Button 12: OFF 0x007B 0000
0x0048 User Button 13: Pulse 0x0082 0000
User Button 13: ON/OFF 0x0083 0000
User Button 13: ON 0x0084 0000
User Button 13: OFF 0x0085 0000
User Button 14: Pulse 0x008C 0000
User Butto 14: ON/OFF 0x008D 0000
User Button 14: ON 0x008E 0000
User Button 14: OFF 0x008F 0000
User Button 15: Pulse 0x0096 0000
User Button 15: ON/OFF 0x0097 0000
User Button 15: ON 0x0098 0000
User Button 15: OFF 0x0099 0000
User Button 16: Pulse 0x00A0 0000
User Button 16: ON/OFF 0x00A1 0000
User Button 16: ON 0x00A2 0000
User Button 16: OFF 0x00A3 0000

* This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 221

 Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
BatteryVoltag Controller
01036 8213 V Integer 2 1 0 400
e I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register
address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex
1053dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex 00F0hex CRC
2 bytes read 240dec

We read value 240 from register 01036. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 222

 Reading Nominal power
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Nominal
Basic
01228 9018 Mains kW Integer 2 0 0 32767
Settings
Import

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 04CChex Number of registers CRC
1228dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex 00C8hex CRC
2 bytes read 200dec

Read nominal power is 200 kW.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 223

 Reading all binary inputs as modbus register

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Binary Controller
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - -
Inputs I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 042Chex Number of registers CRC
1068dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
Controller
Modbus function 02hex 0012hex CRC
address
2 bytes read 00010010bin

Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use Modbus function 4 instead of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 224

 Reading specific binary inputs

Table: Binaries
Allowed MODBUS functions: 01, 02
Addresses Source Name of Bit Name
C.O.#
Modbus Addr. = Value Value Bit # Activated by protection Group
State #
Prot. Addr. = State Name of State (s):
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 0 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 Remote Start/Stop Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 Remote TESTCU-BIN-3 Controller I/O

We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register
address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
0001hex
0001dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 01hex 01hex CRC
1 byte read active

The readed data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use Modbus function 2 instead of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 225

 Nominal Power – writing

Table: Setpoints
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register
Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Data
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 0064hex = CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
100dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec

Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
16 15 2
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x +x +x +1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex
6 back to Connection to 3rd party systems

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 226

7 Technical data
Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 5W
RTC battery Replaceable (3 V)
Fusing power 5 A / 6 × 0.5 A BOUT
Max. Power Dissipation 7W

Operating conditions
Operating temperature -20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C
95 % non-condensing
Operating humidity (norm 60068-2-30)
(EN 60068-2-30)
Protection degree IP65
5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g
2
Shocks a = 500 m/s
Surrounding air temperature rating 70 °C.
Suitable for pollution degree 2.

Current measurement
Measurement inputs 3ph Mains/Bus-L, 1ph Aux
Measurement range 5A
Maximum continuous current 10 A
Accuracy ±20 mA for 0-2 A; 1 % of value for 2-5 A
Input impedance <0.1 Ω

Voltage measurement
3ph-n Mains/Bus-L,
Measurement inputs
3ph-n Bus/Bus-R
10-277 V AC / 10-480 V AC (EU)
Measurement range (L-N / L-L)
10-346 V AC / 10-600 V AC (US/Canada)
Linear measurement and protection
350 V AC Ph-N; 660 V AC Ph-Ph
range
Accuracy 1%
Frequency range 30-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)
Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n

Display
Type Build-in colour TFT 5"
Resolution 800 × 480 px

Binary inputs
Number 8, non-isolated
Close/Open 0-2 V DC close contact
indication 6-36 V DC open contact

Binary outputs
Number 8, non-isolated
Max. current BO 1-8 = 0.5 A
Switching to Positive supply terminal

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 227

 Communications
USB Device Non-isolated type B connector
USB Host Non-isolated type A connector
RS 485 Isolated
ETH 10/100 Mbit
CAN 1 Isolated, 250 / 50 kbps,
CAN 2 Nominal impedance 120 Ω

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 228

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 229
8.2 Alarms 633
8.3 Modules 688

6 back to Table of contents

8.1 Controller objects

8.1.1 List of controller objects types
8.1.2 Setpoints 230
8.1.3 Values 434
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 534
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 564
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 593
8.1.7 Application Curves 599
8.1.8 Fixed Protection States 600
8.1.9 User Protection States 604
8.1.10 PLC 607

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 229

8.1.2 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated
writing of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in FRAM memory, which is
14
designed to withstand up to 10 read/write cycles without risk of damage or data loss, but it may
become damaged, when the allowed number of reading/writing cycles is exceeded.

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 231).

List of group of setpoints

Group: Process Control 237
Group: Basic settings 257
Group: Communication Settings 272
Group: Mains Settings 274
Group: Protections 292
Group: Generator settings 307
Group: Load Shedding 311
Group: Power Management 315
Group: Load Control 338
Group: PF Control 345
Group: Synchronization 347
Group: User Buttons 354
Group: Scheduler 362
Group: Plug-In Modules 376
Group: Ethernet 377
Group: CM-RS232-485 391
Group: CM-4G-GPS 395
Group: CM-Ethernet 414

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 230

 List of setpoints

Group: Process Control 237 Attempts To Close Breaker 255

Subgroup: Application Selector 237 Delay Between Closing Attempts 256
Application Mode Select 237 Subgroup: Controller Redundancy 257
Subgroup: Load Control 238 Watched Controller 257
Load Request Source 238 Group: Basic settings 257
#System Load Control PTM 239 Subgroup: Name 257
Load Control PTM Mode 240 Controller Name 257
Import/Export Limitation 241 Subgroup: Power settings 258
#System Baseload 241 Nominal DC Shore Power 258
Import Load 242 Subgroup: Current settings 258
Subgroup: PF/Q Control 243 Nominal Current 258
PF/Q Request Source 243 Mains CT Ratio Prim 259
#System PF Control PTM 244 Mains CT Ratio Sec 259
PF/Q Control PTM Mode 244 Aux Current Ratio Prim 260
PF/Q Regulation Type 245 Aux Current Ratio Sec 260
#System Power Factor 245 Mains CT Ratio Prim 261
#System Base Q 246 Mains CT Ratio Sec 261
Import Power Factor 247 Subgroup: Voltage settings 261
Import Q 247 Connection type 261
Subgroup: Mains Coupling 248 Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N 263
Mains Coupling 248 Gen Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 263
Subgroup: Process Limitation 248 MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N 263
CB Control In MAN Mode 248 Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains
Subgroup: Mains Import Measurement 250 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 264

Mains Measurement P 250 Mains VT Ratio 264

Mains Measurement Q 251 Bus VT Ratio 264

Subgroup: Peak Shaving 251 Bus Dead Level 265

Peak Shaving 251 Subgroup: Phase Rotation 266

Peak Shaving Start Level 252 Phase Rotation 266

Peak Shaving Stop Level 252 Subgroup: Frequency settings 266

Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay 253 Nominal Frequency 266

Subgroup: Breaker Control Mode 253 Subgroup: Controller settings 267

MCB Control Mode 253 Controller mode 267

GCB Control Mode 254 Power On Mode 267

MGCB Parallel Close 254 Backlight Timeout 268

Multi Soft Start 255 Horn Timeout 268

Fail Safe Binary State 269

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 231

 User Logging Record 269 Mains Voltage Unbalance 284
Subgroup: Battery Protections 270 Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay 284
Battery Undervoltage 270 Subgroup: Mains Frequency Protection 285
Battery Overvoltage 270 Mains Overfrequency 285
Battery Under And Overvoltage Delay 270 Mains Overfrequency Hys 285
Subgroup: Pulse counters 271 Mains Underfrequency 285
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 271 Mains Underfrequency Hys 286
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 271 Mains <>f Delay 286
Group: Communication Settings 272 Subgroup: AMF Timers 286
Subgroup: Controller Address 272 AMF Start 286
CAN Controller Address 272 Emergency Start Delay 287
Subgroup: RS485 Settings 272 Mains Return Delay 287
RS485 Mode 272 MCB Close Delay 288
RS485 Communication Speed 273 Subgroup: AMF Settings 288
RS485 Modbus Mode 273 Return From Island 288
RS485 Modbus Speed 274 Return to Mains in TEST Mode 289
Subgroup: Intercontroller Settings 274 MCB Logic 289
CAN Intercontroller Empty Check 274 MCB Opens On 290
Group: Mains Settings 274 Subgroup: Loss of Mains Protections 291
Subgroup: Overload Protection 274 Vector Shift Limit 291
Overload MPR 274 ROCOF Windows Length 291
Overload Wrn 276 ROCOF df/dt 292
Overload Delay 276 Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector 292
Subgroup: Underload Protection 277 Group: Protections 292
Minimal Power PTM 277 Subgroup: Overload Protection 292
Minimal Power PTM Protection Del 278 Overload Protection 292
Subgroup: Current Protection 278 Subgroup: Current Protection 293
Short Circuit 278 IDMT Mains Overcurrent Protection 293
Short Circuit Delay 278 Current Unbalance Protection 295
IDMT Mains Overcurrent Delay 279 Short Circuit Protection 296
Current Unbalance 280 Subgroup: Voltage Protection 296
Current Unbalance Delay 280 Mains <>V Protection 296
Subgroup: Mains Voltage Protections 281 Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection 298
Mains Overvoltage 281 Bus <>V Protection 299
Mains Overvoltage Delay 281 Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection 299
Mains Overvoltage Hys 282 Subgroup: Frequency Protection 301
Mains Undervoltage 282 Mains <>f Protection 301
Mains Undervoltage Delay 283 Bus <>f Protection 302
Mains Undervoltage Hys 283 Subgroup: Minimal Power PTM Protection 303

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 232

 Minimal Power PTM Protection 303 #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 321
Subgroup: Bus Meas Error Protection 304 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 2 322
Bus Meas Error Protection 304 #Starting Load Reserve 2 322
Subgroup: Loss of Mains Protections 305 #Stopping Load Reserve 2 323
Vector Shift Protection 305 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 324
ROCOF Protection 306 #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 324
Subgroup: Phase Rotation Protection 306 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 3 325
Phase Rotation Protection 306 #Starting Load Reserve 3 325
Group: Generator settings 307 #Stopping Load Reserve 3 326
Subgroup: Bus Voltage Protection 307 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 3 327
Bus Undervoltage 307 #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 3 327
Bus Overvoltage 307 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 4 328
Bus <>V Delay 308 #Starting Load Reserve 4 328
Bus V Unbalance 308 #Stopping Load Reserve 4 329
Bus V Unbalance Delay 308 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 4 330
Subgroup: Bus Frequency Protection 309 #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 4 330
Bus Overfrequency 309 Subgroup: Minimal Running Power 331
Bus Underfrequency 309 #Min Run Power 1 331
Bus <>f Delay 310 #Min Run Power 2 331
Group: Load Shedding 311 #Min Run Power 3 332
Subgroup: Load Shedding 311 Subgroup: Start/Stop Timing 332
Load Shedding Active 311 #Next Engine Start Delay 332
Load Shedding Based On 312 #Next Engine Stop Delay 333
Load Shedding Level 312 Subgroup: Slow Stop Protection 333
Load Shedding Delay 313 #Slow Stop Delay 333
Load Reconnection Level 313 Subgroup: Over Load Next Start Protection 334
Load Reconnection Delay 313 #Overload Next Start Protection 334
Auto Load Reconnection 314 #Overload Next Start Level 334
Group: Power Management 315 #Overload Next Start Delay 335
Subgroup: Power Management Control 315 Subgroup: Run Hours Equalization 335
#Power Management Mode 315 #Run Hours Max Difference 335
#Priority Auto Swap 316 Subgroup: Efficient Mode 336
#System Start Delay 317 #Power Band Change Up Delay 336
#System Stop Delay 317 #Power Band Change Down Delay 336
Dynamic Spinning Reserve 318 Subgroup: Group Settings 337
Ignore Load Reserve For Island 318 Control Group 337
Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 1 319 Group Link L 337
#Starting Load Reserve 1 319 Group Link R 338
#Stopping Load Reserve 1 320
Group: Load Control 338
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 321

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 233

 Subgroup: Regulation Loops 338 User Button 3 355
Load Gain 338 User Button 4 355
Load Int 339 User Button 5 356
Subgroup: Load Transfer 339 User Button 6 356
Close Transfer Max Duration 339 User Button 7 357
Open Transfer Min Break 339 User Button 8 357
Transfer Mains To Gen 340 User Button 9 358
Transfer Gen To Mains 341 User Button 10 358
Generator Unload MGCB Open Level 342 User Button 12 359
Mains Unload MCB Open Window 342 User Button 13 360
Load Ramp 343 User Button 14 360
Soft Unload Ramp 343 User Button 15 361
Soft Unload 344 User Button 16 361
Group: PF Control 345 Group: Scheduler 362
Subgroup: Regulation Loops 345 Subgroup: Time & Date 362
PF Gain 345 Time 362
PF Int 346 Date 362
Group: Synchronization 347 Time Stamp Period 362
Subgroup: Synchronization 347 Time Zone 363
Synchronization Type 347 DST Switching Mode 363
Synchronization Timeout 348 Time Mode 364
Voltage Window 348 DST Period Rule 364
Phase Window 349 Subgroup: Timer 1 365
Bus to Mains Phase Shift 349 Timer 1 Function 365
Dwell Time 349 Timer 1 Setup 366
Slip Frequency 350 Subgroup: Timer 2 367
Slip Frequency Window 350 Timer 2 Function 367
MGCB Latency 350 Timer 2 Setup 368
MCB Latency 351 Subgroup: Timer 3 369
Subgroup: Frequency Regulation Loop 351 Timer 3 Function 369
Frequency Gain 351 Timer 3 Setup 370
Frequency Int 352 Subgroup: Timer 4 371
Angle Gain 352 Timer 4 Function 371
Subgroup: Voltage Regulation Loop 353 Timer 4 Setup 372
Voltage Gain 353 Subgroup: Timer 5 373
Voltage Int 353 Timer 5 Function 373
Group: User Buttons 354 Timer 5 Setup 374
Subgroup: User Buttons 354 Subgroup: Timer 6 375
User Button 1 354 Timer 6 Function 375
User Button 2 354

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 234

 Timer 6 Setup 376 MPR Message 389
Group: Plug-In Modules 376 Stp Message 389
Subgroup: Slot A 376 Wrn Message 389
Slot A 376 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization 390
Subgroup: Slot B 376 NTP Clock Synchronization 390
Slot B 376 NTP Server 390
Group: Ethernet 377 Time Zone 391
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 377 Group: CM-RS232-485 391
IP Address Mode 377 Subgroup: COM1 Setting 391
DNS Mode 378 COM1 Mode 391
IP Firewall 378 COM1 Communication Speed 392
Subgroup: AirGate Settings 379 COM1 Modbus Mode 392
AirGate Connection 379 COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed 393
AirGate Address 379 Subgroup: COM2 Setting 393
AirGate Port 380 COM2 Mode 393
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 380 COM2 Communication Speed 393
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 380 COM2 Modbus Mode 394
Direct Connection 381 COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed 394
Direct Connection Port 381 Group: CM-4G-GPS 395
Subgroup: Modbus Server Settings 382 Subgroup: Cellular Interface 395
Modbus Server 382 Internet Connection 395
Modbus Client Inactivity Timeout 382 Network Mode 395
Subgroup: SNMP Settings 383 Access Point Name 395
SNMP Agent 383 Connection Check IP1 396
SNMP Traps IP Address 1 383 Connection Check IP2 397
SNMP Traps IP Address 2 384 Connection Check IP3 398
Subgroup: E-mail Settings 384 Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 399
SMTP Server Address 384 DNS Mode 399
SMTP Sender Address 385 DNS IP Address 1 399
SMTP User Name 385 DNS IP Address 2 400
SMTP User Password 386 IP Firewall 400
SMTP Encryption 386 Subgroup: AirGate Settings 401
E-mail Address 1 387 AirGate Connection 401
E-mail Address 2 387 AirGate Address 401
E-mail Address 3 387 Airgate Port 402
E-mail Address 4 388 Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 402
Subgroup: Messages Settings 388 Direct Connection 402
E-mail/SMS Language 388 Direct Connection Port 403
Event Message 388 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 403

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 235

 Subgroup: E-mail Settings 404 AirGate Port 419
SMTP Server Address 404 Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 420
SMTP Sender Address 404 Direct Connection 420
SMTP User Name 405 Direct Connection Port 420
SMTP User Password 405 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 421
SMTP Encryption 406 Subgroup: MODBUS Settings 421
E-mail Address 1 406 MODBUS Server 421
E-mail Address 2 407 MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout 422
E-mail Address 3 407 Subgroup: SNMP Settings 422
E-mail Address 4 407 SNMP Agent 422
Subgroup: Messages Settings 408 SNMP Trap Format 422
Telephone Number 1 408 SNMP Traps IP Address 1 423
Telephone Number 2 408 SNMP Traps IP Address 2 423
Telephone Number 3 409 SNMP RD Community String 423
Telephone Number 4 409 SNMP WR Community String 424
E-mail/SMS Language 410 Subgroup: E-mail Settings 424
Event Message 410 SMTP Server Address 424
MPR Message 410 SMTP Sender Address 425
Wrn Message 411 SMTP User Name 425
Subgroup: GPS Settings 411 SMTP User Password 426
GPS Tracking 411 SMTP Encryption 426
Subgroup: RTC Synchronization 412 E-mail Address 1 427
NTP Clock Sync 412 E-mail Address 2 427
NTP Server 412 E-mail Address 3 427
GPS Clock Sync 413 E-mail Address 4 428
Time Zone 413 Subgroup: Messages Settings 428
Group: CM-Ethernet 414 Telephone Number 1 428
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 414 Telephone Number 2 429
IP Address Mode 414 Telephone Number 3 429
IP Address 415 Telephone Number 4 430
Subnet Mask 415 E-mail/SMS Language 430
Gateway IP 416 Event Message 431
DNS Mode 416 MPR Message 431
DNS IP Address 1 417 Wrn Message 431
DNS IP Address 2 417 NTP Server 432
IP Firewall 418 NTP Clock Synchronization 432
Subgroup: AirGate Settings 418 NTP Server 432
AirGate Connection 418 Time Zone 433
AirGate Address 419 6 back to Controller objects

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 236

 Group: Process Control

Subgroup: Application Selector

Application Mode Select

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] MCB / MGCB [-]
Default value MCB Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 12157 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects default controller's application mode while any application LBI is not activated.
Current controller's application mode is stored in value Application Mode (page 472).
IMPORTANT: Controller Mode (page 472) has to be OFF, otherwise controller application
can not be changed.

Application without master generator circuit breaker (MGCB). The controller controls only
MCB
one breaker - a mains circuit breaker (MCB). Feedback from MCB is required.
Application with master generator circuit breaker (MGCB). The controller controls two
MGCB
breakers - MCB and MGCB. Feedbacks from both breakers are required.

Note: The controller also controls the NCB, check the chapter Breaker Control (page 104) for more
information about breakers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 237

 Subgroup: Load Control

Load Request Source

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Setpoint / Analog External Value [-]
Default value Setpoint Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20727 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts source type of requested load control.

Load Control PTM

Load Request Source Source
Mode (page 240)
Baseload #System Baseload (page 241)
Setpoint
Imp/Exp Import Load (page 242)
LOAD CONTROL: ANEXT BASELOAD (PAGE
Baseload
596)
Analog External Value
LOAD CONTROL: ANEXT IMP/EXP LOAD
Imp/Exp
(PAGE 597)
See Load control (page 145) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 238

 #System Load Control PTM

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Baseload / Load Shar [-]
Default value Baseload Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8774 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Load control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole controller group.

The total power of the group is controlled to constant level given by the setpoint
#System Baseload (page 241). Each loaded unit takes equal part (relative to
their nominal power) from this requested value. The load is regulated locally in
Baseload
each controller by Load control regulation loop, load-sharing is not active. The
setpoint #System Baseload (page 241) is also used for determining which unit
have to run or not.
The load is controlled by the supervisor (IM1010) controller to share the total load
(given by the setpoint #System Baseload (page 241)) with other loaded units in
Load Shar
such a way, that all loaded units will be loaded at the same level (relative to their
nominal power). Load-sharing regulation loop is active.

Note: The Load Shar mode shall be used in case the supervisor (IM1010) controller is present in the
system. In systems without the supervisor (IM1010) controller the setpoint must be setup to the
Baseload option.

Note: The power factor (PF) is regulated to constant level given by the setpoint #System PF
Control PTM (page 244) in parallel to mains operation and does not depend on active load control
mode.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 239

 Load Control PTM Mode

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Baseload / Imp / Exp [-]
Default value Baseload Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8638 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the type of load control.

System produces amount of the power. Source or requested power is given by

setpoint Load Request Source (page 238) The rest of power is supplied from the
mains or exported to the mains . Even in baseload control mode can be the
Import/Export limited. This function can be activated by setpoint Import/Export
Limitation (page 241) = Enabled. Then the request for the power of the System
operating in baseload can be limited to prevent the Import/Export go below the
limit given by setpoint Import Load (page 242).
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = 100. Then
Baseload the Baseload request will be limited to 600 kW to prevent the Import power
go below 100 kW

Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = -100. Then
the Baseload request will be limited to 800 kW to prevent the Import power
go below -100 kW (actually it is limitation of the export).

The load of the System is controlled to keep constant level of base load of the
whole system. The level is adjusted by the setpoint #System Baseload (page
241).
System produces the certain amount of power to keep constant import/export from
Imp/Exp the mains regardless the demand of the load. The source of requested
import/export is given by setpoint Load Request Source (page 238).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 240

 Import/Export Limitation

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9592 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enable or disable limitation for Import/Export. If the limitation is enabled, then the request for the power of
the System is limited to prevent the Import go below the limit which is give by the setpoint Import Load
(page 242).
Example: If the Import Load is set to -5 kW the maximum power exported to the Mains is 5 kW. If
the Import Load is set to 5 kW the minimum power imported from the Mains is 5 kW.

6 back to List of setpoints

#System Baseload

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 32 000 [kW] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
1 000 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value NO
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 8775 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Required total active power of the controller group in parallel to mains operation in Baseload mode.
The value from this Setpoint is used if:
Setpoint #System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Baseload
Setpoint #System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar
Setpoint Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) = Baseload
See chapter Load control (page 145) for more information.
Note: The # setpoints are shared with all controllers on site.

Note: The # setpoints are shared with all controllers on site via intercontroller CAN line.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 241

 Import Load

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

-32 000 .. 32 000 [kW] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page
Range [units]
164))
0 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Power Formats And Units (page Force value NO
164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8641 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Defines actual imported (exported) active power in parallel to mains operations in Import/Export mode or
the minimal imported (maximal exported) active power from the Mains in Baseload with I/E Limit mode.
The value from this Setpoint is used if:
Setpoint #System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar and
Setpoint Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) = Import/Export or
Setpoint Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) = Baseload and Import/Export Limitation
(page 241) = Enabled.
See chapter Load control (page 145) for more information.
Note: If the value of the setpoint is >0 the power is imported from the Mains, if the setpoint value is
<0, then the power is exported to the mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 242

 Subgroup: PF/Q Control

PF/Q Request Source

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Setpoint / Analog External Value [-]
Default value Setpoint Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 16130 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjust the source type requested of PF/Q control.
See PF Control (page 146) for more information.

PF/Q
#System PF Control PF/Q Control PTM
Request Source
PTM (page 244) Mode (page 244)
Source
#System Power Factor
PF Control
(page 245)
Base PF/ Q Control
#System Base Q (page
Q Control
Setpoint 246)
Import Power Factor
PF Control
Imp/Exp PF/ Q Control (page 247)
Q Control Import Q (page 247)
Analog PF CONTROL: ANEXT
Imp/Exp PF/ Q Control PF Control
External Value IMP/EXP PF (PAGE 598)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 243

 #System PF Control PTM

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Base PF / Var Shar [-]
Default value Base PF Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8779 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Power factor control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole controller group.

PF of the System is controlled by their PF control loops to provide constant

Base PF
system power factor adjusted by setpoint #System Power Factor (page 245).
Var Shar PF of the System (reactive power) is controlled through the VAr sharing line.

6 back to List of setpoints

PF/Q Control PTM Mode

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] PF Control / Q Control [-]
Default value PF Control Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10120 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of PF/Q control.

The Total Running Power Factor (page 462) is controlled according to preset
PF Control
required value. See PF Control (page 146) for more information.
The Total Running Q (page 462) is controlled according to preset required value.
Q Control
See PF Control (page 146) for more information.

Actual selected control mode is available in System PF/Q Control (page 466).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 244

 PF/Q Regulation Type

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Base PF/Q Control / Import/Export PF/Q Control [-]
Default value Base PF/Q Control Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 16131 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjust the regulation type of PF/Q control.

Base PF/Q System Gen-sets produces reactive power according to #System Power
Control Factor (page 245).
Mains Import/Export is exactly as requested, i.e. System power is adjusted to
Import/Export
fulfill Import/Export requirements. See PF Control (page 146) for more
PF/Q Control
information.

6 back to List of setpoints

#System Power Factor

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,60 .. 1,20 [-]
Default value 1,00 [-] Force value NO
Step 0,01 [-]
Comm object 8776 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Required total power factor of the controller group in parallel to mains operation in PF Control BASE
mode.
The value from this Setpoint is used if:
Setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Base PF
Setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Var Shar
Setpoint PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) = Base PF/Q Control
See chapter PF Control (page 146) for more information.
Note: If the setpoint value is >1 the Total RunningBus Load Character is C, if the setpoint value is <0
the Total RunningBus Load Character is L.

Note: The # setpoints are shared with all controllers on site via intercontroller CAN line.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 245

 #System Base Q

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

-32 000 .. 32 000 [kVAr] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units
Range [units]
(page 164))
0 kVAr (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value NO
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kVAr (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 16407 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Required total reactive power of the controller group in parallel to mains operation in Q Control BASE
mode.
The value from this Setpoint is used if:
Setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Base Q
Setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Load Shar
Setpoint PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) = Base PF/Q Control
See chapter Q Control (page 146) for more information.
Note: The # setpoints are shared with all controllers on site via intercontroller CAN line.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 246

 Import Power Factor

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,001 .. 1,999 [-]
Default value 1 [-] Force value NO
Step 0,001 [-]
Comm object 8642 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Defines required power factor in parallel to mains operation in PF Control IMP/EXP mode.
The value from this Setpoint is used if:
Setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) =Var Shar and
Setpoint PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) = Import/Export PF/Q Control and
Setpoint PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) = PF Control.
See chapter PF Control (page 146) for more information.
Note: If the setpoint value is >1 the Mains Load Character is C, if the setpoint value is <0 the Mains
Load Character is L.

6 back to List of setpoints

Import Q

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

-32000 .. 32000 [kVAr]
Range [units]
(depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Default value 0 kVAr Force value NO
Step 1 kVAr (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 14143 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Defines actual imported (exported) reactive power in parallel to mains operations in Q Control IMP/EXP
Mode.
The value from this Setpoint is used if:
Setpoint #System PF Control PTM (page 244) =Var Shar and
Setpoint PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) = Import/Export PF/Q Control and
Setpoint PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) = Q Control.
See chapter Q Control (page 146) for more information.
Note: If the value of the setpoint is >0 the power is imported from the mains, if the setpoint value is
<0, then the power is exported to the mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 247

 Subgroup: Mains Coupling

Mains Coupling

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11037 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines how the controller cooperates with other mains controllers in the system where
common busbar is supplied from multiple mains incomers.
Note: * MGCB is only in MGCB application.

It is forbidden to close the MCB and *MGCB at the same time if there is mains
Disabled
voltage on the bus.
It is allowed to close the MCB and *MGCB at the same time if there is mains
Enabled
voltage on the bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Process Limitation

CB Control In MAN Mode

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Full Ctrl / Aut Trans / Islnd Disl [-]
Default value Full Ctrl Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 14962 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The behavior of transition of load in MAN mode is adjusted via this setpoint.
Note: MGCB is available only in MGCB application. For MCB application CB Control works same but
MGCB is permanently closed.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 248

 No limitation of CB control in MAN mode (operator can close any breaker
Full Ctrl manually or evoke the synchronization and consequential operation in parallel to
mains)
Operator can control both MCB or MGCB breaker. However once transition is
evoked the controller performs the automatic transfer of the load (depends on
adjustment of setpoints Transfer Gen To Mains (page 341) and Transfer Mains
To Gen (page 340)).
Controller performs synchronization across MCB, if MGCB is closed and MCB
button is pushed. Load transfer is done after synchronization and MGCB is
opened automatically.
Controller performs synchronization across MGCB , if MCB is closed and MGCB
button is pushed. Load transfer is done after synchronization and MCB is opened
Aut Trans automatically.
It is also possible to open currently closed breaker and keep the load non-
energized. Then it is possible to close MCB or MGCB to energize the load from a
healthy source.
Note: Parallel operation with mains continues, if system already operates in
parallel with mains and setting is changed to Aut Trans. It is necessary to push
MCB or MGCB button to open a breaker.

Note: Open transfer is performed, if the Open option is selected with Transfer
Gen To Mains (page 341) or Transfer Mains To Gen (page 340)
Behaves like the full manual control but the Island operation is disabled.
Example: When MCB is opened and MGCB is pressed, controller does not
Islnd Disl go to island.

Example: In parallel operation when MCB button is pressed, MCB is not

opened.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 249

 Subgroup: Mains Import Measurement

Mains Measurement P

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] None / Mains CT / Analog Input [-]
Default value None Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10599 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Defines source value of the Mains Import P (page 439).

The value Mains Import P (page 439) is not measured. The duration of the load
None transfer in direction Mains to Bus is given exactly by the setpoint Close Transfer
Max Duration (page 339).
The value Mains Import P (page 439) is measured via Mains CTs which are
Mains CT located on phase L1, L2 and L3. The load transfer in direction Mains to Bus is
considered to be finished when the mains is unloaded under certain level.
The value Mains Import P (page 439) is measured via analog input, accordingly
Analog
LAI: MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597). The load transfer in direction Mains to
Input
Bus is considered to be finished when the mains is unloaded under certain level.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 250

 Mains Measurement Q

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] None / Mains CT / Analog Input [-]
Default value None Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10598 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Defines source value of the Mains Import Q (page 439).

The value Mains Import Q (page 439) is not measured. The duration of the load
None transfer in direction Mains to Bus is given exactly by the setpoint Close Transfer
Max Duration (page 339).
The value Mains Import Q (page 439) is measured via Mains CTs which are
Mains CT located on phase L1, L2 and L3. The load transfer in direction Mains to Bus is
considered to be finished when the mains is unloaded under certain level.
The value Mains Import Q (page 439) is measured via analog input, accordingly
Analog
LAI: MAINS MEASUREMENT Q (PAGE 597). The load transfer in direction Mains to
Input
Bus is considered to be finished when the mains is unloaded under certain level.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Peak Shaving

Peak Shaving

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11601 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables/disables peak shaving function.

The Peak shaving (page 152) function is active and its behaviour is set by
Enabled setpoints Peak Shaving Start Level (page 252), Peak Shaving Stop Level
(page 252) and Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 253).
The Peak shaving (page 152) function is BLOCKED and the start command can
Disabled
not be activated even the conditions for Peaks Shaving activation were fulfilled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 251

 Peak Shaving Start Level

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 252) .. 32000 [kW]
Range [units]
(depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
1000 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value YES
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 8643 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Peak Shaving (page 251) = Enabled
Description
This setpoint starts System, when the value of the load consumption Load P (page 449) exceeds the
value given by this setpoint for the time of Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 253).
The System is synchronized to the Mains (kept in the parallel to the Mains) and the genset power is
controlled according to the settings in the Groups Process Control and Load Control.
The System stays running until the conditions for Peak Shaving run are active. Conditions of deactivation
are given by the setpoint Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 252) and Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay
(page 253).

6 back to List of setpoints

Peak Shaving Stop Level

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

0 .. Peak Shaving Start Level (page 252) [kW]
Range [units]
(depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
900 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value YES
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 8644 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Peak Shaving (page 251) = Enabled
Description
This setpoint stops System, of the load consumption Load P (page 449) decreases under the value
given by this setpoint for the time of Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 253).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 252

 Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 600 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 9989 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Peak Shaving (page 251) = Enabled
Description
Defines the delay of activation or deactivation of the Peak shaving (page 152).

The value of the load consumption Load P (page 449) exceeds the value given
Starts when
by the setpoint Peak Shaving Start Level (page 252).
The value of the load consumption Load P (page 449) decreases under the
Stop when
value given by the setpoint Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 252)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Breaker Control Mode

MCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Internal / External [-]
Default value Internal Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9873 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of MCB.

The MCB breaker is controlled by controller.

The controller accepts the opening of MCB from the external device (Mains
relay). When the MCB is opened externally then:
Internal
The event "MCB opened Externally" is recorded in history log
Incorrect reaction of the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) to internal MCB
Close/Open command causes Wrn MCB Fail (page 657)
Controller does not control the MCB at all. The MCB is controlled externally,
when the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) gets changed, then the event "MCB
Opened" or "MCB Closed" is recorded to the history log.
External
Controller always accepts the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) without of issuing
any alarm.
The controller informs the superordinate system about the status of the breaker

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 253

 automaton using the signals
LBO FORWARD SYNCHRONIZATION (PAGE 574)
LBO REVERSE SYNCHRONIZATION (PAGE 590)

6 back to List of setpoints

GCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Internal / Follow / External [-]
Default value Internal Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11771 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Application Mode Select (page 237) = MGCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of MGCB.

The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change of GCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) causes Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660) immediately.
Internal
Incorrect reaction of the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) on internal MGCB
Close/Open command causes Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660)
MGCB Openning GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) = 0 is accepted from external
devices with history record "MGCB Opened Externally".
Follow
Incorrect reaction of the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) to internal MGCB
Close/Open command causes Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660)
Controller does not control the MGCB is controlled externally, when the GCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) get changed, then the event "MGCB Opened" or
"MGCB Closed" is recorded to the history log.
External
Controller always accept the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) without of issuing
any alarm.
IMPORTANT: Bus with closed MGCB is not blocked against starting.

IMPORTANT: Anytime when the controller is synchronizing via MGCB the External MGCB
closing is being accepted in all MGCB control modes.

6 back to List of setpoints

MGCB Parallel Close

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] No / Yes / MCB Closed [-]
Default value No Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10921 Related applications , MGCB

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 254

 Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Application Mode Select (page 237) = MGCB
Description
This setpoint defines how the Gen-sets will be connected to the parallel with Mains while the controller is
in the AUTO mode.

Disables automatic MGCB closing in the case that the System

Start/Stop output is activated. The Bus will be synchronized to the
No - GCB Closes First
Mains via MGCB when at least one Gen-set is connected to the
Bus.
Enables automatic MGCB closing in the case that the System
Start/Stop output is activated. The MGCB is closed immediately if
Yes - MGCB Closes First
there is no voltage on the Bus and all Gen-sets will be synchronized
to the Mains/Bus via GCB.
Enables automatic MGCB closing after MCB is closed. The MGCB
is closed with 5 s delay after MCB if there is no voltage on the Bus
MCB Closed and GCBs are opened. All starting Gen-sets will be synchronized to
the Mains/Bus via GCB. Note: If Mains fails and there is no voltage
on the Bus, the MGCB will be opened after MCB.

6 back to List of setpoints

Multi Soft Start

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14041 Related applications , MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Application Mode Select (page 237) = MGCB
Description
This setpoint allows closing the MGCB during SUS sequence without voltage on the Bus while starting to
the Island / Multiple Island operation (MCB is opened).Check the chapter Multi soft start (page 139) for
more information.

The MGCB will be closed after the SUS sequence is successfully / unsuccessfully
Disabled
finished.
The MGCB will be closed together with Gen-sets' GCBs during SUS sequence if
Enabled
there is no voltage on the Bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

Attempts To Close Breaker

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 255

 Range [units] 1 .. 5 [-]
Default value 2 Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 19885 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the amount of attempts the controller performs when a breaker is requested to be
closed.
Example: If the breaker feedback is not received at the end of the attempt, an alarm is not issued,
unless it was the last attempt to close the breaker.

6 back to List of setpoints

Delay Between Closing Attempts

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 20 .. 60 [s]
Default value 20 [s] Force value NO
Step 1 [s]
Comm object 19883 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay between breaker closing attempts the controller performs when a breaker
is requested to be closed. Delay is one second longer than you set here due breaker's safety.
Example: If this setpoint is set to 10 seconds, the delay between another attempt to close the
breaker will be 11 seconds.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 256

 Subgroup: Controller Redundancy

Watched Controller

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 32 [-]
Default value 0 (OFF) [-] Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 11719 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for controller redundancy function.
Set this setpoint to 0/OFF to disable reading of messages from CAN2 line.
Set this setpoint to Master's CAN2 bus address to start controller redundancy function.
CU is reading the Heartbeat messages of selected CAN address on CAN2 line.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Basic settings

Subgroup: Name

Controller Name

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliMains 510 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8637 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection.
Controller Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from
controller’s configuration menu.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 257

 Subgroup: Power settings

Nominal DC Shore Power

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 32 000 [kW] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
200 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value YES
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 19476 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power imported from the Mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current settings

Nominal Current

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Default value 350A Force value YES
Step 1A
Comm object 8275 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Current limit for current protections and maximal continuous current.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 258

 Mains CT Ratio Prim

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 15000 [A]
Default value 500 A Force value NO
Step 1A
Comm object 8274 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the primary range of the current transformer used for the Mains current
measurement.
Note: The setpoint is applied on all three phases of the Mains current.

Note: The CT is usually described by this definition: CT Ratio Prim / CT Ratio Sec: Example:
100/5, 500/5, 1000/1

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains CT Ratio Sec

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] /5A or /1A [-]
Default value /5A Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10556 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the secondary range of the current transformer used for the Mains current
measurement.
Note: This setpoint is applied on all three phases of the Mains current.

Note: The CT is usually described by this definition: CT Ratio Prim / CT Ratio Sec: Example:
100/5, 500/5, 1000/1

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 259

 Aux Current Ratio Prim

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 15000 [A]
Default value 500 A Force value NO
Step 1A
Comm object 8566 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Soft Unload (page 344) != Normal
Description
This setpoint is used for settings of primary CT ratio of Aux Current (page 450) measurement, which is
used for Aux Power (page 450) calculation for needs of Soft Unload function.

6 back to List of setpoints

Aux Current Ratio Sec

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] /1A / /5A [-]
Default value /5A Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10557 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Soft Unload (page 344) != Normal
Description
This setpoint is used for settings of secondary CT ratio of Aux Current (page 450) measurement, which
is used for Aux Power (page 450) calculation for needs of Soft Unload function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 260

 Mains CT Ratio Prim

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 15000 [A]
Default value 300 A Force value YES
Step 1A
Comm object 8566 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for settings of primary CT ratio of Aux Current (page 450) measurement, which is
used for Aux Power (page 450) calculation for needs of Soft Unload function.
IMPORTANT: L1 Aux current must be measured otherwise the power will be calculated
wrongly.

Note: The CT is usually described by this definition: Aux Current Ratio Prim / Aux Current Ratio
Sec: Example: 100/5, 500/5, 1000/1

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains CT Ratio Sec

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] /1A or /5A [-]
Default value /5A Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10557 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for settings of secondary CT ratio of Aux Current (page 450) measurement, which
is used for Aux Power (page 450) calculation for needs of Soft Unload function.
IMPORTANT: L1 Aux current must be measured otherwise the power will be calculated
wrongly.

Note: The CT is usually described by this definition: Aux Current Ratio Prim / Aux Current Ratio
Sec: Example: 100/5, 500/5, 1000/1

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Voltage settings

Connection type

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 3ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3ph3Wire / SplPhL1L3 / SplPhL1L2 / MonoPhase [-]

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 261

 Default value 3Ph4Wire [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11628 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines connection type of the installation.

3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY

Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N
1x CT (Current Transformer)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 262

 Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 10 .. 34641 [V]
Default value 231 V Force value YES
Step 1V
Comm object 8277 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only ifConnection type (page 261) != High Leg D or Connection type (page
Setpoint visibility
261) != MonoPhase
Description
Nominal Bus voltage (phase to neutral).
6 back to List of setpoints

Gen Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 10 .. 60000 [V]
Default value 400 V Force value YES
Step 1V
Comm object 11657 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal Bus voltage (phase to phase).
6 back to List of setpoints

MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 10 .. 34641 [V]
Default value 231 V Force value YES
Step 1V
Comm object 9888 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only ifConnection type (page 261) != High Leg D or Connection type (page
Setpoint visibility
261) != MonoPhase
Description
Nominal Mains voltage (phase to neutral).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 263

 Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 10 .. 60000 [V]
Default value 400 V Force value YES
Step 1V
Comm object 9907 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal Mains voltage (phase to phase).
6 back to List of setpoints

Mains VT Ratio

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 6000.00 [V/V]
Default value 1.00 V/V Force value NO
Step 0.01 V/V
Comm object 20281 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the converting ratio of the voltage meas transformer used on Terminal Diagram
Note: This setpoint is applied on all three phases of Mains voltage.

Example:
No VT is in use - voltage conversion is 1/1
Mains VT Ratio = 1.00
VT 22kV/100V - voltage conversion is 22000/100
Mains VT Ratio = 220.00
VT 3.3kV/110V - voltage conversion is 3300/110
Mains VT Ratio = 30.00

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus VT Ratio

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 6000.00 [V/V]
Default value 1.00 V/V Force value NO
Step 0.01 V/V
Comm object 20282 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 264

 Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the converting ratio of the voltage meas transformer used on Terminal Diagram
Note: This setpoint is applied on all three phases of Bus voltage.

Example:
No VT is in use - voltage conversion is 1/1
Bus VT Ratio = 1.00
VT 22kV/100V - voltage conversion is 22000/100
Bus VT Ratio = 220.00
VT 3.3kV/110V - voltage conversion is 3300/110
Bus VT Ratio = 30.00

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus Dead Level

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

0.0 .. 13.0 [%] of Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen
Range [units]
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
6.5 % of Gen AC Bus Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Default value Force value NO
Gen Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 263)
0.1 % of Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Nominal
Step
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
Comm object 14473 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint
Always
visibility
Description
This setpoint defines the percentage voltage level below which is Bus considered as dead.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 265

 Subgroup: Phase Rotation

Phase Rotation

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Clockwise / Counterclockwise [-]
Default value Clockwise Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15122 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency settings

Nominal Frequency

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 33.00 .. 520.00 [Hz]
Default value 50,00 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 8278 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal frequency of system (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
IMPORTANT: While System is running, this setpoint can be changed only inside currently
selected range. The ranges are 45-54 Hz and 55-65 Hz.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 266

 Subgroup: Controller settings

Controller mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8315 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the controller’s mode remotely, e.g. via Modbus.
InteliConfig: Use the mode selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel.
Display: Use mode selector by pressing (Right arrow) and (Left arrow). Confirm it by pressing (enter).

6 back to List of setpoints

Power On Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13000 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.

Previous Controller is switched into the last mode before power off.
OFF Controller is switched into OFF mode.

Note: Remote modes - In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint - controller mode is forced into mode selected via
LBI. After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 267

 Backlight Timeout

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 10121 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then
the display will be backlighted all the time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Horn Timeout

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled = 0; 1 .. 600; Horn Reset [s]
Default value 10 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8264 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint affects horn's behavior.
Disabled Horn sound is disabled e.g. LBO HORN (PAGE 575) is never activated
1 .. 600 [s] Timeout for LBO HORN (PAGE 575). Output opens after this time elapses
Horn Reset LBO HORN (PAGE 575) is active until button Horn Reset is pressed.

Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if any new alarm appears before previous Horn
timeout has elapsed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 268

 Fail Safe Binary State

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Log0 / Log1 / Last Valid State [-]
Default value Last Valid State Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 21215 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of all binary inputs while the received value is invalid (communication lost).
Changes of the setpoint will not be applied on peripherals which are already in fail safe binary state.

Log0 The value is logical zero.

Log1 The value is logical one.
Last Valid State The value is replaced by last valid state.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Logging Record

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23885 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables recording of user login in/out to the controller history.
Example: The fallowing records will be shown in the history if enabled: User with user index (0)
loegged in via ETH.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 269

 Subgroup: Battery Protections

Battery Undervoltage

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 8.0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 270) [V]
Default value 18.0 V Force value NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 8387 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.
6 back to List of setpoints

Battery Overvoltage

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 270) .. 40.0 [V]
Default value 36.0 V Force value NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 9587 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.
6 back to List of setpoints

Battery Under And Overvoltage Delay

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8383 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for which battery voltage can be out of range given by setpoints Battery Undervoltage (page
270) and Battery Overvoltage (page 270). After this delay elapses, appropriate alarm (Wrn Battery
Undervoltage (page 637) or Wrn Battery Overvoltage (page 637)) is activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 270

 Subgroup: Pulse counters

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] OFF / 0 .. 65000 [-]
Default value OFF Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 10994 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the "slow" Pulse Counter 1 (page 471) which is connected
with LBI PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 558).
Set this setpoint to OFF to turn the function off. See the chapter Pulse Counters (page 194) for more
information.

6 back to List of setpoints

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] OFF / 0 .. 65000 [-]
Default value OFF Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 10995 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the "slow" Pulse Counter 2 (page 471) which is connected
with LBI PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 558).
Set this setpoint to OFF to turn the function off. See the chapter Pulse Counters (page 194) for more
information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 271

 Group: Communication Settings

Subgroup: Controller Address

CAN Controller Address

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 [-] Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 23999 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts Controller's CAN Address which is used for Can Intercontroller communication.
This type of communication is used to share information between other ComAp controllers via CAN
interface (Communication peripherals (page 17)).
Note: Each controller connected via CAN has to have unique address, i.e. maximally 64 controllers
can be connected together.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: RS485 Settings

RS485 Mode

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS [-]
Default value Direct Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24134 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Communication protocol switch for on-board RS485.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 272

 RS485 Communication Speed

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 57600 bps Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24135 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If the direct mode is selected on on-board RS485, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 back to List of setpoints

RS485 Modbus Mode

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24020 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU, Modbus/TCP (page 214).

Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 273

 RS485 Modbus Speed

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24141 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication speed ofModbus-RTU, Modbus/TCP (page 214).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Intercontroller Settings

CAN Intercontroller Empty Check

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9921 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable CAN2 Intercontroller Empty Check.

Disabled Detection of CAN Intercontroller Empty Check is disabled.

Detection of CAN Intercontroller Empty Check is enabled. If controller does
Enabled not see any other controller on theTerminal Diagram (page 33) orTerminal
Diagram (page 33) the Wrn CAN2 Empty (page 639) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Mains Settings

Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload MPR

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 100 .. 200 [%] of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
120 % of Nominal DC
Default value Force value YES
Shore Power (page

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 274

 258)
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 8280 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative power level, where the thermal overload protection starts to be
evaluated. See setpoint Overload Protection (page 292)for complete explanation of the protection.

Load Reaction time

level [s] 2POvrldStEvDel 5s
100 no reaction OverldStrtEval 120 %
110 no reaction
120 600
130 60
140 30
150 20
160 15
170 12
180 10
190 8.6
200 7.5
210 6.7
220 6
230 5.5
240 5
250 4.6
The reaction time of the thermal overload protection is not fixed and is specified by the parameter
Overload Delay (page 276).
Note: Maximum reaction time is 3600 s after this time the protection is tripped.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 275

 Overload Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. Overload MPR (page 274) [%]
Default value 105 % Force value NO
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 9685 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for overload of Bus (in % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)) protection. This is
only warning.
6 back to List of setpoints

Overload Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.1 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Force value YES
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8281 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the default delay for the thermal overload protection. See setpoint Overload
Protection (page 292) for complete explanation of the protection.

Load Reaction time

level [s]
100 no reaction
110 no reaction
3600 (max.
120
value)
130 60
2POvrldStEvDel 5s
140 30
OverldStrtEval 120 %
150 20
160 15
170 12
180 10
190 8.6
200 7.5
210 6.7

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 276

 220 6
230 5.5
240 5
250 4.6

The reaction time of the thermal overload protection is not fixed; it depends on how much is the load
above the limit of Overload MPR (page 274). The higher is the load the shorter the reaction time will be.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Underload Protection

Minimal Power PTM

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%] of Running Nominal Power In PM (page 463)
5 % of Running Nominal Power In
Default value Force value NO
PM (page 463)
Step 1 % of Running Nominal Power In PM (page 463)
Comm object 9241 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines minimal acceptable required power of the System. If Required P Target (page
465) is below the Minimal Power PTM, then the Required P Target (page 465) is overridden by this
setpoint. Furthermore if Minimal Power PTM Protection (page 303) is enabled and the requested
power of the System stays below Minimal Power PTM longer then Minimal Power PTM Protection Del
(page 278), the alarm Stp Request Under MinPowerPTM (page 688) is activated.
IMPORTANT: If the setpoint is set too high it can happen that MCB opening will be
blocked because it will not be possible to reach the Mains Unload MCB Open Window
(page 342).

Note: Setpoint Minimal Power PTM is related to Running Nominal Power In PM (page 463).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 277

 Minimal Power PTM Protection Del

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 10 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 17013 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Minimal Power PTM Protection (page 303).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current Protection

Short Circuit

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%] of Nominal Current (page 258)
150 % of Nominal Current (page
Default value Force value NO
258)
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 258)
Comm object 8282 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative current threshold level for Short Circuit Protection.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd instead of BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Short Circuit Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 10.00 [s]
Default value 0s Force value NO
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 9991 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Short Circuit Protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 278

 IDMT Mains Overcurrent Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 4.0 s Force value NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8283 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for IDMT Mains Overcurrent Protection (page 293).
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT Overcurrent Delay is a reaction time of IDMT protection for 200%
overcurrent IMains =2*Nominal Current (page 258)
IDMT is “very inverse” over current protection. Reaction time is not constant but depends on over current
level according to the following formula:

Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.

IGen is maximal value of all measured phases of Mains current.

Table 7.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
0,2 s No action 20 s 2s
Reaction time 2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s

Image 7.1 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 279

 Current Unbalance

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
50 % of Nominal DC
Default value Shore Power (page Force value NO
258)
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 8284 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Connection type (page 261) != MonoPhase
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative current threshold level for Current Unbalance Protection (page
295).

6 back to List of setpoints

Current Unbalance Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Force value NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8285 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Connection type (page 261) != MonoPhase
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Current Unbalance Protection (page 295).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 280

 Subgroup: Mains Voltage Protections

Mains Overvoltage

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 282) .. 150 [%]
110.0 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Default value Force value YES
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
0.1 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Step
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
MCB,
Comm object 8305 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative voltage threshold level for Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
Note: Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L3-N (page
445), Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) and Mains Voltage L3-L1
(page 446) are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Overvoltage Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 600.00 [s]
Default value 5.00 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 8306 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Mains <>V Protection (page 296).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 281

 Mains Overvoltage Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

0.0 .. 30.0 [%] of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Range [units]
Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
0.0 [%] of MainsAC Shore Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Default value Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph- Force value NO
PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 264)
0.1 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Step
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
Comm object 14132 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for return from Mains <>V Protection (page 296).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Undervoltage

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 281) [%]
60 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Default value Force value YES
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
1 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Step
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
MCB,
Comm object 8307 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative voltage threshold level for Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
Note: Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L3-N (page
445), Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) and Mains Voltage L3-L1
(page 446) are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 282

 Mains Undervoltage Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 600.00 [s]
Default value 1.50 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 8308 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Mains <>V Protection (page 296).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Undervoltage Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

0.0 .. 50.0 [%] of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Range [units]
Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
0.0 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Default value Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph- Force value YES
PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 264)
0.1 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Step
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
Comm object 14130 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for return from Mains <>V Protection (page 296).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 283

 Mains Voltage Unbalance

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

1 .. 200 [%] of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Range [units]
Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
10 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and
Default value Mains/Bus Nominal Voltage Ph- Force value YES
PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 264)
1 % of MainsAC Shore Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Mains/Bus
Step
Nominal Voltage Ph-PhMains Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 264)
Comm object 8446 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative voltage threshold level for Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection
(page 298).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 600.00 [s]
Default value 2.00 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 8447 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 298).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 284

 Subgroup: Mains Frequency Protection

Mains Overfrequency

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 285) .. 150 [%]
Default value 1.50 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 8310 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximal accepted frequency for Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Overfrequency Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 2.50 [Hz]
Default value 0.00 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 14134 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for return from Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Underfrequency

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 285) [%]
Default value -1.50 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 14587 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts minimal accepted frequency for Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 285

 Mains Underfrequency Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 2.50 [Hz]
Default value 0.00 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 14135 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for return from Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains <>f Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 1000.00 [s]
Default value 5.00 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 8311 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AMF Timers

AMF Start

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9238 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enable or disable the AMF Function (page 102).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 286

 Emergency Start Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 6 000 [s]
Default value 5s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 8301 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay between the mains failure and gen-set start command execution.

Image 7.2 Emergency Start Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Return Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 20 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 8302 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for which mains has to be returned from mains fail to start load transfer to
mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 287

 MCB Close Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 60.0 [s]
Default value 1.0 s Force value YES
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8389 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay before MCB is closed after mains returns.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AMF Settings

Return From Island

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Manual / Auto [-]
Default value Auto Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9590 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of closing MCB during AMF when the mains returns.

Alarm ALI Manual Restore (page 671) is activated. MCB has to be closed
Manual manually via MCB close button.
Note: Only MCB button command is being evaluated.
MCB is closed automatically after Mains Return Delay (page 287) period
Auto
elapses.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 288

 Return to Mains in TEST Mode

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled [-] Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8618 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the behavior of the AMF function while the controller is in the TEST mode.

The load is transferred to the Mains according to settings of the Load

Enabled
Transfers and the Gen-sets are kept running unloaded.
The Load is kept supplied from the System until this situation is resolved by
Disabled
user e.g. putting the controller back into the AUTO mode.

6 back to List of setpoints

MCB Logic

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Close-On / Close-Off [-]
Default value Close-Off Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8444 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579) and LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE
547).

When LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579) is closed – LBI MCB

Close On
FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) should be closed.
When LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579) is closed – LBI MCB
Close Off
FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) should be opened.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 289

 Image 7.3 Close-On

Image 7.4 Close-Off

Note: LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579) as well as this setpoint is used only for contactors.

6 back to List of setpoints

MCB Opens On

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Mains Fail / Gen Run / Bus Voltage [-]
Default value Gen Run Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9850 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of MCB opening during Controller mode (page 267) = AUTO.

Mains Fail MCB open command is sent immediately after Mains fail conditions are
evaluated. If Mains parameters are ok after MCB was opened and before MGCB
is closed, timer MCB Close Delay (page 288)is applied before MCB closing.
Gen Run MCB will be opened after Gen-set is running and LBO Ready To Load is closed.
Note: This option should be used for MCB using 230 V control without of the
undervoltage coil.
Bus Voltage MCB will be opened if there is voltage on the bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 290

 Subgroup: Loss of Mains Protections

Vector Shift Limit

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 45 [°]
Default value 10 ° Force value YES
Step 1°
Comm object 9843 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard

Setpoint visibility
Only if Vector Shift Protection (page 305) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the Vector Shift Protection (page 305).
Note: To adjust this setpoint properly, check the value Max Vector Shift (page 448). The value is
available in InteliConfig, contains the maximal measured vector shift value since the Bus has been
synchronized to the mains and after opening of MGCB or MCB it is "frozen". In normal conditions the
value should not be higher than 3 º and the most common setting of the threshold is about 7 º.

6 back to List of setpoints

ROCOF Windows Length

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 3 .. 30 [-]
Default value 5 Force value YES
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 9990 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard

Setpoint visibility
Only if ROCOF Protection (page 306) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the time averaging level for the ROCOF Protection (page 306).
It defines the number of periods of the mains voltage in which the ROCOF protection is evaluated. The
higher length of the ROCOF window means less sensitive protection for short oscillations of the
frequency to both directions from the nominal value. Also, the delay of evaluation is higher.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 291

 ROCOF df/dt

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 10.00 [Hz/s]
Default value 1.00 Hz/s Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz/s
Comm object 9844 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard

Setpoint visibility
Only if ROCOF Protection (page 306) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the trip level for ROCOF Protection (page 306).

6 back to List of setpoints

Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] MCB / MGCB [-]
Default value MCB Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10552 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if Vector Shift Protection (page 305)!= Disabled or
Setpoint visibility
ROCOF Protection (page 306)!= Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts which breaker will be opened when Vector Shift Protection (page 305), ROCOF
Protection (page 306) is detected.
Note: If the MGCB is selected and a mains failure occurs the MGCB will be opened immediately
when the vector shift or ROCOF is detected, however MCB will be also opened due to other mains
protections such as Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Protections

Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 13231 Related applications MCB, MGCB

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 292

 Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Overload Protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Overload MPR (page 274) and Overload Delay (page
276). This protection activates alarm Hst IDMT Overload (page 687).
The reaction time is calculated by this formula:

IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current Protection

IDMT Mains Overcurrent Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force
Range [units]
Disable 2 / Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Related
Comm object 15666 MCB, MGCB
applications

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 293

 Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables IDMT Mains Overcurrent Protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints IDMT Mains Overcurrent Delay (page 279). This
protection activates alarm MPR IDMT Mains >A (page 687).
The reaction time is calculated by this formula:

IMains = Maximum (Mains Current L1 (page 447), Mains Current L2 (page 447)andMains Current L3
(page 447))
Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.

Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤100 % 101 % 110 %
0.2 s No action 20 s 2s
Reaction Time
2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s

Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 294

 Current Unbalance Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15667 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Current Unbalance Protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Current Unbalance (page 280)
and Current Unbalance Delay (page 280). When relative difference between Mains currents is over
setpoint Current Unbalance (page 280) for time longer than Current Unbalance Delay (page
280)alarm MPR Current Unbalance (page 687) is activated.
IMPORTANT: Behavior of this protection is influenced by setpoint Connection type (page
261)

Connection
type (page Compared values (maximum difference)
261)
3Ph4Wire
High Leg D (Mains Current L1 (page 447), Mains Current L2 (page 447),Mains
3Ph3Wire Current L3 (page 447))
SplitPhase
MonoPhase No protection is evaluated.
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled : Protection is enabled / disabled .
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 295

 Short Circuit Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15665 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Short Circuit protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Short Circuit Protection (page 296) and Short Circuit
Delay (page 278). When value of Mains Current L1 (page 447), Mains Current L2 (page 447) and
Mains Current L3 (page 447) related to Nominal Current (page 258) cross over Short Circuit (page
278) for time longer than Short Circuit Delay (page 278) alarm MPR Short Circuit (page 687) is
activated.
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled : Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Voltage Protection

Mains <>V Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20806 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Mains >V Protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Mains Overvoltage (page 281), Mains Overvoltage
Delay (page 281) and Mains Overvoltage Hys (page 282). When Mains voltage exceeds limit set by
Mains Overvoltage (page 281) for period longer than Mains Overvoltage Delay (page 281) relevant
history records is written to the history and MCB is opened if:

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 296

 Controller mode (page 267) = OFF
and MCB Opens On (page 290) = Mains Fail
Controller mode (page 267) = MAN
and Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper
Controller mode (page 267) = AUTO
Return from Mains >V can have hysteresis set by Mains Overvoltage Hys (page 282).

Value History Record

Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445) MP MAINS OVERVOLTAGE L1-N (PAGE 678)
Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) MP MAINS OVERVOLTAGE L2-N (PAGE 678)
Mains Voltage L3-N (page 445) MP MAINS OVERVOLTAGE L3-N (PAGE 679)
Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445) MP MAINS OVERVOLTAGE L1-L2 (PAGE 679)
Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) MP MAINS OVERVOLTAGE L2-L3 (PAGE 680)
Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446) MP MAINS OVERVOLTAGE L3-L1 (PAGE 680)
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 297

 Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20798 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Mains V Unbalance Protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 284) and Mains
Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 284). When relative difference between Mains current is over setpoint
Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 284) for time longer than Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page
284) alarm MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-N (page 685) or MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
(page 684) is activated.
IMPORTANT: Behavior of this protection is influenced by setpoint Connection type (page
261)

Connection type
Compared values (maximum difference)
(page 261)
Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) and
Mains Voltage L3-N (page 445)
3Ph4Wire OR
Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) and
Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446)
Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) and
High Leg D
Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446)
Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) and
3Ph3Wire
Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446)
Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) and
SplitPhase
Mains Voltage L3-N (page 445)
MonoPhase No protection is evaluated.

List of History Records

MPMains V Unbalance Ph-N
MPMains V Unbalance Ph-Ph
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 298

 Bus <>V Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15668 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Bus <>V Protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Bus Undervoltage (page 307).
When Bus voltage exceeds limit set by Bus Undervoltage (page 307) appropriate alarm is activated.

Value Alarm
Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458) Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-N (page 672)
Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458) Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-N (page 672)
Bus Voltage L3-N (page 458) Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-N (page 672)
Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458) Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-L2 (page 673)
Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-L3 (page 673)
Bus Voltage L3-L1 (page 459) Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-L1 (page 673)
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15669 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 299

 Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Bus V Unbalance (page 308) and Bus V Unbalance
Delay (page 308). When relative difference between Bus voltages is over setpoint Bus V Unbalance
(page 308) for time longer than Bus V Unbalance Delay (page 308) alarm Hst Bus Voltage
Unbalance Ph-N (page 675) or Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph (page 676) is activated.
IMPORTANT: Behavior of this protection is influenced by setpoint Connection type (page
261)

Connection
type (page Compared values (maximum difference)
261)
Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458) and Bus
Voltage L3-N (page 458)
3Ph4Wire OR
Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) and Bus
Voltage L3-L1 (page 459)
Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) and Bus
High Leg D
Voltage L3-L1 (page 459)
Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) and Bus
3Ph3Wire
Voltage L3-L1 (page 459)
Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458) and Bus
SplitPhase
Voltage L3-N (page 458)
MonoPhase No protection is evaluated.
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 300

 Subgroup: Frequency Protection

Mains <>f Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20802 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior Mains >f Protection.
Controller mode (page 267) = OFF
Controller mode (page 267) = MAN
and Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper
Controller mode (page 267) = AUTO
Return from Mains >f can have hysteresis set by Mains Overfrequency Hys (page 285).
Note: fmax = Nominal Frequency (page 266) + Mains Overfrequency (page 285)

Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled: Protection is enabled / disabled.
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 301

 Bus <>f Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15670 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Bus >f Protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint Bus Overfrequency (page 309). When Bus Frequency
(page 458) exceeds maximal accepted frequency for period longer than Bus <>f Delay (page 310)
alarm Hst Bus Overfrequency (page 675) is activated.
Note: fmax = Nominal Frequency (page 266) + Bus Overfrequency (page 309)

Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled : Protection is enabled / disabled .
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 302

 Subgroup: Minimal Power PTM Protection

Minimal Power PTM Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 17012 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Minimal Power PTM protection.
The LBO MINIMAL POWER PTM LIMITATION (PAGE 588) is closed always when the System
Required P Target is below Minimal Power PTM (page 277).

Protection is enabled.
Alarm Stp Request Under MinPowerPTM (page 688) is activated if
Enabled controller detects that the System Required P Target is below Minimal
Power PTM (page 277) while Parallel To Mains operation and Minimal
Power PTM Protection Del (page 278) elapsed.
Disabled Protection is disabled.
Protection Force Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE
Disable 1 DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556).
Protection Force Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE
Disable 2 DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557).
Protection Force Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE
Disable 3 DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).

Note: This protections is not evaluated if System power goes under Minimal Power because of
Import/Export Limitation (page 241).

IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 303

 Subgroup: Bus Meas Error Protection

Bus Meas Error Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Enabled / Disabled / Protection Force Disable 1 / Protection Force Disable 2 /
Range [units]
Protection Force Disable 3 [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10558 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Bus Measurement Error protection.
Alarm Wrn Bus Meas Error (page 637) is activated if controller detects a mismatch between the
expected and currently measured voltage on the bus for period longer than 20 s. Mismatch means that
measured voltage is lower/higher than Bus Dead Level (page 265), although the controller receives
information about closed/opened breaker.
Setpoint options:
Enabled / Disabled : Protection is enabled / disabled .
Protection Force Disable 1 / 2 / 3: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 1 (PAGE 556) / PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 2 (PAGE 557) /
PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE 3 (PAGE 557).
IMPORTANT: If this protection is disabled, the MGCB cannot be closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 304

 Subgroup: Loss of Mains Protections

Vector Shift Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Parallel Only / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10551 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables the function of the built-in Vector Shift protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Vector Shift Limit (page 291) and Vector Shift/ROCOF
CB Selector (page 292). When measured vector shift on Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445) is over the
Vector Shift Limit (page 291), breaker specified in Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector (page 292) is
opened and history record Vector Shift is written to the history.
Note: If a vector shift is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and
frequency remain in limits, the MCB is reclosed again after Mains Return Delay (page 287), as the
mains is evaluated as healthy.

Enabled Protection is always active while MCB is closed.

Protection is active only if Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper i.e. MCB and
Parallel Only
MGCB are closed.
Disabled Protection is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 305

 ROCOF Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Parallel Only / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9840 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables the function of the built-in ROCOF1 Protection.
Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints ROCOF Windows Length (page 291), ROCOF df/dt
(page 292) and Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector (page 292).
When measured ROCOF (page 448) is over ROCOF df/dt (page 292) in respective period given by
ROCOF Windows Length (page 291), breaker specified in Vector Shift/ROCOF CB Selector (page
292) is opened and history record ROCOF is written to the history. Maximal ROCOF is stored in Max
ROCOF (page 449) which is reset every time when the breaker is closed again.
Note: If a ROCOF is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and
frequency remain in limits, the MCB is reclosed again after MCB Close Delay (page 288), as the mains is
evaluated as healthy.

Enabled Protection is always active while MCB is closed.

Protection is active only if Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper i.e. MCB and
Parallel Only
MGCB are closed.
Disabled Protection is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Phase Rotation Protection

Phase Rotation Protection

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Clockwise / Counterclockwise [-]
Default value Clockwise Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 19709 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 306

 Group: Generator settings

Subgroup: Bus Voltage Protection

Bus Undervoltage

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

100 .. 200 of Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Nominal
Range [units]
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263) [%]
120 % of Gen AC Bus Nominal
Default value Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Force value YES
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
1 % of Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Nominal
Step
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
Comm object 8291 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative voltage threshold level for Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Note: Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L3-N (page
458), Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) and Bus Voltage L3-L1
(page 459) are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus Overvoltage

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

20 .. 99 [%] of Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Nominal
Range [units]
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
90 % of Gen AC Bus Nominal
Default value Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Force value YES
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
1 % of Gen AC Bus Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 263) and Gen Nominal
Step
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 263)
Comm object 8293 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative voltage threshold level for Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Note: Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L3-N (page
458), Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-L3 (page 459) and Bus Voltage L3-L1
(page 459) are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 307

 Bus <>V Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 6000.0 [s]
Default value 5.00 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 9103 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Bus <>V Protection (page 299).

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus V Unbalance

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%]
Default value 10 % Force value YES
Step 1%
Comm object 8288 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Connection type (page 261) != MonoPhase
Description
This setpoint specifies the relative voltage threshold level for Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection
(page 299).

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus V Unbalance Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 600.00 [s]
Default value 3.00 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 8289 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Connection type (page 261) != MonoPhase
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 299).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 308

 Subgroup: Bus Frequency Protection

Bus Overfrequency

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 5.00 [Hz]
Default value 1.50 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 8296 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximal accepted frequency for Bus <>f Protection (page 302).
IMPORTANT: When Application Mode (page 472) = MINT this setpoint also specifies the
maximal accepted frequency for Bus >f Protection.

Note: fmax = Nominal Frequency (page 266) + Bus >f

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus Underfrequency

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 5.00 [Hz]
Default value 1.50 Hz Force value YES
Step 0.01 Hz
Comm object 14588 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximal accepted frequency for Bus <>f Protection (page 302).
IMPORTANT: When Application Mode (page 472) = MINT this setpoint also specifies the
maximal accepted frequency for Bus <f Protection.

Note: fmin = Nominal Frequency (page 266) - Bus <f

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 309

 Bus <>f Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.00 s Force value YES
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 8297 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint specifies the delay for Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 310

 Group: Load Shedding

Subgroup: Load Shedding

Load Shedding Active

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / Island only / IsL+Trip paral / All the time [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11001 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Allways
Description
This setpoint adjusts the activation of the Load Shedding (page 134) function.
Disabled – Function is disabled.
Island only – Function is active when Breaker state (page 473) = IslOper or Breaker state
(page 473) = MultIslOp.
Load shedding outputs (page 135) are closed/opened one by one in island operations
All Load shedding outputs (page 135) are closed at once when the System comes into the
island operation if MCB and MGCB were opened -> Bus is powered -> MGCB closed.
IsL+Trip paral – Function behaves same as Load Shedding Active = Island only and adds load
shedding when Breaker state (page 473) is changed from ParalOper/MultParOp to
IslOper/MultIslOp .
Load shedding outputs (page 135) are closed/opened one by one in island operations
All Load shedding outputs (page 135) are closed at once when the System changes into
island operation state in this way: MCB and MGCB were opened -> Bus is powered -> MGCB
closed.
All Load shedding outputs (page 135) are closed at once when the System changes into
island operation state in this way: MCB and MGCB were closed -> MCB opened.
All the time – Function is active regardless of Breaker state (page 473).
All Load shedding outputs (page 135) are never tripped at once when MGCB is closed into
parallel operation.
All Load shedding outputs (page 135) are tripped at once when MGCB is closed into island
operation.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 311

 Load Shedding Based On

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Mains Import / Gensets Power [-]
Default value Mains Import Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9905 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Load Shedding Active (page 311) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint defines which parameter will be used for the Load Shedding.

Mains Import Load Shedding is using the value Mains Import P.

Gensets Power Load Shedding is using the value Total Running P.

6 back to List of setpoints

Load Shedding Level

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Load Reconnection Level (page 313) .. 200 [%] of Nominal DC Shore Power
Range [units]
(page 258)
80 % of Nominal DC Shore Power
Default value Force value YES
(page 258)
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 8884 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Load Shedding Active (page 311) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts decisive level for load disconnection during Load Shedding (page 134) function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 312

 Load Shedding Delay

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.0..600.0 [s]
Default value 10 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 8887 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Load Shedding Active (page 311) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay between load disconnections during Load Shedding (page 134)
function.

6 back to List of setpoints

Load Reconnection Level

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 20 [%] of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
20 % of Nominal DC Shore Power
Default value Force value YES
(page 258)
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 8890 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Load Shedding Active (page 311) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the decisive level between load reconnection during Load Shedding (page 134)
function.

6 back to List of setpoints

Load Reconnection Delay

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0..600 [s]
Default value 10 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 8893 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Load Shedding Active (page 311) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay between load reconnection during Load Shedding (page 134) function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 313

 Auto Load Reconnection

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 9649 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if Load Shedding Active (page 311) != Disabled
Description
This setpoint enables/disables Automatic Load Shedding (page 134).

Rising edge of LBI MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 546) lowers the load
Disabled reduction stage by one while Mains Import P (page 439) drops under Load
Reconnection Level (page 313).
Load reduction stage is lowered by one when Mains Import P (page 439) drops
Enabled under Load Reconnection Level (page 313) and period of Load Reconnection
Delay (page 313) elapsed from last load reduction stage lowering.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 314

 Group: Power Management

Subgroup: Power Management Control

#Power Management Mode

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] ABS [kW] / N/A Mode / REL [%]
Default value ABS [kW] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9874 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects the Power Management (page 165) function mode.

The Power Management (page 165) is based on Nominal DC Shore Power

ABS [kW]
(page 258) of each unit.
Power Management mode which has been set via CAN2 (page 17)
N/A Mode (Communication peripherals (page 17)) is not supported in this controller.
Alarm Wrn Unsupported PMS Mode (page 669) is active.
The Power Management (page 165) is based on relative load, i.e. ratio of
REL [%]
Total Running P (page 462) to Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258).

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 315

 #Priority Auto Swap

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / RunHourEq / N/A Mode / Efficient [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10593 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects the optimization of Power Management (page 165) function.

Optimization is disabled. Priorities are given directly by the values adjusted in

Disabled
the setpoint Priority in each unit.
This method changes thepriorities (not the setpoint Priority in each unit) to
Run Hours Equal equalize running hours of the units or to keep maximal difference of running
hours set by #Run Hours Max Difference (page 335).
Power Management mode, which has been set via CAN2 (page 17)
N/A Mode
(Communication peripherals (page 17)), is not supported in this controller.
This method changes the priorities (not the setpoint Priority in each unit) to
optimize which units are running according to their nominal power, requested
Efficient
Load reserve and Run Hours. For units with the same nominal power also run
hour equalization is being performed.

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 316

 #System Start Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8549 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system activation after the LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560)
has been activated.
Note: System Start Delay countdown is changed to 1 second for parallel operation (Bus is in parallel
with Mains).

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#System Stop Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8550 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system deactivation after the LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560)
has been deactivated.
Note: System Stop Delay countdown is changed to 1 second for parallel operation (Bus is in parallel
with Mains).

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 317

 Dynamic Spinning Reserve

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14126 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable use of the Dynamic Spinning Reserve (page 184) functionality
in power management.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ignore Load Reserve For Island

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Yes / No [-]
Default value No Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 17014 Related applications , MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Application Mode (page 472) = MGCB
Description
This setpoint changes the behavior of Power Management in MGCB application in AUT and TEST mode.
It is used to prevent of overloading of the first Gen-set connected to the dead bus in island operation.

Load reserve condition has to be fulfilled otherwise, the command to close MGCB is
No
not sent.
Load reserve condition does not have to be fulfilled for the closing of MGCB, i.e.
Yes MGCB is closed when the bus is healthy, without checking load reserve
requirements.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 318

 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 1

#Starting Load Reserve 1

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) [kW] (depends on the selected Power
Range [units]
Formats And Units (page 164))
60 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Power Formats And Units (page Force value NO
164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8489 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page 165)
function.
If Load Reserve Set 1 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) drops bellow this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
Note: If the absolute power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #Starting Load
Reserve 2 (page 322), #Starting Load Reserve 3 (page 325) or #Starting Load Reserve 4 (page
328) depending on which load reserve set is selected) determines also the number of Controllers
(that are part of the power management) which will start (according to their priority and nominal
power).

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 319

 #Stopping Load Reserve 1

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 319) .. 32000 [kW] (depends on the selected
Range [units]
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
110 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Force value NO
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8491 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page
165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 1 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) rises over this limit, next Controller
will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 320

 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) [%]
Default value 60 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10648 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 1 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) drops below this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 321) .. 110 [%]
Default value 80 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10652 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 1 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) rises over this limit, next
Controller will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 321

 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 2

#Starting Load Reserve 2

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 323) [kW] (depends on the selected Power
Range [units]
Formats And Units (page 164))
410 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Power Formats And Units (page Force value NO
164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8490 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page 165)
function.
If Load Reserve Set 2 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) drops bellow this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
Note: If the absolute power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #Starting Load
Reserve 2 (page 322) depending on which load reserve set is selected) determines also the number
of Controllers (that are part of the power management) which will start (according to their priority and
nominal power).

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 322

 #Stopping Load Reserve 2

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

#Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 322) .. 32000 [kW] (depends on the selected
Range [units]
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
460 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Force value NO
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8633 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page
165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 2 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) rises over this limit, next Controller
will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 323

 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 2

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 324) [%]
Default value 60 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10649 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 2 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) drops below this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 324) .. 110 [%]
Default value 80 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10653 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 2 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) rises over this limit, next
Controller will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 324

 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 3

#Starting Load Reserve 3

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 3 (page 326) [kW] (depends on the selected Power
Range [units]
Formats And Units (page 164))
410 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Power Formats And Units (page Force value NO
164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8831 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page 165)
function.
If Load Reserve Set 3 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) drops bellow this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 325

 #Stopping Load Reserve 3

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

#Starting Load Reserve 3 (page 325) .. 32000 [kW] (depends on the selected
Range [units]
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
460 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Force value NO
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8833 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page
165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 3 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) rises over this limit, next Controller
will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 326

 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 3

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 3 (page 327) [%]
Default value 60 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10650 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 3 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) drops below this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 3

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 3 (page 327) .. 110 [%]
Default value 80 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10654 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 3 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) rises over this limit, next
Controller will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 327

 Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 4

#Starting Load Reserve 4

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 4 (page 329) [kW] (depends on the selected Power
Range [units]
Formats And Units (page 164))
410 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Power Formats And Units (page Force value NO
164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8832 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page 165)
function.
If Load Reserve Set 4 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) drops bellow this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 328

 #Stopping Load Reserve 4

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

#Starting Load Reserve 4 (page 328) .. 32000 [kW] (depends on the selected
Range [units]
Power Formats And Units (page 164))
460 kW (depends on the selected
Default value Power Formats And Units (page Force value NO
164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
Comm object 8834 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = ABS [kW]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Reserve (page 460) for Power Management (page
165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 4 is activated and Actual Reserve (page 460) rises over this limit, next Controller
will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 329

 #Starting Rel Load Reserve 4

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 4 (page 330) [%]
Default value 60 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10651 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required minimal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 4 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) drops below this limit, next
Controller will be started.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 4

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 4 (page 330) .. 110 [%]
Default value 80 % Force value NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10655 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Power Management Mode (page 315) = REL [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts required maximal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for Power Management
(page 165) function.
If Load Reserve Set 4 is activated and Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) rises over this limit, next
Controller will be stopped.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543), LOAD RES 3
ACTIVE (PAGE 544) and LOAD RES 4 ACTIVE (PAGE 545). If none of these inputs is active the Load
Reserve Set 1 is selected.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 330

 Subgroup: Minimal Running Power

#Min Run Power 1

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [kW] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
210 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value NO
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 9584 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts required Minimal Running Power (page 464) of Controllers if Minimal Running
Power 1 is chosen.
There are 3 Minimal Running Power options. This one is activated by LBI MIN RUN POWER ACT 1 (PAGE
554).
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Min Run Power 2

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [kW] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
210 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value NO
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 9585 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts required Minimal Running Power (page 464) of Controllers if Minimal Running
Power 2 is chosen.
There are 3 Minimal Running Power options. This one is activated by LBI MIN RUN POWER ACT 2 (PAGE
554).
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 331

 #Min Run Power 3

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [kW] (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
210 kW (depends on the selected Power
Default value Force value NO
Formats And Units (page 164))
Step 1 kW (depends on the selected Power Formats And Units (page 164))
MCB,
Comm object 9586 Related applications
MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts required Minimal Running Power (page 464) of Controllers if Minimal Running
Power 3 is chosen.
There are 3 Minimal Running Power options. This one is activated by LBI MIN RUN POWER ACT 3 (PAGE
555).
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Start/Stop Timing

#Next Engine Start Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 5s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8492 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay before next Controller is started after Actual Reserve (page 460) /
Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) drops bellow Starting Load Reserve of currently active Load
Reserve Set.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 332

 #Next Engine Stop Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Default value 20 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8494 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay before next Controller is stopped after Actual Reserve (page 460) /
Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) rises over Stopping Load Reserve of currently active Load
Reserve Set.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Slow Stop Protection

#Slow Stop Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8495 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts for how long the next Controllers will suppress their own Slow Stop alarms to give
chance to another Controller to start and replace the defective one.
Note: If there is no Controller available to start, the Slow Stop alarms are not suppressed.

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 333

 Subgroup: Over Load Next Start Protection

#Overload Next Start Protection

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14942 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Overload Next Start Protection. It makes the next Controller (in priority
order) to start when the load excises the value given by the setpoint #Overload Next Start Level (page
334) right after the delay #Overload Next Start Delay (page 335). #Overload Next Start Protection
requires Starting Load Reserve condition to be fulfilled in order to be used.

Disabled Protection is disabled.

Protection is enabled. If Total Running P (page 462) of PM Controllers
related to Running Nominal Power In PM (page 463) is over #Overload
Enabled
Next Start Level (page 334), another Controller is started after #Overload
Next Start Delay (page 335).

IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Overload Next Start Level

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%] of Running Nominal Power In PM (page 463)
80 % of Running Nominal Power In
Default value Force value NO
PM (page 463)
Step 1 % of Running Nominal Power In PM (page 463)
Comm object 14941 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Overload Next Start Protection (page 334) = Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the minimal load for #Overload Next Start Protection (page 334).
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 334

 #Overload Next Start Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 5 [s]
Default value 1s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8493 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if #Overload Next Start Protection (page 334) = Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for #Overload Next Start Protection (page 334).
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Run Hours Equalization

#Run Hours Max Difference

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [h]
Default value 100 h Force value NO
Step 1h
Comm object 9919 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal difference between Running hours of Controllers in Power
Management (page 165) function if #Priority Auto Swap (page 316).
If the difference between Running hours of Controllers is over this limit, priorities are swapped.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 335

 Subgroup: Efficient Mode

#Power Band Change Up Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 10 s Force value NO
Step [s]
Comm object 8896 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand rose above
the upper limit of the current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap
(page 316) = Efficient.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Power Band Change Down Delay

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 10 s Force value NO
Step [s]
Comm object 10795 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand drops below
the lower limit of the current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap
(page 316) = Efficient.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is shared via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal
Diagram (page 33) . Change of this setpoint will be reflected in all controllers.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 336

 Subgroup: Group Settings

Control Group

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 [-] Force value YES
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 10589 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts control group in which the particular controller belongs to.
If there are no logical groups on the site, adjust this setpoint to 1. See more information in chapter
Control Groups (page 112).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group Link L

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 [-] Force value YES
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 10590 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If the input GROUP LINK (PAGE 542) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link"
information for two Control groups (to get more information refer to the chapter Control Groups (page
112)). This setpoint is used to select which group is located at the left side of the group link breaker. (bus
tie breaker). If this particular controller is not used for the group link function, adjust this setpoint to 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 337

 Group Link R

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 [-] Force value YES
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 10591 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If the input GROUP LINK (PAGE 542) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link"
information for two Control groups (to get more information refer to the chapter Control Groups (page
112)). This setpoint is used to select which group is located at the right side of the group link breaker.
(bus tie breaker). If this particular controller is not used for the group link function, adjust this setpoint to 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Load Control

Subgroup: Regulation Loops

Load Gain

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 10,0 [%] Force value YES
Step 0,1 [%]
Comm object 8659 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the load control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 338

 Load Int

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Default value 50 [%] Force value YES
Step 1 [%]
Comm object 8713 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the integration factor (I-factor) of the load control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Load Transfer

Close Transfer Max Duration

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] < 0,1 = 0,0; 0,1 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Force value YES
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8661 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The time of parallel work of System and Mains in close transition.

6 back to List of setpoints

Open Transfer Min Break

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] < 0,1 = 0,0; 0,1 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 1,0 s Force value YES
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8303 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Minimal duration of break in open transition when Transfer Gen To Mains (page 341) or Transfer
Mains To Gen (page 340) is chosen as open transfer.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 339

 Transfer Mains To Gen

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Open / Close Only / Close Prim / SoftTransf [-]
Default value SoftTransf Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12969 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the type of transfer of load from Mains to System.

Transfer of the load from Mains to System without parallel work and
synchronization (one breaker opens and second is closed - checking
Open
feedbacks). The setpoint Open Transfer Min Break (page 339) sets the
minimal duration of break.
Transfer of the load from Mains to System with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Only
Duration (page 339).
In case of synchronization fail, MCB stays close and System is stopped.
Transfer of the load from Mains to System with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Prim
Duration (page 339).
In case of synchronization fail, open transfer is done.
Transfer of the load from Mains to System with parallel work and soft loading
of the System. This function is proceeded like the closed transfer, but there is
time limitation of loading of theSystem adjusted via setpoint Load Ramp
SoftTransf
(page 343). The transfer is succeed only when theSystem is fully loaded –
Mains is fully unloaded (level of load when Mains is considered as unloaded is
adjusted via setpoint Mains Unload MCB Open Window (page 342)).

Note: Close transfer of load is also affected by setpoint Mains Measurement P (page 250).

Note: The behavior of transition of load in MAN mode is adjusted via setpoint CB Control In MAN
Mode (page 248).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 340

 Transfer Gen To Mains

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Open / Close Only / Close Prim / SoftTransf [-]
Default value SoftTransf Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 14688 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the type of transfer of load from System to Mains.

Transfer of the load from System to Mains without parallel work and
synchronization (one breaker opens and second is closed - checking
Open
feedbacks). The setpoint Open Transfer Min Break (page 339) sets the
minimal duration of break.
Transfer of the load from System to Mains with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Only Duration (page 339).
In case of synchronization fail, MGCB stays closed and System keeps
running.
Transfer of the load from System to Mains with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Prim
Duration (page 339).
In case of synchronization fail, open transfer is done.
Transfer of the load from System to Mains with parallel work and soft
unloading of the System. This function is proceeded like the closed transfer,
but there is time limitation of unloading of the System adjusted via setpoint
SoftTransf
Load Ramp (page 343). The transfer is succeed only when the System is
fully unloaded (level of load when System is considered as unloaded is
adjusted via setpoint Generator Unload MGCB Open Level (page 342)).

Note: The behavior of transition of load in MAN mode is adjusted via setpoint CB Control In MAN
Mode (page 248).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 341

 Generator Unload MGCB Open Level

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%] of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
10 % of Nominal DC Shore Power
Default value Force value YES
(page 258)
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 8547 Related applications , MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Application Mode Select (page 237) = MGCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the required value of the Total Running P (page 462) (power of all Gen-sets
connected to the bus) when the MGCB is opened during unloading of the system.
Note: This setpoint is usually higher than 0 to prevent the System going to reverse power.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Unload MCB Open Window

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%] of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power
Default value Force value YES
(page 258)
Step 1 % of Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)
Comm object 14694 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value which defines the level where the Mains is considered as unloaded. When
this window is reached and it is required to open MCB, the MCB will be opened and remaining load in the
window will be transfer to Controllers.
IMPORTANT: If the window is set too high the Mains can be considered as unloaded
and MCB will be opened while there is not enough reserve power on Controllers. This can
cause overload of Controllers and blackout.

IMPORTANT: This window and the setpoint Minimal Power PTM (page 277) must be set in
the way where MCB opening will not be blocked by Minimal Power PTM level while all
available Controllers are running in Load Shar.

Note: This setpoint is window. It means that when you adjust this setpoint to 10%, there is window
from -10% to +10%. The reason is Import/Export function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 342

 Load Ramp

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 200 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 8658 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the ramping time of Required P (page 466) to Required P Target (page 465)
while loading/unloading.
The ramping time is set for ΔP which is given by the value Running Nominal Power Of All (page 463).
Example: Running Nominal Power Of All (page 463) = 20 kW, Load Ramp = 10 seconds. The
ramp is changing with speed 20 kW per 10 seconds (2 kW/s) to the zero value.

6 back to List of setpoints

Soft Unload Ramp

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 1800 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 16489 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the ramping time of the Required P (page 466) to the Required P Target (page
465) while soft unloading when MGCB is requested to be opened.
The Required P reach the zero value at the end of the timer. The ramping time is set for ΔP which is given
by the value Running Nominal Power Of All (page 463).
Example: Running Nominal Power Of All (page 463) = 20 kW, Soft Unload Ramp = 10
seconds. The ramp is changing with speed 20 kW per 10 seconds (2 kW/s) to the zero value.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 343

 Soft Unload

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Normal / Aux CT on Load / Aux CT on Gen [-]
Default value Normal Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12201 Related applications , MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines which parameter will be used for the soft unloading.

The unload process is based on the value Total Running P (page 462).
The MGCB is opened when value Total Running P (page 462) is lower
Normal than limit Generator Unload MGCB Open Level (page 342) (rated from
Nominal DC Shore Power (page 258)). MGCB is opened latest when
Close Transfer Max Duration (page 339) elapsed.
The unload process is based on the value Aux Power (page 450). The
aux CT has to be located on the load L1. The value of power flowing
through MGCB is calculated as subtitution of Aux Power - Mains Import
Aux CT on Load P. The MGCB is opened when value of power flowing through MGCB is
lower than limit Generator Unload MGCB Open Level (page 342) (rated
from Nominal Mains Import). MGCB is opened latest when Close
Transfer Max Duration (page 339) elapsed.
The unload process is based on the value Aux Power (page 450). The
aux CT has to be located on the bus L1 to measure the power flowing
through the MGCB directly. The MGCB is opened when value of power
Aux CT on Gen
flowing through MGCB is lower than limit Generator Unload MGCB
Open Level (page 342) (rated from Nominal Mains Import). MGCB is
opened latest when Close Transfer Max Duration (page 339) elapsed.

Image 7.5 : Aux CT on Load

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 344

 Image 7.6 : Aux CT on Gen (Bus)

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: PF Control

Subgroup: Regulation Loops

PF Gain

Setpoint group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 200.0 [%]
Default value 10.0 [%] Force value YES
Step 0.1 [%]
Comm object 8503 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the PF control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 345

 PF Int

Setpoint group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Default value 50 [%] Force value YES
Step 1 [%]
Comm object 8721 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the integration factor (I-factor) of the PF control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 346

 Group: Synchronization

Subgroup: Synchronization

Synchronization Type

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] PhaseMatch / SlipSynchr [-]
Default value PhaseMatch Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 14802 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the type of Synchronization (page 108).
PhaseMatch
This type of synchronization is based on voltage and phase shift match. Limits are adjusted via
setpoints Voltage Window (page 348) and Phase Window (page 349). When voltage and phase
shift match the breaker close command is sent after Dwell Time (page 349) is elapsed.
SlipSynchr
This type of synchronization regulates the voltage to match Voltage Window (page 348) and Bus
Frequency (page 458) to match theSlip Frequency (page 350). When this frequency is reached,
Dwell Time (page 349) starts to be counted down and when elapses, breaker close command is
sent.
IMPORTANT: The breaker close command is sent in advance due to breaker latency
which is set via setpoint MGCB Latency (page 350) / MCB Latency (page 351).

Note: Synchronization is not allowed if there is any already synchronized Mains Controller in the
control group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 347

 Synchronization Timeout

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 1800 [s] / No Timeout
Default value 60 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 8657 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum duration of Synchronization (page 108).
Note: If this setpoint is adjusted to No Timeout then automatic restart of synchronization occurs
every 180s. This method helps to synchronize successfully even in difficult conditions.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Window

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 100,0 [%]
Default value 10,0 % Force value YES
Step 0,1 %
Comm object 8650 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal voltage difference between respective phases of Mains and Bus for
Synchronization (page 108). (Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458), Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445), Bus
Voltage L2-N (page 458),Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445), …)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 348

 Phase Window

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 90 [°]
Default value 10 ° Force value YES
Step 1°
Comm object 8652 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Synchronization Type (page 347) = PhaseMatch
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal Slip Angle (page 448) for Synchronization (page 108).
In order to disable breaker close command, adjust this setpoint to 0. Synchronization procedure will be
active for Synchronization Timeout (page 348) or until breaker is closed from an external device.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus to Mains Phase Shift

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] -120 .. 120 [°]
Default value 0° Force value YES
Step 1°
Comm object 9578 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to compensate phase shift which is caused by transformer.

6 back to List of setpoints

Dwell Time

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,3 s Force value YES
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8653 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The period of time that the phase angle difference must be within Phase Window (page 349) and
voltage difference within Voltage Window (page 348) before the breaker is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 349

 Slip Frequency

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] -0,50 .. 0,50 [Hz]
Default value -0,25 Hz Force value YES
Step 0,01 Hz
Comm object 14798 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr
Description
This setpoint adjusts the required Bus Frequency (page 458) during synchronization while
Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr.

6 back to List of setpoints

Slip Frequency Window

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,01 .. 0,50 [Hz]
Default value 0,15 Hz Force value YES
Step 0,01 Hz
Comm object 14799 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr
Description
Window of slip frequency for slip synchronization (Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr).

6 back to List of setpoints

MGCB Latency

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 20 .. 1 000 [ms]
Default value 80 ms Force value YES
Step 1 ms
Comm object 14800 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr and Application Mode
Setpoint visibility
Select (page 237) = MGCB
Description
Latency of MGCB. This setpoint is enable, when Synchronization Type (page 347) has SlipSynchro
value. Synchronization Type (page 347) setting value of this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 350

 MCB Latency

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 20 .. 1 000 [ms]
Default value 80 ms Force value YES
Step 1 ms
Comm object 14801 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr
Description
Latency of MCB.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is enable, when Synchronization Type (page 347) has Split
Synchro value

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency Regulation Loop

Frequency Gain

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 10,0 [%] Force value YES
Step 0,1 [%]
Comm object 8715 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the frequency control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 351

 Frequency Int

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Default value 50 [%] Force value YES
Step 1 [%]
Comm object 8716 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the integration factor (I-factor) of the frequency control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

Angle Gain

Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 10,0 [%] Force value YES
Step 0,1 [%]
Comm object 8718 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting of the gain factor (P-factor) of the phase angle P-control loop.
Note: During synchronization, first the frequency loop is started to match the System frequency with
the mains or bus and after that the phase angle loop is started to match the phase angle.

Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 352

 Subgroup: Voltage Regulation Loop

Voltage Gain

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 200.0 [%]
Default value 10.0 [%] Force value YES
Step 0.1 [%]
Comm object 8501 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the voltage control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Int

Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Default value 50 [%] Force value YES
Step 1 [%]
Comm object 8720 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the integration factor (I-factor) of the voltage control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation Loops (page 195) for more information.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 353

 Group: User Buttons

Subgroup: User Buttons

User Button 1

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20826 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 1 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 1 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 1 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 1 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 2

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20827 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 2 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 2 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 2 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 2 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 354

 User Button 3

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20828 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 3 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 3 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 3 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 3 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 4

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20829 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 4 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 4 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 4 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 4 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 355

 User Button 5

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20830 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 5 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 5 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 5 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 5 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 6

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20831 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 6 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 6 is controlled by command frominternal display.

Value of the User Button 6 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 6 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 356

 User Button 7

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20832 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 7 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 7 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 7 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 7 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 8

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20833 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 8 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 8 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 8 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 8 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 357

 User Button 9

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20834 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 9 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 9 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 9 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 9 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 10

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20835 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 10 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 10 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 10 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 10 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 358

 User Button 11
Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20836 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 11 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 11 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 11 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 11 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 12

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20837 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 12 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 12 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 12 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 12 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 359

 User Button 13

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20838 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 13 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 13 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 13 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 13 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 14

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20839 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 14 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 14 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 14 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 14 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 360

 User Button 15

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20840 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 15 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 15 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 15 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 15 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

User Button 16

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN ON / MAN OFF [-]
Default value COMMAND Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 20841 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of User Button 16 which is part of User Buttons (page 199).

COMMAND User Button 16 is controlled by command from internal display.

Value of the User Button 16 is still 1.
Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before
MAN ON
switching to COMMAND, otherwise value of the User Button 1 will be 1 until
command is received.
MAN OFF Value of the User Button 16 is still 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 361

 Group: Scheduler

Subgroup: Time & Date

Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 0:0:0 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24554 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Real time clock adjustment.
6 back to List of setpoints

Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] YYYY-MM-DD [-]
Default value 2017-01-01 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24553 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Actual date adjustment.
6 back to List of setpoints

Time Stamp Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Off / 1 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Force value YES
Step 1 min
Comm object 8979 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 362

 Time Zone

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

DST Switching Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / Auto / Manual
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20250 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoints is used to enable or disable daylight saving time.
AUTO - activation / deactivation of the DST, and changing of the RTC Time value accordingly is
performed automatically by the controller. The user always sees valid local time without any action
from his side.
MANUAL - activation, and deactivation of the DST is performed manually by the user via the
setpoint Time mode. Changing of the RTC Time value accordingly is then performed
automatically by the controller. So the user does not need to readjust the RTC time, he only needs
to select the proper Time Mode (page 364).
DISABLED - Time mode is fixedly set to STD and the function does not perform any changes of
RTC time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 363

 Time Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] STD / DST
Default value STD Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20249 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if DST Switching Mode = Manual
Description
In manual DST Switching Mode (page 363) this input is used to adjust the actual time mode. If DST
Switching Mode is set to any other option, this input is not taken into account.
6 back to List of setpoints

DST Period Rule

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Australia / Chile / Europe / Mexico / New Zealand / Paraguay / US/Canada
Default value Europe Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20251 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if DST Switching Mode = Auto
Description
Selection of the rule that will be applied for the calculation of the DST validity period.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 364

 Subgroup: Timer 1

Timer 1 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Disabled / Manual On / No Func / Mode OFF / Rem Start/Stop / TEST / Test OnLd /
Range [units]
MFail Blk [-]
Default value Disable Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15358 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 1. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 1 Setup (page 366).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 572) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disabled The Timer is disabled.

Manual On The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing
purposes).
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the
condition is fulfilled.
Mode OFF The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary
input.
TEST The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote
TEST.
TEST OnLd The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On
Load binary input.
MFail Blk The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block
binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 365

 Timer 1 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Force value NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10969 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 1 Function (page 365) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 1. See Exercise Timers (page 123) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 366

 Subgroup: Timer 2

Timer 2 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Disabled / Manual On / No Func / Mode OFF / Rem Start/Stop / TEST / Test OnLd /
Range [units]
MFail Blk [-]
Default value Disabled [-] Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15359 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 2. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 2 Setup (page 368).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE 573) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disabled The Timer is disabled.

Manual On The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing
purposes).
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the
condition is fulfilled.
Mode OFF The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary
input.
TEST The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote
TEST.
TEST OnLd The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On
Load binary input.
MFail Blk The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block
binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 367

 Timer 2 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Force value NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10970 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 2 Function (page 367) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 2. See Exercise Timers (page 123) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 368

 Subgroup: Timer 3

Timer 3 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Disabled / Manual On / No Func / Mode OFF / Rem Start/Stop / TEST / Test OnLd /
Range [units]
MFail Blk [-]
Default value Disable Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15360 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 3. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 3 Setup (page 370).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 3 (PAGE 573) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disabled The Timer is disabled.

Manual On The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing
purposes).
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the
condition is fulfilled.
Mode OFF The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary
input.
TEST The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote
TEST.
TEST OnLd The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On
Load binary input.
MFail Blk The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block
binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 369

 Timer 3 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Force value NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10971 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 3 Function (page 369) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 3. See Exercise Timers (page 123) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 370

 Subgroup: Timer 4

Timer 4 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Disabled / Manual On / No Func / Mode OFF / Rem Start/Stop / TEST / Test OnLd /
Range [units]
MFail Blk [-]
Default value Disable Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15361 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 4. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 4 Setup (page 372).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 4 (PAGE 573) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disabled The Timer is disabled.

Manual On The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing
purposes).
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the
condition is fulfilled.
Mode OFF The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary
input.
TEST The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote
TEST.
TEST OnLd The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On
Load binary input.
MFail Blk The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block
binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 371

 Timer 4 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Force value NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10973 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 4 Function (page 371) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 4. See Exercise Timers (page 123) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 372

 Subgroup: Timer 5

Timer 5 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Disabled / Manual On / No Func / Mode OFF / Rem Start/Stop / TEST / Test OnLd /
Range [units]
MFail Blk [-]
Default value Disable Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15362 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 5. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 5 Setup (page 374).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 5 (PAGE 574) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disabled The Timer is disabled.

Manual On The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing
purposes).
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the
condition is fulfilled.
Mode OFF The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary
input.
TEST The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote
TEST.
TEST OnLd The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On
Load binary input.
MFail Blk The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block
binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 373

 Timer 5 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Force value NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10974 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 5 Function (page 373) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 5. See Exercise Timers (page 123) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 374

 Subgroup: Timer 6

Timer 6 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Disabled / Manual On / No Func / Mode OFF / Rem Start/Stop / TEST / Test OnLd /
Range [units]
MFail Blk [-]
Default value Disable Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15363 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 6. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 6 Setup (page 376).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 6 (PAGE 574) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disabled The Timer is disabled.

Manual On The Timer is disabled but his binary output is activated (can be used for testing
purposes).
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of the Timer is activated once the
condition is fulfilled.
Mode OFF The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote OFF binary
input.
TEST The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the binary input Remote
TEST.
TEST OnLd The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Remote TEST On
Load binary input.
MFail Blk The binary output of the Timer is internally connected to the Mains Fail Block
binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 375

 Timer 6 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Force value NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10975 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 6 Function (page 375) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 6. See Exercise Timers (page 123) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Plug-In Modules

Subgroup: Slot A

Slot A

Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24280 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Slot B

Slot B

Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24279 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 376

 6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Ethernet

Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings

IP Address Mode

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Manual / Automatic / Disabled [-]
Default value Automatic Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24259 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted on Communication
peripherals (page 17).

Manual: The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints. This method should
be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When this type of
connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This means that
it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
Automatic: The Ethernet connection settings is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings is shown in related values. If the process of
obtaining the settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the values
000.000.000.000 are shown.
Disabled: The Ethernet terminal is disabled.

IMPORTANT: When the mode is switched from Automatic to Manual the TCP/IP settings
will be changed to the values in the related setpoints. In case you are using Ethernet 2 to
connect the CU you will be disconnected. Turn off the setpoint hiding function to
manually change the TCP/IP settings to same values obtained via DHCP so you will not be
disconnected when changing mode.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 377

 DNS Mode

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Manual / Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Force value
Step [-]
Comm object 24101 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if IP Address Mode (page 377) = Automatic
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses for Communication peripherals (page 17)
manually, even with the IP Address Mode (page 377) set to Automatic.

Automatic: DNS server addresses are automatically obtained from a DHCP server.
IP address can be adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet
Manual: access policy related issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically
obtained from a DHCP server do not work

6 back to List of setpoints

IP Firewall

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Related
Comm object 24092 MCB, MGCB
applications
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoints enables or disables the built-in Firewall (page 130) functionality for Communication
peripherals (page 17).

Disabled: The firewall function is switched off

Enabled: The firewall function is switched on.

IMPORTANT: Loss of connection can happen when enabling the firewall and using remote
connection via Internet

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 378

 Subgroup: AirGate Settings

AirGate Connection

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 24365 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables AirGate connection (page 63) function.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 379

 AirGate Port

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 54440 [-] Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 24096 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This port is used for TCP communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 5440 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings

ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

EthernetCM-
Setpoint group EthernetCM-4G- Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 24098 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for
this time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 380

 Direct Connection

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24099 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP
address of the controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP
address.

6 back to List of setpoints

Direct Connection Port

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 [-] Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 24374 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection on Communication peripherals (page 17).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 381

 Subgroup: Modbus Server Settings

Modbus Server

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24337 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enables or disables Modbus communication via Communication peripherals (page 17).

6 back to List of setpoints

Modbus Client Inactivity Timeout

Ethernet
CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
ETH Interface 3 -
Modbus
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 24097 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Modbus connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a Modbus client does not communicate for
this time.
Note: This setpoint is shared with other Modbus Client Inactivity Timeout setpoints.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 382

 Subgroup: SNMP Settings

SNMP Agent

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Disabled / SNMP v1/v2c / SNMP v3 [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24336 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoints Enables or disables Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Agent.
Note: SNMP v3 has upgraded encryption, remote configuration, and security (extra setpoints are
available).

Note: It is supported only User-Based security model (USM, RFC-3414). View-based Access
Control Model (VACM, RFC-3415) is not supported.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Traps IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-EthernetEthernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value - Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24095 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 383) != Disabled
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 383

 SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-EthernetEthernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value - Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24094 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 383) != Disabled
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: E-mail Settings

SMTP Server Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24093 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) and port number (e.g. :9925) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider or IT
manager for this information.
Example: Enter the IP address "74.125.39.109" and port number "9925" as
"74.125.39.109:9925".

Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 384

 SMTP Sender Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23878 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active
e-mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Name

CM-EthernetCM-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
4G-GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Related
Comm object 23877 MCB, MGCB
applications
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP
server does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 385

 SMTP User Password

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23876 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Encryption

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] NONE / SSL/TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value NONE Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24076 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects encryption type for SMTP session.

NONE Session is without of any encryption.

SSL/TLS Encrypted channel is created first and only after that session is created.
Session is created without of encryption and after command STARTTLS it
STARTTLS
is switched to encrypted session.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 386

 E-mail Address 1

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 2

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 3

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 387

 E-mail Address 4

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Messages Settings

E-mail/SMS Language

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Depends on controller’s supported languages. [-]
Default value English Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of Event, Warning, etc. e-mails.

6 back to List of setpoints

Event Message

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Event Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 388

 MPR Message

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Mains Protection Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

Stp Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Enabled/Disabled
Default value Enabled Force value
Step [-]
Comm object 8485 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Description

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Warning Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 389

 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization

NTP Clock Synchronization

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24075 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable synchronization of the controller's time with the exact time from a
NTP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

NTP Server

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24074 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
NTP server address for time synchronization.
Note: Only valid IP address or domain can be inserted.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 390

 Time Zone

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-RS232-485

Subgroup: COM1 Setting

COM1 Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24522 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 391

 COM1 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24341 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
391)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM1 Modbus Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23867 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU.

Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 392

 COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24477 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
391)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: COM2 Setting

COM2 Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24451 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24340 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 393

 Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
393)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Modbus Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23866 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU.

Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24420 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
393)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM2 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 394

 Group: CM-4G-GPS

Subgroup: Cellular Interface

Internet Connection

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24315 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.

6 back to List of setpoints

Network Mode

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 2G / 3G / 4G / Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24132 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts preferred connection type of CM-4G-GPS module.

6 back to List of setpoints

Access Point Name

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value internet Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24363 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the network, provided by GSM operator.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 395

 Connection Check IP1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23978 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 396

 Connection Check IP2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23977 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 397

 Connection Check IP3

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23976 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 398

 Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings

DNS Mode

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Default value Automatic Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23988 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the Internet Connection (page
395) set to Automatic.

Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 399) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 400) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24314 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If DNS Mode (page 399) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 399) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 399

 DNS IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23986 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If DNS Mode (page 399) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is
needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 399) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

IP Firewall

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23959 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.

DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 400

 Subgroup: AirGate Settings

AirGate Connection

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled/ Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23968 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-4G-GPS.

DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the "AirGate" service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used.
The AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page
419).

IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 401

 Airgate Port

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 54440 Force value NO
Step 1
Comm object 24091 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
This port is used for TCP communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 54440 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings

Direct Connection

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23961 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 402

 Direct Connection Port

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23960 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
6 back to List of setpoints

ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

EthernetCM-
Setpoint group EthernetCM-4G- Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 24098 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for
this time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 403

 Subgroup: E-mail Settings

SMTP Server Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24093 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) and port number (e.g. :9925) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider or IT
manager for this information.
Example: Enter the IP address "74.125.39.109" and port number "9925" as
"74.125.39.109:9925".

Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Sender Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23878 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active
e-mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 404

 SMTP User Name

CM-EthernetCM-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
4G-GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Related
Comm object 23877 MCB, MGCB
applications
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP
server does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Password

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23876 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 405

 SMTP Encryption

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] NONE / SSL/TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value NONE Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24076 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects encryption type for SMTP session.

NONE Session is without of any encryption.

SSL/TLS Encrypted channel is created first and only after that session is created.
Session is created without of encryption and after command STARTTLS it
STARTTLS
is switched to encrypted session.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 1

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 406

 E-mail Address 2

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 3

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 4

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 407

 Subgroup: Messages Settings

Telephone Number 1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24295 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 408

 Telephone Number 3

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24143 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 4

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24142 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 409

 E-mail/SMS Language

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Depends on controller’s supported languages. [-]
Default value English Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of Event, Warning, etc. e-mails.

6 back to List of setpoints

Event Message

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Event Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

MPR Message

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Mains Protection Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 410

 Wrn Message

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Warning Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: GPS Settings

GPS Tracking

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23975 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
If GPS tracking is enabled the module sends position/speed data to the controller with period 10 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 411

 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization

NTP Clock Sync

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23964 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
The period of synchronization is 1 hour or when the cotnroller is reset or when the setpoint is reset
(Enabled->Disabled->Enabled).

6 back to List of setpoints

NTP Server

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23963 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
NTP server address.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 412

 GPS Clock Sync

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23974 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 395)
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable synchronization of the controller's time with the exact time from
GPS.
The module sends UTC timestamp to the controller after reset/power on and then in period of 60 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Zone

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 413

 Group: CM-Ethernet

Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings

IP Address Mode

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] MANUAL / AUTOMATIC / DISABLED [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23939 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.

MANUAL The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask,
GateIP, DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When
this type of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This
means that it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
AUTOMATIC The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the
process of obtaining the settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the
value 000.000.000.000 is copied to the setpoint IP address and the module
continues to try to obtain the settings.
DISABLED The Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 414

 IP Address

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value 192.168.1.254 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23950 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 414)
Description
The setpoint is used to set the address when you are in static mode .
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet
interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.
Note: Only valid IP address can be inserted.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subnet Mask

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 255.255.255.0 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23949 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 414)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 415

 Gateway IP

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 192.168.1.1 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23948 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 414)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS Mode

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Default value Automatic Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23921 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the IP Address Mode (page
414) set to Automatic.

Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 417) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 417) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 416

 DNS IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23947 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted .
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP
addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23946 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP
addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 414) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 417

 IP Firewall

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23920 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.

DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AirGate Settings

AirGate Connection

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 24365 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables AirGate connection (page 63) function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 418

 AirGate Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Port

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 54440 [-] Force value NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 24096 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This port is used for TCP communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 5440 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 419

 Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings

Direct Connection

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23961 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

6 back to List of setpoints

Direct Connection Port

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23960 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 420

 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

EthernetCM-
Setpoint group EthernetCM-4G- Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value YES
Step 1s
Comm object 24098 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for
this time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: MODBUS Settings

MODBUS Server

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23937 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enable or disable Modbus communication via ethernet interface.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 421

 MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Force value NO
Step 1s
Comm object 24097 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Modbus connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a Modbus client does not communicate for this
time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: SNMP Settings

SNMP Agent

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23936 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enable or disable SNMP Agent.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Trap Format

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] v1Trap / v2Notif / v2Inform [-]
Default value v1Trap Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23922 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of SNMP traps.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 422

 SNMP Traps IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-EthernetEthernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value - Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24095 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 383) != Disabled
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-EthernetEthernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value - Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24094 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 383) != Disabled
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP RD Community String

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value public Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24335 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 383) != Disabled
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 423

 SNMP WR Community String

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value private Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24334 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 383) = SNMP v1/v2c
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: E-mail Settings

SMTP Server Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24093 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) and port number (e.g. :9925) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider or IT
manager for this information.
Example: Enter the IP address "74.125.39.109" and port number "9925" as
"74.125.39.109:9925".

Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 424

 SMTP Sender Address

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23878 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active
e-mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Name

CM-EthernetCM-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
4G-GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Related
Comm object 23877 MCB, MGCB
applications
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP
server does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 425

 SMTP User Password

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23876 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Encryption

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] NONE / SSL/TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value NONE Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24076 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects encryption type for SMTP session.

NONE Session is without of any encryption.

SSL/TLS Encrypted channel is created first and only after that session is created.
Session is created without of encryption and after command STARTTLS it
STARTTLS
is switched to encrypted session.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 426

 E-mail Address 1

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 2

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail Address 3

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 427

 E-mail Address 4

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Enter a valid e-mail address where event and alarm messages will be sent.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Messages Settings

Telephone Number 1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 428

 Telephone Number 2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24295 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 3

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24143 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 429

 Telephone Number 4

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24142 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility (missing or bad snippet)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

E-mail/SMS Language

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Depends on controller’s supported languages. [-]
Default value English Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of Event, Warning, etc. e-mails.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 430

 Event Message

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Event Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

MPR Message

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Mains Protection Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message

CM-EthernetCM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
GPSEthernet
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Force value YES
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables or disables sending of Warning Messages.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 431

 NTP Server

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24074 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
NTP server address for time synchronization.
Note: Only valid IP address or domain can be inserted.

6 back to List of setpoints

NTP Clock Synchronization

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Ethernet
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24075 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable synchronization of the controller's time with the exact time from a
NTP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

NTP Server

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23933 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
NTP server address.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 432

 Time Zone

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0

Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 Force value NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 433

8.1.3 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups
according to their meaning.
For full list of values go to the chapter List of values (page 435)

Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the
case of unsigned values.

List of group of values

Group: Mains 439
Group: Load 449
Group: Gen-sets 451
Group: Bus 458
Group: Power Management 460
Group: Load Control 465
Group: PF Control 466
Group: Control Loops 467
Group: Controller I/O 468
Group: Statistics 469
Group: Info 472
Group: User Buttons 477
Group: Log Bout 477
Group: Plug-in 479
Group: Plug-In I/O 480
Group: CM-4G-GPS 488
Group: CM-Ethernet 492
Group: Ethernet 495
Group: Date/Time 501
Group: PLC 502
Group: SH Modules 526

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 434

 List of values

Group: Mains 439 Mains Current L1 447 Gen-set 21 Power 455

Mains Import P 439 Mains Current L2 447 Gen-set 22 Power 455
Mains Import P L1 439 Mains Current L3 447 Gen-set 23 Power 455
Mains Import P L2 439 Mains Current Unbalance 447 Gen-set 24 Power 455
Mains Import P L3 439 Slip Frequency 448 Gen-set 25 Power 455
Mains Import Q 439 Slip Angle 448 Gen-set 26 Power 456
Mains Import Q L1 440 Max Vector Shift 448 Gen-set 27 Power 456
Mains Import Q L2 440 ROCOF 448 Gen-set 28 Power 456
Mains Import Q L3 440 Max ROCOF 449 Gen-set 29 Power 456
Mains Import S 440 Group: Load 449 Gen-set 30 Power 456
Mains Import S L1 440 Load P 449 Gen-set 31 Power 457
Mains Import S L2 441 Load Q 449 Gen-set 32 Power 457
Mains Import S L3 441 Load PF 450 Group: Bus 458
Mains Power Factor 441 Load Character 450 Bus Frequency 458
Mains Load Character 441 Aux Current 450 Bus Voltage L1-N 458
Mains Power Factor L1 442 Aux Power 450 Bus Voltage L2-N 458
Mains Power Factor L2 442 Group: Gen-sets 451 Bus Voltage L3-N 458
Mains Power Factor L3 442 Gen-set 1 Power 451 Bus Voltage L1-L2 458
Mains Load Character L1 442 Gen-set 2 Power 451 Bus Voltage L2-L3 459
Mains Load Character L2 443 Gen-set 3 Power 451 Bus Voltage L3-L1 459
Mains Load Character L3 443 Gen-set 4 Power 451 Bus Voltage 459
Mains Voltage THD L1 443 Gen-set 5 Power 451 Bus Voltage THD L1 459
Mains Voltage THD L2 443 Gen-set 6 Power 452 Bus Voltage THD L2 459
Mains Voltage THD L3 444 Gen-set 7 Power 452 Bus Voltage THD L3 460
Mains Current THD L1 444 Gen-set 8 Power 452 Bus V Unbalance Ph-N 460
Mains Current THD L2 444 Gen-set 9 Power 452 Bus V Unbalance Ph-Ph 460
Mains Current THD L3 444 Gen-set 10 Power 452 Group: Power Management 460
Mains Frequency 444 Gen-set 11 Power 453 Actual Reserve 460
Mains Voltage L1-N 445 Gen-set 12 Power 453 Actual Reserve 461
Mains Voltage L2-N 445 Gen-set 13 Power 453 Stop Reserve 461
Mains Voltage L3-N 445 Gen-set 14 Power 453 Dynamic Spinning
Mains Voltage L1-L2 445 Gen-set 15 Power 453 Reserve 461

Mains Voltage L2-L3 445 Gen-set 16 Power 454 Dynamic Spinning

Reserve Offset 461
Mains Voltage L3-L1 446 Gen-set 17 Power 454
Total Running P 462
Mains Voltage 446 Gen-set 18 Power 454
Total Running Q 462
Mains V Unabalance Ph-N 446 Gen-set 19 Power 454
Total Running S 462
Mains V Unbalance Ph-Ph 446 Gen-set 20 Power 454

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 435

 Total Running Power Mains kWh Imported 471 Group: Plug-In I/O 480
Factor 462 Mains kVArh Imported 471 EM Analog Input A 1 480
Total Running Load Pulse Counter 1 471 EM Analog Input A 2 480
Character 462 EM Analog Input A 3 480
Pulse Counter 2 471
Total Running Samax 463 EM Analog Input A 4 481
Group: Info 472
Running Nominal Power In Application Mode 472 EM Analog Input A 5 481
PM 463
Controller Mode 472 EM Analog Input A 6 481
Running Nominal Power
Load Shedding Status 472 EM Analog Input A 7 481
Of All 463
Breaker state 473 EM Analog Input A 8 482
Available Nominal Power
In PM 463 Timer Text 473 EM Analog Input A 9 482

Minimal Running Power 464 Connection Type 473 EM Analog Input A 10 482

Actual Relative Reserve 464 Timer Value 473 EM Analog Input A 11 482

Start Relative Reserve 464 ID String 473 EM Analog Input A 12 483

Stop Relative Reserve 464 FW Version 474 EM Analog Input A 13 483

Actual Power Band 465 Application 474 EM Analog Input A 14 483

Next Power Band 465 FW Branch 474 EM Analog Input A 15 483

Forced Value Status 474 EM Analog Input A 16 484
Group: Load Control 465
Required P Target 465 SPI Module A 474 EM Analog Input B 1 484

Required P 466 SPI Module B 475 EM Analog Input B 2 484

System Load Control 466 CAN16 475 EM Analog Input B 3 484

Group: PF Control 466 CAN32 475 EM Analog Input B 4 485

System PF/Q Control 466 Reg16 476 EM Analog Input B 5 485
Required Q 467 Reg32 476 EM Analog Input B 6 485
Required Qrel 467 Gen Loaded 16 476 EM Analog Input B 7 485
Required PF 467 Gen Loaded 32 477 EM Analog Input B 8 486
Required PF Character 467 Group: User Buttons 477 EM Analog Input B 9 486

Group: Control Loops 467 User Buttons 477 EM Analog Input B 10 486
Loadsharing Output 467 Group: Log Bout 477 EM Analog Input B 11 486
Varsharing Output 468 Log Bout 1 477 EM Analog Input B 12 487
Group: Controller I/O 468 Log Bout 2 478 EM Analog Input B 13 487
Battery Voltage 468 Log Bout 3 478 EM Analog Input B 14 487
Binary Inputs 468 Log Bout 4 478 EM Analog Input B 15 487
Binary Outputs 469 Log Bout 5 478 EM Analog Input B 16 488
Group: Statistics 469 Log Bout 6 478 Group: CM-4G-GPS 488
Sum MWh 469 Log Bout 7 479 Modem Status 488
Sum MVArh 469 Log Bout 8 479 AirGate Status 488
Sum MVAh 470 Log Bout 9 479 Network Status 488
Mains kVAh 470 Group: Plug-in 479 GPS Status 489
Mains kWh Exported 470 EM BIO A 479 Signal Strength 489
Mains kVArh Exported 470 EM BIO B 480

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 436

 IP Address 489 Group: Date/Time 501 PLC-AOUT 35 508
Secondary DNS 489 Date 501 PLC-AOUT 36 509
Primary DNS 490 Time 501 PLC-AOUT 37 509
AirGate Servicing Node 490 Time Mode 501 PLC-AOUT 38 509
Network Mode 490 Group: PLC 502 PLC-AOUT 39 509
Network Name 490 PLC-AOUT 1 502 PLC-AOUT 40 509
Modem FW Version 491 PLC-AOUT 2 502 PLC-AOUT 41 510
Speed 491 PLC-AOUT 3 502 PLC-AOUT 42 510
Active Satellites 491 PLC-AOUT 4 502 PLC-AOUT 43 510
Longitude 491 PLC-AOUT 5 502 PLC-AOUT 44 510
Latitude 492 PLC-AOUT 6 503 PLC-AOUT 45 510
Last E-mail Result 492 PLC-AOUT 7 503 PLC-AOUT 46 511
AirGate ID 492 PLC-AOUT 8 503 PLC-AOUT 47 511
Group: CM-Ethernet 492 PLC-AOUT 9 503 PLC-AOUT 48 511
AirGate Status 492 PLC-AOUT 10 503 PLC-AOUT 49 511
Ethernet PHY mode 493 PLC-AOUT 11 504 PLC-AOUT 50 511
ETH Interface Status 493 PLC-AOUT 12 504 PLC-AOUT 51 512
AirGate Servicing Node 493 PLC-AOUT 13 504 PLC-AOUT 52 512
Last E-mail Result 493 PLC-AOUT 14 504 PLC-AOUT 53 512
AirGate ID 494 PLC-AOUT 15 504 PLC-AOUT 54 512
Secondary DNS 494 PLC-AOUT 16 505 PLC-AOUT 55 512
Primary DNS 494 PLC-AOUT 17 505 PLC-AOUT 56 513
Current Gateway 494 PLC-AOUT 18 505 PLC-AOUT 57 513
Current Subnet Mask 495 PLC-AOUT 19 505 PLC-AOUT 58 513
Current IP Address 495 PLC-AOUT 20 505 PLC-AOUT 59 513
MAC Address 495 PLC-AOUT 21 506 PLC-AOUT 60 513
Group: Ethernet 495 PLC-AOUT 22 506 PLC-AOUT 61 514
MAC Address 495 PLC-AOUT 23 506 PLC-AOUT 62 514
Ethernet PHY mode 496 PLC-AOUT 24 506 PLC-AOUT 63 514
Current IP Address 496 PLC-AOUT 25 506 PLC-AOUT 64 514
Current Subnet Mask 496 PLC-AOUT 26 507 PLC-BOUT 1 514
Current Gateway 496 PLC-AOUT 27 507 PLC-BOUT 2 515
Primary DNS 497 PLC-AOUT 28 507 PLC-BOUT 3 515
Secondary DNS 497 PLC-AOUT 29 507 PLC-BOUT 4 515
ETH Interface Status 497 PLC-AOUT 30 507 PLC-BOUT 5 515
AirGate Status 498 PLC-AOUT 31 508 PLC-BOUT 6 515
AirGate ID 498 PLC-AOUT 32 508 PLC-BOUT 7 516
AirGate Servicing Node 499 PLC-AOUT 33 508 PLC-BOUT 8 516
Last E-mail Result 500 PLC-AOUT 34 508 PLC-BOUT 9 516

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 437

PLC-BOUT 10 516 PLC Resource 4 524
PLC-BOUT 11 516 PLC Resource 5 524
PLC-BOUT 12 517 PLC Resource 6 524
PLC-BOUT 13 517 PLC Resource 7 525
PLC-BOUT 14 517 PLC Resource 8 525
PLC-BOUT 15 517 PLC Resource 9 525
PLC-BOUT 16 517 PLC Resource 10 525
PLC-BOUT 17 518 Group: SH Modules 526
PLC-BOUT 18 518 SHBIN-1 526
PLC-BOUT 19 518 SHBIN-2 526
PLC-BOUT 20 518 SHBIN-3 527
PLC-BOUT 21 518 SHBIN-4 527
PLC-BOUT 22 519 SHBIN-5 528
PLC-BOUT 23 519 SHBIN-6 528
PLC-BOUT 24 519 SHBOUT-1 529
PLC-BOUT 25 519 SHBOUT-2 529
PLC-BOUT 26 519 SHBOUT-3 530
PLC-BOUT 27 520 SHBOUT-4 530
PLC-BOUT 28 520 SHBOUT-5 531
PLC-BOUT 29 520 SHBOUT-6 531
PLC-BOUT 30 520 SHAIN-1 1 532
PLC-BOUT 31 520 SHAIN-1 2 532
PLC-BOUT 32 521 SHAIN-1 3 532
PLC-BOUT 33 521 SHAIN-1 4 532
PLC-BOUT 34 521 SHAIN-2 1 533
PLC-BOUT 35 521 SHAIN-2 2 533
PLC-BOUT 36 521 SHAIN-2 3 533
PLC-BOUT 37 522 SHAIN-2 4 533
PLC-BOUT 38 522 6 back to Controller
PLC-BOUT 39 522 objects

PLC-BOUT 40 522
PLC-BOUT 41 522
PLC-BOUT 42 523
PLC-BOUT 43 523
PLC-BOUT 44 523
PLC-BOUT 45 523
PLC Resource 1 523
PLC Resource 2 524
PLC Resource 3 524

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 438

 Group: Mains

Mains Import P

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8703 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported active power [kW] from Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import P L1

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8805 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported active power [kW] from L1 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import P L2

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8806 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported active power [kW] from L2 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import P L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8807 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported active power [kW] from L3 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import Q

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 8704 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported reactive power [kVAr] from Mains.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 439

 Mains Import Q L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8808 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported reactive power [kVAr] from L1 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import Q L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8809 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported reactive power [kVAr] from L2 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import Q L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8810 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported reactive power [kVAr] from L3 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import S

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8811 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported apparent power [kVA] from Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import S L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8812 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported apparent power [kVA] from L1 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 440

 Mains Import S L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8813 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported apparent power [kVA] from L2 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Import S L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8814 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Imported apparent power [kVA] from L3 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Power Factor

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8705 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Power factor of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Load Character

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8709 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Character of Mains load. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load.
Load character of the Mains.
L = inductive load, C = capacitive load, and R = resistive load.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 441

 Mains Power Factor L1

Value
Value
Group Related FW 1.0.0
group
Mains
Units [-]
Comm
8815 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Power factor of the L1 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Power Factor L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8816 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Power factor of the L2 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Power Factor L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8817 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Power factor of the L3 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Load Character L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8818 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Load character of the L1 phase of the Mains.
L = inductive load, C = capacitive load, and R = resistive load.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 442

 Mains Load Character L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8819 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Load character of the L2 phase of the Mains.
L = inductive load, C = capacitive load, and R = resistive load.

6 back to List of values

Mains Load Character L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8820 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Load character of the L3 phase of the Mains.
L = inductive load, C = capacitive load, and R = resistive load.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage THD L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16060 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445).

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage THD L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16061 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Mains Voltage L2-N (page
445).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 443

 Mains Voltage THD L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16062 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Mains Voltage L3-N (page
445).

6 back to List of values

Mains Current THD L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16064 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Mains Current L1 (page 447).

6 back to List of values

Mains Current THD L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16065 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Mains Current L2 (page 447).

6 back to List of values

Mains Current THD L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16066 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Mains Current L3 (page 447).

6 back to List of values

Mains Frequency

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz
Comm object 8211 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Frequency of Mains.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 444

 Mains Voltage L1-N

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8195 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value of Mains voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L2-N

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8196 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value of Mains voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L3-N

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8197 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value of Mains voltage on phase 3.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L1-L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9631 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value of Mains phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L2-L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9632 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value of Mains phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 445

 Mains Voltage L3-L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9633 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value of Mains phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 10666 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Average value of all MainsVoltage phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains V Unabalance Ph-N

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 10549 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445), Mains Voltage
L2-N (page 445), Mains Voltage L3-N (page 445) at a given moment.
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 261).

6 back to List of values

Mains V Unbalance Ph-Ph

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 17337 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445), Mains
Voltage L2-L3 (page 445), Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446) at a given moment.
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 261).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 446

 Mains Current L1

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units A
Comm object 8801 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current of the L1 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Current L2

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units A
Comm object 8802 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current of the L2 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Current L3

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units A
Comm object 8803 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current of the L3 phase of the Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Current Unbalance

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units A
Comm object 17338 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Mains Current L1 (page 447), Mains Current
L2 (page 447) and Mains Current L3 (page 447).
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 261).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 447

 Slip Frequency

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz
Comm object 8224 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Slip frequency during synchronization.

6 back to List of values

Slip Angle

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units °
Comm object 8225 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Slip angle during synchronization.

6 back to List of values

Max Vector Shift

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units °
Comm object 9847 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Maximal measured value of Vector shift (page 137) of the Mains. It is reset to zero always when:
Vector Shift Protection (page 305) = Parallel Only - controller goes to parallel to mains
operation
Vector Shift Protection (page 305) = Enabled - MCB gets closed

6 back to List of values

ROCOF

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz/s
Comm object 9848 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains actual rate of change of frequency measured by ROCOF Protection (page 306).
See ROCOF (page 137) for more information.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 448

 Max ROCOF

Value group Value Group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz/s
Comm object 10049 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains maximal rate of change of frequency measured by ROCOF Protection (page 306)
since the protection got active.
See ROCOF (page 137) for more information.

Setting Reset of value

Vector Shift/ROCOF CB
When MCB closes.
Selector (page 292) = MCB
ROCOF Protection
Vector Shift/ROCOF CB
(page 306) = Enabled
Selector (page 292) = When MGCB closes.
MGCB
ROCOF Protection After entering parallel operation
(page 306) = Parallel (Breaker state (page 473) =
Only ParalOper)

6 back to List of values

Group: Load

Load P

Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10601 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Load's active power.
Note: This value can be also switched into one decimal see Power Formats And Units (page 164).

6 back to List of values

Load Q

Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 10644 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Load's reactive power.
Note: This value can be also switched into one decimal see Power Formats And Units (page 164).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 449

 Load PF

Load Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16158 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Load's power factor.

6 back to List of values

Load Character

Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Related
Comm object 9026 MCB, MGCB
applications
Description
Load's character. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load (Load PF (page
450) = 1).

6 back to List of values

Aux Current

Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units A
Comm object 14996 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This Value is product of aux current measurement which is used for calculation of Aux Power (page
450) for needs of Soft Unload function. Auxiliary current is measured either on Loads or System/Gen-
sets' bus according to setpoint Soft Unload (page 344).

6 back to List of values

Aux Power

Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 16899 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This Value is calculated from the value Aux Current (page 450) and it is used for needs of Soft Unload
function. Auxiliary current is measured either on Loads or System/Gen-sets' bus according to setpoint
Soft Unload (page 344).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 450

 Group: Gen-sets

Gen-set 1 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10935 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 1.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 2 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10936 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 2.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 3 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10937 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 3.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 4 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10938 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 4.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 5 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10939 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 5.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 451

 Gen-set 6 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10940 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 6.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 7 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10941 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 7.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 8 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10942 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 8.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 9 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10943 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 9.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 10 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10944 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 10.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 452

 Gen-set 11 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10945 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 11.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 12 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10946 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 12.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 13 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10947 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 13.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 14 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10948 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 14.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 15 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10949 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 15.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 453

 Gen-set 16 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10950 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 16.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 17 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10951 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 17.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 18 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10952 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 18.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 19 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10953 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 19.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 20 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10954 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 20.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 454

 Gen-set 21 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10955 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 21.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 22 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10956 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 22.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 23 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10957 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 23.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 24 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10958 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 24.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 25 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10959 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 25.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 455

 Gen-set 26 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10960 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 26.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 27 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10961 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 27.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 28 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10962 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 28.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 29 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10963 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 29.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 30 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10964 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 30.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 456

 Gen-set 31 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10965 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 31.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set 32 Power

Value group Gen-sets Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10966 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active power of Mains 32.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 457

 Group: Bus

Bus Frequency

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz
Comm object 20799 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This is the value of Bus frequency.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage L1-N

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8192 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Voltage of the L1 phase of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage L2-N

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8193 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Voltage of the L2 phase of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage L3-N

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8194 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Voltage of the L3 phase of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage L1-L2

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9628 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Phase to phase voltage between the L1 and L2 phases of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 458

 Bus Voltage L2-L3

Value group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9629 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Phase to phase voltage between the L2 and L3 phases of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage L3-L1

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9630 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Phase to phase voltage between the L3 and L1 phases of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 10645 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Average value of all voltage phases of the Bus.

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage THD L1

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16052 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458).

6 back to List of values

Bus Voltage THD L2

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16053 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Bus Voltage L2-N (page 458).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 459

 Bus Voltage THD L3

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 16054 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents PF measurement and evaluation (page 16) of Bus Voltage L3-N (page 458).

6 back to List of values

Bus V Unbalance Ph-N

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 10548 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Bus Voltage L1-N (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-
N (page 458), Bus Voltage L3-N (page 458) at a given moment.
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 261).

6 back to List of values

Bus V Unbalance Ph-Ph

Value group Value Group Bus Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 17336 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Bus Voltage L1-L2 (page 458), Bus Voltage L2-
L3 (page 459), Bus Voltage L3-L1 (page 459) at a given moment.
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 261).

6 back to List of values

Group: Power Management

Actual Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 15805 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual absolute reserve in Power Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 460

 Actual Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 15806 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required minimal Actual Reserve (page 460) for starting of next unit in the Power Management (page
165).

6 back to List of values

Stop Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 15807 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required maximal Actual Reserve (page 460) for stopping of next unit in the Power Management
(page 165).

6 back to List of values

Dynamic Spinning Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 15673 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The value Dynamic Spinning Reserve is added to required load reserve given by setpoints #Starting
Load Reserve 1 (page 319) and #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) (according to actual load
reserve set 1, 2, 3 or 4) to shift the actual load reserve settings in dynamic way.

6 back to List of values

Dynamic Spinning Reserve Offset

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 15674 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The value Dynamic Spinning Reserve Offset is added only to required stopping load reserve given by
setpoints #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 320) (according to actual load reserve set 1, 2, 3 or 4) to
create some dynamic offset between starting and stopping load reserve.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 461

 Total Running P

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10657 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual value of active power from all controllers running in Power Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

Total Running Q

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 10656 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual value of reactive power from all controllers running in Power Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

Total Running S

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVA
Comm object 16424 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual value of apparent power from all controllers running in Power Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

Total Running Power Factor

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14590 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents the total power factor (Cos ϕ) of all running Controllers.

6 back to List of values

Total Running Load Character

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9028 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value represents the total character of all running Controllers.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 462

 Total Running Samax

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVA
Comm object 16425 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value show maximal apparent power of running Controllers within the group that are connected to
the bus/mains.
The value is limited due to date type to -32000...32000 in case the sum of all apparent power of
Controllers is above this range, the value shows fixed value 32000 and the warning Total Running PQS
Value Overflow is activated.

6 back to List of values

Running Nominal Power In PM

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10999 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual nominal power of all running controllers on inter-controller CAN in Power Management (page
165).

6 back to List of values

Running Nominal Power Of All

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10658 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual nominal power of all running controllers on inter-controller CAN.

6 back to List of values

Available Nominal Power In PM

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10998 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Available nominal power of all controllers on inter-controller CAN in Power Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 463

 Minimal Running Power

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 10012 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual minimal nominal power of all Controllers, which are running.

6 back to List of values

Actual Relative Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 10788 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Actual relative reserve in Power Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

Start Relative Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 10786 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required minimal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for starting of next unit in the Power
Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

Stop Relative Reserve

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 10787 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required maximal Actual Relative Reserve (page 464) for stopping of next unit in the Power
Management (page 165).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 464

 Actual Power Band

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8974 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required state of the Controllers with CAN address between 1 .. 32 in the actual power band of Power
Management (page 165).
Log 0: Controller should be stopped
Log 1: Controller should be running

Note: Actual power band = group of Controllers which should be running with actual load.

Note: Value is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap (page 316) = Efficient.

6 back to List of values

Next Power Band

Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0

Units -
Comm object 8975 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required state of the Gen-sets with CAN address between 1 .. 32 in the next power band of Power
Management (page 165).
Log 0: Gen-set should be stopped if load is decreased
Log 1: Gen-set should be started if load is increased

Note: Next power band = group of Gen-sets which should be running after load change.

Note: Value is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap (page 316) = Efficient.

6 back to List of values

Group: Load Control

Required P Target

Value group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 8663 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows required active power at the end of ramping.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 465

 Required P

Value group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Comm object 13105 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows required active power relative to the ramping procedure i.e. required active power right
now.

6 back to List of values

System Load Control

Value group Load Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10792 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the actual LoadControl mode that the System is currently using. This value may differ
from setpoint Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) which contains requested Load Control mode.
List of possible states:

None The system is not operating.

Island The system operates in the Island mode.
The system operates in Baseload mode which is adjusted by the setpoint
Baseload
#System Baseload (page 241).
The system operates in Baseload mode with import/export limitation.
Baseload with I/E
Requested load is adjusted by the setpoint #System Baseload (page
Limit
241) but it is limitated by the setpoint Import Load (page 242).
The system operates in Import/Export mode which is adjusted by the
Import/Export
setpoint Import Load (page 242).

6 back to List of values

Group: PF Control

System PF/Q Control

Value group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10793 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains the actual PF/Q Control mode that the System is currently using. This value may
differ from setpoint PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) which contains requested PF/Q Control mode.
List of possible states:

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 466

 Required Q

Value group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 12877 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required reactive power.

6 back to List of values

Required Qrel

Value group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 13169 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required relative reactive power.

6 back to List of values

Required PF

Value group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16159 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required Power Factor.

6 back to List of values

Required PF Character

Value group PF Control Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9033 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Required Power Factor Character.

6 back to List of values

Group: Control Loops

Loadsharing Output

Value group Control Loops Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 10924 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal request of internal loadsharing regulator.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 467

 Varsharing Output

Value group Control Loops Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Comm object 10925 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal request of internal varsharing regulator.

6 back to List of values

Group: Controller I/O

Battery Voltage

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8213 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Controller's supply voltage.

6 back to List of values

Binary Inputs

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8235 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
States of the binary inputs of the controller.
01. CU-BIN-01
02. CU-BIN-02
03. CU-BIN-03
04. CU-BIN-04
05. CU-BIN-05
06. CU-BIN-06
07. CU-BIN-07
08. CU-BIN-08
09. CU-BIN-09
10. CU-BIN-10
11. CU-BIN-11
12. CU-BIN-12
Note: Names are changed based on names of representative binary inputs. See Default
configuration (page 58) to see default binary inputs names.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 468

 Binary Outputs

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8239 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.
01. CU-BOUT-01
02. CU-BOUT-02
03. CU-BOUT-03
04. CU-BOUT-04
05. CU-BOUT-05
06. CU-BOUT-06
07. CU-BOUT-07
08. CU-BOUT-08
09. CU-BOUT-09
10. CU-BOUT-10
11. CU-BOUT-11
12. CU-BOUT-12
Note: Names are changed based on names of representative binary outputs. See Default
configuration (page 58) to see default binary outputs names.

6 back to List of values

Group: Statistics

Sum MWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units MWh
Comm object 8980 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value is the sum of kWh from all Gen-sets (Genset kWh) which are communicating on the
intercontroller CAN (CAN2A or CAN2B) and are in the same control group as the IM1010 controller.

6 back to List of values

Sum MVArh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units MVArh
Comm object 8981 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value is the sum of kVArh from all Gen-sets (Genset kVArh) which are communicating on the
intercontroller CAN (CAN2A or CAN2B) and are in the same control group as the IM1010 controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 469

 Sum MVAh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units MVAh
Comm object 14021 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value is the sum of kVAh from all Gen-sets (Genset kVAh) which are communicating on the
intercontroller CAN (CAN2A or CAN2B) and are in the same control group as the IM1010 controller.

6 back to List of values

Mains kVAh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVAh
Comm object 13665 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Total apparent energy imported/exported from/to the Mains through the CB.

6 back to List of values

Mains kWh Exported

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVAh
Comm object 11025 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Counter of Mains Import P (page 439).
Note: This value can be also switched into one decimal see Power Formats And Units (page 164).

6 back to List of values

Mains kVArh Exported

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units kVArh
Comm object 11026 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Counter of Mains Import Q (page 439).
Note: This value can be also switched into one decimal see Power Formats And Units (page 164).

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 470

 Mains kWh Imported

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units kWh
Comm object 16710 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active energy imported from the Mains to the Load/Bus.

6 back to List of values

Mains kVArh Imported

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units kWh
Comm object 16711 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Reactive energy imported from the Mains to the Load/Bus.

6 back to List of values

Pulse Counter 1

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10986 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This is the Statistic value of the Pulse Counter 1 which is connected with LBI PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE
558). Change the conversion rate via setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page 271).
See the chapter Pulse Counters (page 194) for more information.
Note: The Value can be set via InteliConfig in the interface "Set Statistics".

6 back to List of values

Pulse Counter 2

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10987 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This is the Statistic value of Pulse the Counter 2 which is connected with LBI PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE
558). Change the conversion rate via setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page 271).
See the chapter Pulse Counters (page 194) for more information.
Note: The Value can be set via InteliConfig in the interface "Set Statistics".

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 471

 Group: Info

Application Mode

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14446 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value reflects which application is used for the controller at the moment.
The application is selected based on setpoint Application Mode Select (page 237), LBI APPLICATION
MCB (PAGE 537) and APPLICATION MGCB (PAGE 536)

LBI APPLICATION LBI APPLICATION LBI APPLICATION

Application Mode
MCB (PAGE 537) MGCB (PAGE 536) SPI (PAGE 1)
Based on Application Mode
0 0 0
Select (page 237)
0 1 0 MGCB
1 0 0 MCB
1 1 0 MGCB

IMPORTANT: Application Mode can be changed only if Controller Mode (page 472) = OFF.

6 back to List of values

Controller Mode

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9887 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Controller mode.

6 back to List of values

Load Shedding Status

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9591 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains actual active highest stage of Load shedding stages (page 134). Value has range
from 0 to 8, where 0 means no load shedding stage is active.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 472

 Breaker state

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9245 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains actual breaker state message.

6 back to List of values

Timer Text

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10040 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains actual timer text message.

6 back to List of values

Connection Type

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 12944 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains name of currently selected connection type, which is adjusted via Connection type
(page 261).

6 back to List of values

Timer Value

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [MM:SS]
Comm object 14147 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains time of active timer which is counted down, name of the timer is in value Timer Text
(page 473).

6 back to List of values

ID String

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24501 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 473

 FW Version

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24339 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.

6 back to List of values

Application

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8480 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.

6 back to List of values

FW Branch

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8707 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

6 back to List of values

Forced Value Status

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 20544 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains list of all 32 LBIs for Forced Value (page 131). Logical 1 means that the respective
LBI is currently activated.

6 back to List of values

SPI Module A

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14447 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 474

 SPI Module B

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14448 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

CAN16

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8546 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains binary information about controllers connected via CAN2 (page 17) and/or
Communication peripherals (page 17) with CAN Controller Address (page 272) = <1,16>. Each bit
represent controller with the same CAN address as number of the bit.
Log. 1 - this controller receives messages from the controller with specific CAN address
Log. 0 - this controller does not receive messages from the controller with specific CAN address

6 back to List of values

CAN32

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8827 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains binary information about controllers connected via CAN2 (page 17) and/or
Communication peripherals (page 17) with CAN Controller Address (page 272) = <17,32>. Each bit
represent controller with the same CAN address as number of the bit.
Log. 1 - this controller receives messages from the controller with specific CAN address
Log. 0 - this controller does not receive messages from the controller with specific CAN address

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 475

 Reg16

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11081 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains binary information about controllers connected via CAN2 (page 17) and/or
Communication peripherals (page 17) with CAN Controller Address (page 272) = <1,16>. Each bit
represent controller with the same CAN address as number of the bit.
Log. 1 - controller with this CAN address is in the same group (is connected to the same bus).
Log. 0 - controller with this CAN address is NOT in the same group (is NOT connected to the
same bus).

6 back to List of values

Reg32

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11082 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains binary information about controllers connected via CAN2 (page 17) and/or
Communication peripherals (page 17) with CAN Controller Address (page 272) = <17,32>. Each bit
represent controller with the same CAN address as number of the bit.
Log. 1 - controller with this CAN address is in the same group (is connected to the same bus).
Log. 0 - controller with this CAN address is NOT in the same group (is NOT connected to the
same bus).

6 back to List of values

Gen Loaded 16

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10196 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains binary information about controllers connected via CAN2 (page 17) and/or
Communication peripherals (page 17) with CAN Controller Address (page 272) = <1,16>. Each bit
represent controller with the same CAN address as number of the bit.
Log. 1 - controller with this CAN address is currently loaded
Log. 0 - controller with this CAN address is currently not loaded

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 476

 Gen Loaded 32

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10197 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains binary information about controllers connected via CAN2 (page 17) and/or
Communication peripherals (page 17) with CAN Controller Address (page 272) = <17,32>. Each bit
represent controller with the same CAN address as number of the bit.
Log. 1 - controller with this CAN address is currently loaded
Log. 0 - controller with this CAN address is currently not loaded

6 back to List of values

Group: User Buttons

User Buttons

Value group User Buttons Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 20743 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of User Buttons (page 199).

1. User Button 1 11. User Button 11 21. User Button 21 31. User Button 31
2. User Button 2 12. User Button 12 22. User Button 22 32. User Button 32
3. User Button 3 13. User Button 13 23. User Button 23
4. User Button 4 14. User Button 14 24. User Button 24
5. User Button 5 15. User Button 15 25. User Button 25
6. User Button 6 16. User Button 16 26. User Button 26
7. User Button 7 17. User Button 17 27. User Button 27
8. User Button 8 18. User Button 18 28. User Button 28
9. User Button 9 19. User Button 19 29. User Button 29
10. User Button 10 20. User Button 20 30. User Button 30

6 back to List of values

Group: Log Bout

Log Bout 1

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9143 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 477

 Log Bout 2

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9144 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 3

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9145 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 4

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9146 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 5

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9147 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 6

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9148 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 478

 Log Bout 7

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9149 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 8

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9150 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 9

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11896 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Group: Plug-in

EM BIO A

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
14291 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 479

 EM BIO B

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
14292 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Group: Plug-In I/O

EM Analog Input A 1

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14293 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 2

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14294 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 3

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14295 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 480

 EM Analog Input A 4

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14296 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 5

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14297 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 6

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14298 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 7

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14299 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 481

 EM Analog Input A 8

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14300 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 9

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14301 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 10

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14302 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 11

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14303 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 482

 EM Analog Input A 12

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14303 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 13

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14305 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 14

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14306 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input A 15

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14307 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 483

 EM Analog Input A 16

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14308 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 1

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14309 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 2

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14310 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 3

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14311 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 484

 EM Analog Input B 4

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14312 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 5

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14313 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 6

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14314 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 7

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14315 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 485

 EM Analog Input B 8

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14316 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 9

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14317 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 10

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14318 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 11

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14319 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 486

 EM Analog Input B 12

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14320 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 13

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14321 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 14

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14322 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

EM Analog Input B 15

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14323 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 487

 EM Analog Input B 16

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm
14324 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-4G-GPS

Modem Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24288 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

AirGate Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23967 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Network Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23972 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 488

 GPS Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23973 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Signal Strength

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units [%]
Comm
24302 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
This value represents signal strenght in the percentage.

6 back to List of values

IP Address

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23971 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Secondary DNS

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23983 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 489

 Primary DNS

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23984 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

AirGate Servicing Node

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23991 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Network Mode

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24146 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Network Name

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24147 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 490

 Modem FW Version

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24149 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Speed

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24264 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Active Satellites

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24265 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Longitude

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24267 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 491

 Latitude

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24268 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Last E-mail Result

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24307 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
24309 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-Ethernet

AirGate Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23910 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 492

 Ethernet PHY mode

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23916 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

ETH Interface Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23924 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

AirGate Servicing Node

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23915 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Last E-mail Result

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23925 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 493

 AirGate ID

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23926 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Secondary DNS

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23927 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Primary DNS

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23928 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Current Gateway

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23929 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 494

 Current Subnet Mask

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23930 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Current IP Address

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23931 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

MAC Address

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm
23932 Related applications MCB, MGCB
object
Description
Description.

6 back to List of values

Group: Ethernet

MAC Address

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24333 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current MAC address of the controller's ethernet interface.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 495

 Ethernet PHY mode

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24088 Related applications (missing or bad snippet)
Description
This value represents Communication peripherals (page 17) interface mode:

10- HD 10 Mbit Half-Duplex

10- FD 10 Mbit Full-Duplex
100- HD 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
100- FD 100 Mbit Full-Duplex

6 back to List of values

Current IP Address

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Related
Comm object 24184 MCB, MGCB
applications
Description
Current IP address of the Communication peripherals (page 17) interface.

6 back to List of values

Current Subnet Mask

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24183 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current subnet mask of the Communication peripherals (page 17) interface.

6 back to List of values

Current Gateway

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24182 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current IP gateway address of the Communication peripherals (page 17) communications.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 496

 Primary DNS

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24181 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current domain name server of the Communication peripherals (page 17) interface.

6 back to List of values

Secondary DNS

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24100 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Backup domain name server of the Communication peripherals (page 17) interface.

6 back to List of values

ETH Interface Status

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24180 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Current status of the Communication peripherals (page 17) communication.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 497

 AirGate Status

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24007 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps with troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT: If the AirGate key in the Access Administration is empty the controller will
not connect to the AirGate despite the function is enabled. Access Administration is
available in Tools of the InteliConfig.

Code Value Description

Not trying to connect to AirGate. This is initial value of the
0 Not defined
status.
1 Waiting to connect Waiting for the next attempt to connect to a node.
Resolving the domain name of the node to which it is
2 Resolving
attempting to connect.
3 Connecting Attempting to estabilish TCP link to the node.
4 Creating secure channel Encrypted channel is being negotiated.
5 Registration Encrypted channel has been estabilished.
6 Connected, inoperable AirGate server has not sent an authorization yet.
AiGate server authorized the connection and the AirGate
7 Connected, operable
connection is up and running.
The service is enabled but suspended due to empty
8 Suspended, empty key
AirGate key.

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24345 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 498

 AirGate Servicing Node

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24010 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value displays the IP address to Servicing node to which is controller connected in order to use
AirGate connection.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 499

 Last E-mail Result

Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24332 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
1 SIMCom declined connection request.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum transmitted data length not defined.
5 No response from SMTP server.
6 Command to SMTP server not sent.
7 Did not receive data from SMTP server.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
10 SMTP server does not support 8-bit encoding.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server rejected email data.
19 SMTP server rejected email data.
20 QUIT command was refused.
21 There is no valid server IP address.
22 Process of sending email aborted.
23 Closing connection error.
24 Failed to accept server response after connection is established.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can???t be read.
28 Error during encoding process.
29 Error during HMAC MD5 encoding process.
30 There is no attempt for sending email yet.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 500

 31 Cannot resolve SMTP server's IP address.
32 Error while reading CO 24327 (base64 email data)
33 Problem with authorization type (i.e. smtp.gmail.com support only STARTTLS)
34 SMTP server does not support STARTTLS command.
35 STARTTLS command was refused.
36 There is a problem during TLS handshake process.

6 back to List of values

Group: Date/Time

Date

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0

Units DD.MM.YYYY
Comm object 24553 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Shows setup date.

6 back to List of values

Time

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Related
Comm object 24554 MCB, MGCB
applications
Description
Shows setup time.

6 back to List of values

Time Mode

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Related
Comm object 20252 MCB, MGCB
applications
Description
Shows setup time mode.
STD - Standard zone time (e.g GMT+1 for Prague)
DST - Daylight Saving Time = STD+1 (e.g. GMT+2 for Prague)

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 501

 Group: PLC

PLC-AOUT 1

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21248 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 2

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21249 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 3

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21250 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 4

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21251 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 5

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21252 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 502

 PLC-AOUT 6

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21253 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 7

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21254 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 8

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21255 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 9

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21256 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 10

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21257 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 503

 PLC-AOUT 11

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21258 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 12

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21259 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 13

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21260 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 14

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21261 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 15

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21262 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 504

 PLC-AOUT 16

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21263 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 17

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21264 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 18

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21265 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 19

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21266 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 20

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21267 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 505

 PLC-AOUT 21

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21268 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 22

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21269 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 23

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21270 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 24

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21271 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 25

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21272 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 506

 PLC-AOUT 26

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21273 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 27

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21274 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 28

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21275 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 29

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21276 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 30

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21277 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 507

 PLC-AOUT 31

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21278 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 32

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21279 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 33

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21280 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 34

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21281 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 35

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21282 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 508

 PLC-AOUT 36

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21283 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 37

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21284 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 38

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21285 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 39

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21286 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 40

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21287 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 509

 PLC-AOUT 41

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21288 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 42

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21289 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 43

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21290 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 44

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21291 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 45

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21292 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 510

 PLC-AOUT 46

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21293 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 47

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21294 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 48

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21295 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 49

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21296 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 50

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21297 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 511

 PLC-AOUT 51

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21298 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 52

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21299 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 53

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21300 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 54

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21301 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 55

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21302 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 512

 PLC-AOUT 56

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21303 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 57

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21304 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 58

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21305 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 59

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21306 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 60

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21307 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 513

 PLC-AOUT 61

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21308 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 62

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21309 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 63

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21310 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-AOUT 64

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21311 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of analog output of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 1

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10424 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 514

 PLC-BOUT 2

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10425 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 3

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10426 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 4

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10427 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 5

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10428 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 6

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10429 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 515

 PLC-BOUT 7

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10430 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 8

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Related
Comm object 10431 MCB, MGCB
applications
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 9

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10432 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 10

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10433 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 11

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10434 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 516

 PLC-BOUT 12

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10435 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 13

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10436 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 14

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10437 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 15

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10438 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 16

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Related
Comm object 10439 MCB, MGCB
applications
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 517

 PLC-BOUT 17

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14570 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 18

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14571 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 19

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14572 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 20

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14573 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 21

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14574 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 518

 PLC-BOUT 22

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14575 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 23

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14576 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 24

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14577 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 25

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14578 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 26

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14579 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 519

 PLC-BOUT 27

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14580 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 28

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14581 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 29

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14582 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 30

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14583 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 31

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14584 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 520

 PLC-BOUT 32

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14585 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 33

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16914 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 34

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16915 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 35

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16916 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 36

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16917 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 521

 PLC-BOUT 37

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16918 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 38

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16919 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 39

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16920 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 40

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16921 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 41

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16922 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 522

 PLC-BOUT 42

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16923 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 43

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16924 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 44

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16925 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 45

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 16926 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 1

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21216 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 523

 PLC Resource 2

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21217 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 3

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21218 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 4

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21219 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 5

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21220 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 6

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21221 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 524

 PLC Resource 7

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21222 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 8

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21223 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 9

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21224 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 10

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 21225 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Internal value of PLC block.

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 525

 Group: SH Modules

SHBIN-1

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10572 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary inputs from SHBIN module 1.
1. SHBIN-1 1
2. SHBIN-1 2
3. SHBIN-1 3
4. SHBIN-1 4
5. SHBIN-1 5
6. SHBIN-1 6
7. SHBIN-1 7
8. SHBIN-1 8

6 back to List of values

SHBIN-2

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10573 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary inputs from SHBIN module 2.
1. SHBIN-2 1
2. SHBIN-2 2
3. SHBIN-2 3
4. SHBIN-2 4
5. SHBIN-2 5
6. SHBIN-2 6
7. SHBIN-2 7
8. SHBIN-2 8

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 526

 SHBIN-3

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10574 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary inputs from SHBIN module 3.
1. SHBIN-3 1
2. SHBIN-3 2
3. SHBIN-3 3
4. SHBIN-3 4
5. SHBIN-3 5
6. SHBIN-3 6
7. SHBIN-3 7
8. SHBIN-3 8

6 back to List of values

SHBIN-4

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10575 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary inputs from SHBIN module 4.
1. SHBIN-4 1
2. SHBIN-4 2
3. SHBIN-4 3
4. SHBIN-4 4
5. SHBIN-4 5
6. SHBIN-4 6
7. SHBIN-4 7
8. SHBIN-4 8

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 527

 SHBIN-5

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11341 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary inputs from SHBIN module 5.
1. SHBIN-5 1
2. SHBIN-5 2
3. SHBIN-5 3
4. SHBIN-5 4
5. SHBIN-5 5
6. SHBIN-5 6
7. SHBIN-5 7
8. SHBIN-5 8

6 back to List of values

SHBIN-6

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11342 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary inputs from SHBIN module 6.
1. SHBIN-6 1
2. SHBIN-6 2
3. SHBIN-6 3
4. SHBIN-6 4
5. SHBIN-6 5
6. SHBIN-6 6
7. SHBIN-6 7
8. SHBIN-6 8

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 528

 SHBOUT-1

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10576 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary outputs from SHBOUT module 1.
1. SHBOUT-1 1
2. SHBOUT-1 2
3. SHBOUT-1 3
4. SHBOUT-1 4
5. SHBOUT-1 5
6. SHBOUT-1 6
7. SHBOUT-1 7
8. SHBOUT-1 8

6 back to List of values

SHBOUT-2

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10577 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary outputs from SHBOUT module 2.
1. SHBOUT-2 1
2. SHBOUT-2 2
3. SHBOUT-2 3
4. SHBOUT-2 4
5. SHBOUT-2 5
6. SHBOUT-2 6
7. SHBOUT-2 7
8. SHBOUT-2 8

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 529

 SHBOUT-3

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10578 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary outputs from SHBOUT module 3.
1. SHBOUT-3 1
2. SHBOUT-3 2
3. SHBOUT-3 3
4. SHBOUT-3 4
5. SHBOUT-3 5
6. SHBOUT-3 6
7. SHBOUT-3 7
8. SHBOUT-3 8

6 back to List of values

SHBOUT-4

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10579 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary outputs from SHBOUT module 4.
1. SHBOUT-4 1
2. SHBOUT-4 2
3. SHBOUT-4 3
4. SHBOUT-4 4
5. SHBOUT-4 5
6. SHBOUT-4 6
7. SHBOUT-4 7
8. SHBOUT-4 8

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 530

 SHBOUT-5

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11343 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary outputs from SHBOUT module 5.
1. SHBOUT-5 1
2. SHBOUT-5 2
3. SHBOUT-5 3
4. SHBOUT-5 4
5. SHBOUT-5 5
6. SHBOUT-5 6
7. SHBOUT-5 7
8. SHBOUT-5 8

6 back to List of values

SHBOUT-6

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11344 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains Binary Inputs of shared binary outputs from SHBOUT module 6.
1. SHBOUT-6 1
2. SHBOUT-6 2
3. SHBOUT-6 3
4. SHBOUT-6 4
5. SHBOUT-6 5
6. SHBOUT-6 6
7. SHBOUT-6 7
8. SHBOUT-6 8

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 531

 SHAIN-1 1

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10584 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of first shared analog input from SHAOUT module 1.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

SHAIN-1 2

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10585 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of second shared analog input from SHAOUT module 1.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

SHAIN-1 3

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10586 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of third shared analog input from SHAOUT module 1.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

SHAIN-1 4

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10587 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of fourth shared analog input from SHAOUT module 1.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 532

 SHAIN-2 1

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11390 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of first shared analog input from SHAOUT module 2.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

SHAIN-2 2

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11391 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of second shared analog input from SHAOUT module 2.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

SHAIN-2 3

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11392 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of third shared analog input from SHAOUT module 2.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

SHAIN-2 4

Value group SH Modules Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11393 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value contains data of fourth shared analog input from SHAOUT module 2.
IMPORTANT: This value is received (and visible) only when it is configured with sensor
type "Electronic".

6 back to List of values

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 533

8.1.4 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 536
LBI: E 537
LBI: F 537
LBI: G 542
LBI: H 542
LBI: L 543
LBI: M 545
LBI: N 555
LBI: P 556
LBI: R 558
LBI: S 561
LBI: T 563

For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 535).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 534

 Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: A 536 Mains Fail Block 545

Access Lock 536 Manual Load
AMF Start Block 536 Reconnection 546
Application MGCB 536 MCB Button 546
Application MCB 537 MCB Disable 546

LBI: E 537 MCB Feedback 547

Emergency MAN 537 MCB Feedback Negative 549
LBI: F 537 MCB Isolated 550
Fault Reset Button 537 GCB Button 551
Force Island 537 GCB Disable 551
Force Parallel 538 GCB Feedback 552
Force Protection Disable 538 GCB Feedback Negative 553
Forced Value Input 01 538 Min Run Power Act 1 554
Forced Value Input 02 538 Min Run Power Act 2 554
Forced Value Input 03 539 Min Run Power Act 3 555
Forced Value Input 04 539 LBI: N 555
Forced Value Input 05 539 Not Used 555
Forced Value Input 06 539 LBI: P 556
Forced Value Input 07 539 Protection Force Disable 1 556
Forced Value Input 08 540 Protection Force Disable 2 557
Forced Value Input 09 540 Protection Force Disable 3 557
Forced Value Input 10 540 Pulse Counter 1 558
Forced Value Input 11 540 Pulse Counter 2 558
Forced Value Input 12 540 LBI: R 558
Forced Value Input 13 541 Remote AUTO 558

Forced Value Input 14 541 Remote MAN 559

Forced Value Input 15 541 Remote OFF 559

Forced Value Input 16 541 Remote Start/Stop 560

LBI: G 542 Remote TEST 560

Group link 542 Rem TEST On Load 561

LBI: H 542 LBI: S 561

Horn Reset Button 542 Start Button 561

LBI: L 543 Stop Button 561

Load Res 2 Active 543 Synchronization Disabled 563
Load Res 3 Active 544 LBI: T 563
Load Res 4 Active 545 Time Stamp Act 563

LBI: M 545 6 back to Controller objects

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 535

 LBI: A

Access Lock

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 1
Description
When this input is closed, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller’s front panel and Mains mode
(OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) cannot be changed.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected. Also the buttons Fault
Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop in MAN mode are not
blocked.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

AMF Start Block

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 211
Description
Activation of this LBI blocks AMF function and gen-sets will not be automatically started if the mains
failure occurs. In case the load is powered from the bus (gen-sets) and all controllers are in AUTO mode,
the gen-sets goes to cooling procedure and stops.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Application MGCB

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 1050
Description
Activation of this binary input switches the controller Application Mode (Application Mode Select
(page 237)) to MGCB.
IMPORTANT: The Controller mode (page 267) has to be OFF, otherwise controller application
can not be changed.

Note: This binary input has higher priority than LBI APPLICATION MCB (PAGE 537).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 536

 Application MCB

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 1051
Description
Activation of this binary input switches the controller Application Mode (Application Mode Select
(page 237)) to MCB.
IMPORTANT: The Controller mode (page 267) has to be OFF, otherwise controller application
can not be changed.

Note: This binary input has lower priority than LBI APPLICATION MGCB (PAGE 536).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: E

Emergency MAN

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the breakers to be controlled externally (not by the controller). This feature
can be useful in case of some failure, which disables the breakers to be controlled by the controller.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Stops all functions regarding the breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the
moment of deactivation.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: F

Fault Reset Button

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 191
Description

Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on an Internal display.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Force Island

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 787
Description
Activation of this LBI starts the System and forces island operation. Transfer method of the load from
Mains is adjusted via setpoint Transfer Mains To Gen (page 340).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 537

 Force Parallel

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 786
Description
Activation of this LBI starts the System and forces parallel operation if MAINS HEALTHY (PAGE 579) is
closed. Island operation is not allowed while this LBI is closed.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Force Protection Disable

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 16
Description
Selected protections are disabled if LBI: Force Protection Disable is active..
Activation and deactivation of this binary input will create history record:
Force Protection Disable active
Force Protection Disable inactive
Behavior depends on configuration of LBI - normally close or normally open.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 01

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 19
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 02

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 20
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 538

 Forced Value Input 03

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 21
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 04

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 22
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 05

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 23
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 06

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 24
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 07

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 25
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 539

 Forced Value Input 08

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 26
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 09

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 27
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 10

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 28
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 11

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 29
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 12

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 30
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 540

 Forced Value Input 13

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 31
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 14

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 32
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 15

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 33
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Forced Value Input 16

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 34
Description
This LBI is used for activation of preconfigured Forced Value (page 131) to setpoint.
Note: This LBI can be renamed during configuration.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 541

 LBI: G

Group link

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 59
Description
This input is used for logical connection and disconnection of two gen-set groups selected with setpoints
Group Link L (page 337) and Group Link R (page 338). If the input is active, then the two selected
groups will perform Power Management (page 165), load sharing and Var sharing together as one
large group.
Note: This function is independent on the group which the particular controller belongs to, i.e. the
controller can provide linking function e.g. for groups 3,4 although it belongs to group 2.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: H

Horn Reset Button

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 192
Description

Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on an Internal display.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 542

 LBI: L

Load Res 2 Active

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 49
Description
This input is used to activate the load reserve set #2 (learn more about load reserve in the chapter Power
Management (page 165)) instead of the set #1, which is active by default. The set #2 is adjusted by
setpoints:
#Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 322) and #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 323) if the power
management is switched to absolute mode
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 324) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 324) if
the power management is switched to relative mode.
IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same
load reserve set selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 543

 Load Res 3 Active

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 50
Description
This input is used to activate the load reserve set #3 (learn more about load reserve in the chapter Power
Management (page 165)) instead of the set #1, which is active by default. The set #3 is adjusted by
setpoints:
#Starting Load Reserve 3 (page 325) and #Stopping Load Reserve 3 (page 326) if the power
management is switched to absolute mode
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 3 (page 327) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 3 (page 327) if
the power management is switched to relative mode.
IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same
load reserve set selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 544

 Load Res 4 Active

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 51
Description
This input is used to activate the load reserve set #4 (learn more about load reserve in the chapter Power
Management (page 165)) instead of the set #1, which is active by default. The set #4 is adjusted by
setpoints:
#Starting Load Reserve 4 (page 328) and #Stopping Load Reserve 4 (page 329) if the power
management is switched to absolute mode
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 4 (page 330) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 4 (page 330) if
the power management is switched to relative mode.
IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same
load reserve set selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: M

Mains Fail Block

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 622
Description
This logical input simulates healthy Mains even if the Mains parameters are not OK.
If this LBI is active, the automatic start of the System during Mains Failure is blocked. In case of running
System in AUTO mode, timer Mains Return Delay (page 287) is started. After it elapses behavior is
adjusted by Transfer Gen To Mains (page 341).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 545

 Manual Load Reconnection

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has
dropped below the setpoint Load Reconnection Level (page 313). This works only if automatic
reconnection is disabled, i.e. the setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 314) = Disabled.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

MCB Button

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 194
Description

This binary input has the same function as MCB button on an Internal display.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

MCB Disable

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 124
Description
This binary input is used to prevent MCB closing and opening.
If the input is active during synchronizing, the controller will continue synchronizing without
issuing the MCB closing command until the input is deactivated or Sync timeout is elapsed.
If the input is active and the MCB Button is pressed in MAN mode to close the MCB to dead bus,
the MCB will not be closed until this input is deactivated and the MCB Button is pressed again.
If the input is active and the MCB is to be closed to dead bus automatically, the MCB will not be
closed until this input is deactivated.
If the input is active and MCB is already closed, the breaker will not open.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 546

 MCB Feedback

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 65
Description
Use this input to indicate whether the mains circuit breaker is opened or closed.

Image 7.7 MCB Feedback 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 547

 Image 7.8 MCB Feedback 2

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 548

 MCB Feedback Negative

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 66
Description
Use this input to indicate whether the mains circuit breaker is opened or closed.
This input is logically inverted against LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547).

Image 7.9 MCB Feedback 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 549

 Image 7.10 MCB Feedback 2

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

MCB Isolated

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 601
Description
This binary input is used as signalization to the CU that Load is cut off from the MCB by the external
isolator.That can be useful in case the MCB fails to open, and it is required to run the Systems in
Island/Multiple Island operation.
Note: The alarm Wrn MCB Isolated (page 659) is turned on when the MCB Isolated is active and the
MCB is disabled.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 550

 GCB Button

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MGCB

LBI ID 193
Description

Binary input has the same function as MGCB button on an Internal display.

IMPORTANT: Control of MGCB is affected by SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) even in

Controller mode (page 267) = MAN. SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) has to be active before
MGCB can be closed. You can activate SYSTEM START/STOP (PAGE 591) for example by
pressing the Start Button.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

GCB Disable

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MGCB

LBI ID 62
Description
This function is used to prevent MGCB closing and opening.
If the input is active during synchronizing, the controller will continue synchronizing without
issuing the MGCB closing command until the input is deactivated or Sync timeout is elapsed.
If the input is active and the MGCB button is pressed in MAN mode to close the MGCB to dead
bus, the MGCB will not be closed until the input is deactivated and the MGCB button pressed
again.
If the input is active and the MGCB should be closed to dead bus automatically, the MGCB will not
be closed until the input is deactivated.
If the input is active and the MGCB is already closed, the breaker will not open.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 551

 GCB Feedback

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MGCB

LBI ID 63
Description
Use this input to indicate whether the master generator circuit breaker is opened or closed.

Image 7.11 MGCB Feedback 1

Image 7.12 MGCB Feedback 2

This input is used for connection of the normally open feedback contact from the generator circuit
breaker or contactor. If the input is active, the controller will consider the MGCB as closed and vice versa.
If the feedback does not respond to a change of the control output LBO MGCB CLOSE/OPEN
(PAGE 584) within time adjusted in Setpoint Waiting For Breaker Feedback (page 1), and it was
already last attempt the specific alarm based on current breaker position is issued.
If the feedback changes it's position unexpectedly without any command given by the control
output, the Alarm Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660) will be issued immediately.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 552

 GCB Feedback Negative

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MGCB

LBI ID 64
Description
Use this input to indicate whether the master generator circuit breaker is opened or closed.
This input is used for connection of the normally closed feedback contact from the generator circuit
breaker or contactor. This input is optional and if it is configured, it must be always in inverse position to
the normally open input LBI GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552). Maximal allowed time the both inputs are in the
same position is 500ms, after this time the Alarm Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660) is issued.

Image 7.13 MGCB Feedback Negative 1

Image 7.14 MGCB Feedback Negative 2

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 553

 Min Run Power Act 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 52
Description
This input is used to activate the function Minimal running power #1, which is adjusted by setpoint #Min
Run Power 1 (page 331).
Note: The default value of minimal running power, which takes place while none of the inputs Min Run
Power x Act, is 0 kW.

Note: If more then one binary input for Min Run Power is activated, the one with the higher index has
higher priority and it is used.

IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same
minimal running power selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See the diagram of such
distribution in the description of the input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Min Run Power Act 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 53
Description
This input is used to activate the function Minimal running power #2, which is adjusted by setpoint #Min
Run Power 2 (page 331).
Note: The default value of minimal running power, which takes place while none of the inputs Min Run
Power x Act, is 0 kW.

Note: If more then one binary input for Min Run Power is activated, the one with the higher index has
higher priority and it is used.

IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same
minimal running power selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See the diagram of such
distribution in the description of the input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 554

 Min Run Power Act 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 54
Description
This input is used to activate the function Minimal running power #3, which is adjusted by setpoint #Min
Run Power 3 (page 332).
Note: The default value of minimal running power, which takes place while none of the inputs Min Run
Power x Act, is 0 kW.

Note: If more then one binary input for Min Run Power is activated, the one with the higher index has
higher priority and it is used.

IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same
minimal running power selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See the diagram of such
distribution in the description of the input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 543).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: N

Not Used

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 184
Description
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when binary input is not used.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 555

 LBI: P

Protection Force Disable 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 16
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable 1 active
Protection Force Disable 1 inactive

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 556

 Protection Force Disable 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 17
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable 2 active
Protection Force Disable 2 inactive

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Protection Force Disable 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 18
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable 3 active
Protection Force Disable 3 inactive

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 557

 Pulse Counter 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 87
Description
This is the input of the "slow" Pulse Counters (page 194) function which is connected with LBI PULSE
COUNTER 1 (PAGE 558).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Pulse Counter 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 88
Description
This is the input of the "slow" Pulse Counters (page 194) function which is connected with LBI PULSE
COUNTER 2 (PAGE 558).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: R

Remote AUTO

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode when this binary input is closed. When opens controller is
switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote Ctrl Lock
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 558

 Remote MAN

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode when this binary input is closed. When opens controller is
switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote OFF

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode when this binary input is closed. When opens controller is
switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 559

 Remote Start/Stop

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop theSystem in AUTO and TEST mode. This information is shared to all
controllers in the same group connected to the master controller via CAN.

Taken action in SPTM application (AUTO Mode)

Start Bus, synchronization, parallel operation (baseload/Imp/Exp),
Regardless the Mains parameters OK.
Active
Start the Bus to Island if Mains Not OK
Reverse synchronization when Mains gets restored
Inactive Unloading of the Bus if it is running in parallel, stop the Bus.
Taken action in MINT application (AUTO Mode)
Starts the Bus after #System Start Delay (page 317) if Power Management =
Active
Enabled, otherwise it is started immediately.
Stops the Bus after #System Start Delay (page 317) if Power Management =
Inactive
Enabled, otherwise it is stopped immediately.

Note: In the SPTM application there are more LBIs that can influence the state of the application and
can be in the collision with the Common LBI Remote Start/Stop.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote TEST

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 621
Description
The controller is switched to the TEST mode when this binary input is closed. When opens controller is
switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 560

 Rem TEST On Load

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 61
Description
Activation of this LBI will start the Gen-sets, close their GCBs and transfer the load from the Mains to the
Gen-sets. The MGCB is also closed if selected application mode is MGCB.
The behavior is the same like if the LBI FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537) is activated. The load transfer
according to the settings is performed.
IMPORTANT: Do not activate this LBI if the controller is in the OFF mode. When the LBI is
deactivated the controller will switch to the OFF mode and the MGCB will be opened
without load transfer.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: S

Start Button

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 189
Description

Binary input has the same function as Start Button on an Internal display.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Stop Button

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 190
Description

Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on an Internal display.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 561

 Switch To AUT
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Comm object 1112
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to AUTO. Falling edge has
no effect and controller stays in AUTO MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in OFF mode. LBI Switch To AUTO is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (LBI
stays active). Then LBI SWITCH TO MAN (PAGE 562) is activated – CU goes to MAN Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To OFF and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.

"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Switch To MAN
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Comm object 1111
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to MAN. Falling edge has no
effect and controller stays in MAN MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in OFF mode. LBI Switch To MAN is activated – CU goes to MAN Mode (LBI stays
active). Then LBI SWITCH TO AUT (PAGE 562) is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To MAN and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.

"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 562

 Switch To OFF
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Comm object 1110
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to OFF. Falling edge has no
effect and controller stays in OFF MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in MAN mode. LBI Switch To OFF is activated – CU goes to OFF Mode (LBI stays
active). Then LBI SWITCH TO AUT (PAGE 562) is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To OFF and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.

"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Synchronization Disabled

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 277
Description
This binary input is used to disable the forward and reverse synchronization process so the controller
won't attempt to close breaker(s) if synchronization would be needed.This LBI is useful if user want to set
the additional condition for start of the synchronization.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: T

Time Stamp Act

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBI ID 125
Description
This binary input is used as activation condition for periodic history records if setpoint Time Stamp Act
(page 1) is set to Condition.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 563

8.1.5 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 566
LBO: B 569
LBO: C 569
LBO: D 571
LBO: E 572
LBO: F 574
LBO: H 575
LBO: I 576
LBO: L 576
LBO: M 579
LBO: N 589
LBO: P 589
LBO: R 590
LBO: S 590

For full list of Logical binary outputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 565).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 564

 Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: A 566 LBO: E 572 MCB Status 582

AL Common Breaker Open Electrical Alarm 572 MCB UV Coil 583
and Cooldown 566 Engines Swapped 572 MGCB Button Echo 584
Al Common Fls 566 Exercise Timer 1 572 MGCB Close/Open 584
Alarm 566 Exercise Timer 2 573 MGCB OFF Coil 585
Alarm Bus Frequency 566 Exercise Timer 3 573 MGCB ON Coil 586
Alarm Bus Voltage 566 Exercise Timer 4 573 MGCB Status 587
AL Common Shutdown Exercise Timer 5 574 MGCB UV Coil 587
Override 567
Exercise Timer 6 574 Minimal Power PTM
Alarm Flashing 567 Limitation 588
LBO: F 574
Alarm Bus 567 FltRes Button Echo 574 Mode AUTO 588
Alarm Bus Frequency 567 Forward Synchronization 574 Mode MAN 588
Alarm Bus Voltage 567 Mode OFF 589
LBO: H 575
Alarm Overcurrent 568 Heartbeat 575 Mode TEST 589
All Available Gen-sets Run 568 History Record Indication 575 LBO: N 589
Any GCB Closed 568 Horn 575 Not In Auto 589
Any Other GCB Closed 568 Horn Flashing 575 Not Used 589
LBO: B 569 HornRes Button Echo 575 LBO: P 589
Bus Healthy 569 Peak Shaving Active 589
LBO: I 576
LBO: C 569 In Mains Parallel 576 Peripheral Module Comm
Common Alarm Active In Synchronism 576 Fail 590
Level 1 569 Process Power Limitation 590
Initialized 576
Common Alarm Active
LBO: L 576 LBO: R 590
Level 2 569
Load Reduction Active 576 Reverse Synchronization 590
Common Alarm Level 1 569
Load Shedding Stage 1 577 LBO: S 590
Common Alarm Level 2 569 Start Button Echo 590
Load Shedding Stage 2 577
Common Alarm Only 570 Stop Button Echo 590
Load Shedding Stage 3 577
Common History Record 570 System Ready 591
Load Shedding Stage 5 578
Common Mains Protection 570 System Reserve OK 591
Load Shedding Stage 6 578
Common Mains Protection System Start/Stop 591
Logical 0 578
+ FltRes 570
Logical 1 579 Sync To Mains Allowed 592
Common System Stop 571
LBO: M 579 6 back to Controller objects
Common Warning 571
Mains Healthy 579
Controller HeartBeat Fail
Detect 571 MCB Button Echo 579
MCB Close/Open 579
LBO: D 571
Deadbus 571 MCB OFF Coil 580

Display Fail 572 MCB ON Coil 581

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 565

 LBO: A

AL Common Breaker Open and Cooldown

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 9
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one alarm of type BOC present in the alarmlist.
Note: When any BOC alarm is activated the GCB opens immediately and the Controller stops by
standard stopping sequence.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Al Common Fls

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 6
Description
description.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc.
The output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active
until confirmation of alarm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm Bus Frequency

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1266
Description
This output is active when at least 1 protection caused by Bus <>f Protection (page 302) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm Bus Voltage

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1263
Description
This output is active when at least 1 alarm caused by Bus <>V Protection (page 299)is present in the
alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 566

 AL Common Shutdown Override

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 251
Description
This output is closed 2 seconds after there is at least one alarm of type Protection types (page 186)
present in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm Flashing

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 28
Description
This is the flashing alternative of the output ALARM (PAGE 566), i.e. the output flashes with 1 Hz period
while the output Alarm is closed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm Bus

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 197
Description
This output is active when at least 1 protection caused by , Mains <>V Protection (page 296), Mains
<>f Protection (page 301) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm Bus Frequency

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1271
Description
This output is closed when at least 1 protection caused by Mains <>f Protection (page 301) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm Bus Voltage

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1270
Description
This output is closed when at least 1 protection caused by Mains <>V Protection (page 296) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 567

 Alarm Overcurrent

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 109
Description
This output is active while at least one of the following overcurrent protection is active IDMT Mains
Overcurrent Protection (page 293).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

All Available Gen-sets Run

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 122
Description
This output is closed when all available Gen-sets within the Control Group (page 337) are loaded.
Note: Gen-set is available if Power Management = Enabled, Controller Mode (page 472) = AUTO and
there is not present Alarms level 2 (page 677) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Any GCB Closed

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 222
Description
This output is active when a GCB of any controller connected via Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or
Terminal Diagram (page 33) is closed.
Note: This function works on CAN16 (page 475) - CAN32 (page 475) values, therefore it ignores
Control Groups (page 112).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Any Other GCB Closed

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1827
Description
This output is active when a GCB of any other controller connected via Terminal Diagram (page 33)
and/or Terminal Diagram (page 33) is closed.
Note: This function works on CAN16 (page 475) - CAN32 (page 475) values, therefore it ignores
Control Groups (page 112).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 568

 LBO: B

Bus Healthy

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 77
Description
This output is closed while Gen parameters (voltage & frequency) are considered as healthy, i.e. within
limits.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: C

Common Alarm Active Level 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 13
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one Alarms level 1 (page 633) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Alarm Active Level 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 15
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one Alarms level 2 (page 677) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Alarm Level 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 14
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one unconfirmed Alarms level 1 (page 633) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Alarm Level 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 16
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one unconfirmed Alarms level 2 (page 677) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 569

 Common Alarm Only

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 11
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one alarm of type Alarm Only present in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common History Record

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 12
Description
This output is closed for 1 second every time alarm of type History Record Only (page 672) occurs.
Note: When any History Record alarm is activated the history record is logged into history.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Mains Protection

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 10
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one active alarm of type Mains Protection (page 186).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Mains Protection + FltRes

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 4
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one active alarm of type Mains Protection + FltRes (page
186) present in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 570

 Common System Stop

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 5
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one alarm of type System Stop (page 688) present in the
alarmlist.
Note: When any Stp alarm is activated and there is another Bus that is currently not running loaded
and it is Ready for Power management the controller will wait for #Slow Stop Delay (page 333) and
than starts unloading if it is possible. If there is no other Bus in such state the controller starts
unloading immediately without the delay.

Note: When any Stp alarm is activated LBO System Start/Stop is immediately set to 0 and MGCB
breaker is opened according to the Load Transfer settings.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Warning

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 3
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one alarm of type Warning (page 636) present in the
alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Controller HeartBeat Fail Detect

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1177
Description
description.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: D

Deadbus

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2675
Description
This output is active when the Bus is considered to be dead (Bus voltage is below relative value set by
the setpoint Bus Dead Level (page 265)).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 571

 Display Fail

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2223
Description
This output indicates controller display failure.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: E

Electrical Alarm

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2410
Description
LBO Electrical Alarm is active when any of generator protections of any alarm level type is active. LBO
Electrical Alarm is deactivated by confirmation of Mains protection alarms in alarmlist and simultaneously
Mains protections alarms has to be inactive.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Engines Swapped

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 208
Description
When the master controller (controller with the lowest Controller Address) swaps priority of two
Controllers, the master controller generates 100 ms pulse with the output. The output works with the
setpoint #Priority Auto Swap (page 316) if it is setup to Run Hours Equal.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1250
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 1 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the System, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 365) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 572

 Exercise Timer 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1251
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 2 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the System, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 367) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1946
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 3 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the System, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 3 (page 369) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 4

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1947
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 4 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the System, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 4 (page 371) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 573

 Exercise Timer 5

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1948
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 5 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the System, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 5 (page 373) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 6

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1949
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 6 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the System, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 6 (page 375) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: F

FltRes Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 30
Description
This output provides 1 s pulse when:

Fault Reset button is pressed on an Internal display.

Fault Reset command is received via communication line
LBI FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 537) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Forward Synchronization

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 68
Description
This output is closed when forward synchronization is active (synchronization via MGCB breaker) and
opens when LBO MGCB STATUS (PAGE 587) closes.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 574

 LBO: H

Heartbeat

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

History Record Indication

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2762
Description
description.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Horn

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1
Description
This output is closed when any Alarms (page 633) is activated and stays closed until:

Fault reset is pressed

Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 268) elapses

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Horn Flashing

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 29
Description
This is the flashing alternative of the output HORN (PAGE 575), i.e. the output flashes with 1 Hz period
while the output Horn is closed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

HornRes Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 31
Description
This output is closed for 1 s every time Horn Reset Button is pressed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 575

 LBO: I

In Mains Parallel

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2132
Description
This output is closed when the parallel bus voltage and Mains voltage is present and breakers are
closed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

In Synchronism

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 80
Description
This output is closed during synchronization when Slip Angle, Slip Frequency and Voltages are inside
required windows.
Required windows are:
Slip Angle (page 448) between Mains and Bus Voltage is within range given by Phase Window
(page 349) for time longer than Dwell Time (page 349). Required if Synchronization Type
(page 347) = PhaseMatch.
Slip Frequency (page 448) between between Mains and Bus Frequency is withing range given
by Slip Frequency Window (page 350) for time longer than Dwell Time (page 349). Required if
Synchronization Type (page 347) = SlipSynchr.
Voltage difference between Mains and Bus voltage in all phases must be lower or equal to
Voltage Window (page 348) for time longer than Dwell Time (page 349). Required always.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Initialized

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1222
Description
This output is activated after the controller is initialized. It can be used to block some PLC logic blocks
while controller initialization is being proceeded.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: L

Load Reduction Active

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1245
Description
This output is closed when Load reduction is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 576

 Load Shedding Stage 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 51
Description
This is an output of Load Shedding (page 134).
The load shedding outputs are activated in the order 1, 2, 3, …, X.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated in the order X, …, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by this LBO is the least essential load.

Note: X is the highest configured Load shedding outputs (page 135).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 52
Description
This is an output of Load Shedding (page 134).
The load shedding outputs are activated in the order 1, 2, 3, …, X.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated in the order X, …, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by LBO LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 577) is the least essential load.

Note: X is the highest configured Load shedding outputs (page 135).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 53
Description
This is an output of Load Shedding (page 134).
The load shedding outputs are activated in the order 1, 2, 3, …, X.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated in the order X, …, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by LBO LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 577) is the least essential load.

Note: X is the highest configured Load shedding outputs (page 135).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 577

 Load Shedding Stage 4
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
LBO ID 452
Description
This is an output of Load Shedding (page 134).
The load shedding outputs are activated in the order 1, 2, 3, …, X.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated in the order X, …, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by LBO LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 577) is the least essential load.

Note: X is the highest configured Load shedding outputs (page 135).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 5

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 453
Description
This is an output of Load Shedding (page 134).
The load shedding outputs are activated in the order 1, 2, 3, …, X.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated in the order X, …, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by LBO LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 577) is the least essential load.

Note: X is the highest configured Load shedding outputs (page 135).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 6

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 454
Description
This is an output of Load Shedding (page 134).
The load shedding outputs are activated in the order 1, 2, 3, …, X.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated in the order X, …, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by LBO LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 577) is the least essential load.

Note: X is the highest configured Load shedding outputs (page 135).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Logical 0

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 578

 Logical 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: M

Mains Healthy

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 78
Description
This output is closed while Mains parameters (voltage & frequency) are considered as healthy, i. e. within
limits.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MCB Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 34
Description
This output is closed for 1 s every time MCB Button is pressed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MCB Close/Open

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 45
Description
The output controls the mains circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.

Image 7.15 MCB Close command

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 579

 Image 7.16 Repeated MCB Close command

Image 7.17 MCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MCB OFF Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 47
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of mains circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 2
seconds.

Image 7.18 MCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 580

 MCB ON Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 46
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of mains circuit breaker. The output gives at least 2 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 7.19 MCB ON Coil close command

Image 7.20 Repeated MCB ON coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 581

 MCB Status

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 85
Description
This output indicates the MCB position as it is internally considered by the controller. The position is
based on MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) and MCB FEEDBACK NEGATIVE (PAGE 549).
In case that only MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is used, this output mirrors the input.
In case that both MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) and MCB FEEDBACK NEGATIVE (PAGE 549) are
used and
Feedback match - output indicates MCB position according to feedbacks.
Feedback do not match - output indicates last position when feedbacks matched.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 582

 MCB UV Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 48
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of mains circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 2 seconds in the
moment the breaker has to be switched off.

Image 7.21 MCB UV Coil close command

Image 7.22 MCB UV Coil open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 583

 MGCB Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 35
Description
This output is closed for 1s every time MGCB Button is pressed.
That means:
MGCB button is pressed on the controller front panel or
MGCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
MGCB close/open command is received via communication line

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MGCB Close/Open

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 41
Description
The output controls the primary master generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker
position requested by the controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or open
command, otherwise an alarm Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660) is activated.

Image 7.23 MGCB Close command

Image 7.24 Repeated MGCB Close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 584

 MGCB OFF Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of primary master generator circuit breaker. The output
gives a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback
deactivates, but at least for 2 seconds.

Image 7.25 MGCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 585

 MGCB ON Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of primary master generator circuit breaker. The output
gives at least 2 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 7.26 MGCB ON Coil close command

Image 7.27 Repeated MGCB ON coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 586

 MGCB Status

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 84
Description
This output indicates the MGCB position as it is internally considered by the controller.
The position is based on GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) and GCB FEEDBACK NEGATIVE (PAGE 553).
In case that only positive feedback is used, this output mirrors the feedback.
In case that both feedbacks are used and
Feedbacks match each other - the output indicates MGCB position according to feedbacks.
Feedbacks do not match each other - output indicates last position when feedbacks matched.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MGCB UV Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications , MGCB

LBO ID 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of primary master generator circuit breaker. The
output is active the whole time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 2
seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off.

Image 7.28 MGCB UV Coil close command

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 587

 Image 7.29 MGCB UV Coil open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Minimal Power PTM Limitation

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2638
Description
This output is closed always when the controller detects that the System go below Minimal Power PTM
(page 277). It does not matter if the Minimal Power PTM Protection (page 303) is Enabled or not.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode AUTO

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 19
Description
This output is active whenever Controller Mode (page 472) = AUTO, i.e. when LBO NOT IN AUTO (PAGE
589) is opened.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode MAN

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 18
Description
This output is active whenever Controller Mode (page 472) = MAN.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 588

 Mode OFF

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 17
Description
This output is active whenever Controller Mode (page 472) = OFF.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode TEST

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 20
Description
This output is active whenever Controller Mode (page 472) = TEST.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: N

Not In Auto

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 1248
Description
This output is closed whenever Controller Mode (page 472) != AUTO, i.e. when LBO MODE AUTO
(PAGE 588) is opened.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Not Used

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 286
Description
Output has no function.
6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: P

Peak Shaving Active

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2118
Description
This output is closed when Peak shaving (page 152) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 589

 Peripheral Module Comm Fail

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 115
Description
This output is closed when there is no communication with at least one configured peripheral module.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Process Power Limitation

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 2241
Description
This output is closed while Total Running P (page 462) is being reduced due to: Import/Export
Limitation (page 241) = Enabled.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: R

Reverse Synchronization

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 69
Description
The output is closed when reverse synchronization is active (synchronization via MCB breaker) and
opens when LBO MCB STATUS (PAGE 582) closes.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: S

Start Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 33
Description
This output is closed for 1 s every time Start Button is pressed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 32
Description
This output is closed for 1 s every time Stop Button is pressed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 590

 System Ready

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 86
Description
This output is closed if the controller group has enough capacity to fulfill the requested power reserve. If
the output is opened, then the group has not enough capacity to fulfill the reserve even if all the units will
run.
Note: Fulfilled reserve means that Available Nominal Power In PM (page 463) is above the Minimal
Running Power (page 464)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

System Reserve OK

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 87
Description
This output is closed when Actual Reserve (page 460) is higher than the Actual Reserve (page 461).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

System Start/Stop

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LBO ID 190
Description
This output reflects whether whole system shall be started or stopped. When this LBO is closed, Gen-
sets which are in Controller Mode (page 472) = AUTO and are in the same Control Groups (page
112) are requested to be started.
LBO is closed when at least on of the following conditions is fullfiled:
LBI Remote REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 560) or FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 537) is closed
LBIs FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 538) and MAINS HEALTHY (PAGE 579) are closed
LBO PEAK SHAVING ACTIVE (PAGE 589) is closed
Controller Mode (page 472) = TEST
AMF Condition is sensed (Mains Fail, Mains Protection) and AMF Start (page 286) is Enabled
Start button is pressed (only if Controller Mode (page 472) = MAN)

IMPORTANT: The LBO System Start/Stop affects the control of MGCB even in Controller
mode (page 267) = MAN. System Start/Stop has to be active before MGCB can be closed.
You can activate it for example by pressing the Start Button.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 591

 Sync To Mains Allowed

MCB, MGCB
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications

LBO ID 1057
Description
This output is closed when synchronization to the mains is allowed or Breaker state (page 473) =
ParalOper.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 592

8.1.6 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.

Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: C 595
LAI: L 596
LAI: M 597
LAI: P 598

For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 594).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 593

 Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: C 595
Cold Temp 1 595
Cold Temp 2 595
Cold Temp 3 595
Cold Temp 4 596
Cold Temp 5 596
LAI: L 596
Load Control: ANEXT
Baseload 596
Load Control: ANEXT
Imp/Exp Load 597
LAI: M 597
Mains Measurement P 597
Mains Measurement Q 597
LAI: P 598
PF Control: ANEXT
Imp/Exp PF 598
6 back to Controller objects

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 594

 LAI: C

Cold Temp 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 56
Description
This LAI is used for compensation of thermocouple temperature measurement. It is used when there is a
significant temperature difference between on-board terminal and a module terminal (such as Inteli
AIN8TC). This input compensate the CAN module configured with address (index) 1.
Note: The compensation is only for thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo (nc) …" (not
cold junction compensation).

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Cold Temp 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 57
Description
This LAI is used for compensation of thermocouple temperature measurement. It is used when there is a
significant temperature difference between on-board terminal and a module terminal (such as Inteli
AIN8TC). This input compensate the CAN module configured with address (index) 2.
Note: The compensation is only for thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo (nc) …" (not
cold junction compensation).

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Cold Temp 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 58
Description
This LAI is used for compensation of thermocouple temperature measurement. It is used when there is a
significant temperature difference between on-board terminal and a module terminal (such as Inteli
AIN8TC). This input compensate the CAN module configured with address (index) 3.
Note: The compensation is only for thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo (nc) …" (not
cold junction compensation).

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 595

 Cold Temp 4

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 59
Description
This LAI is used for compensation of thermocouple temperature measurement. It is used when there is a
significant temperature difference between on-board terminal and a module terminal (such as Inteli
AIN8TC). This input compensate the CAN module configured with address (index) 4.
Note: The compensation is only for thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo (nc) …" (not
cold junction compensation).

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Cold Temp 5

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 341
Description
This LAI is used for compensation of thermocouple temperature measurement. It is used when there is a
significant temperature difference between on-board terminal and a module terminal (such as Inteli
AIN8TC). This input compensate the CAN module configured with address (index) 5.
Note: The compensation is only for thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo (nc) …" (not
cold junction compensation).

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: L

Load Control: ANEXT Baseload

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 1
Description
This LAI is source value for control of Active Power if Load Request Source (page 238) = Analog
External Value.
The Baseload is active if #System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar and Load Control PTM
Mode (page 240) = Baseload.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 596

 Load Control: ANEXT Imp/Exp Load

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 2
Description
This LAI is source value for control of Active Power if Load Request Source (page 238) = Analog
External Value.
The Import/Export is active if #System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar and Load Control
PTM Mode (page 240) = Import/Export.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: M

Mains Measurement P

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 5
Description
This LAI is designed for Mains Import Measurement (page 138), when Mains Measurement P (page
250) = Analog Input. Value from this input is used in load transfer from Mains to System.
Load transfer is considered to be finished when this value is lower than Mains Unload MCB Open
Window (page 342)

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Mains Measurement Q

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 6
Description
This LAI is designed for Mains Import Measurement (page 138), when Mains Measurement Q (page
251) = Analog Input. Value from this input is used in load transfer from mains to System.
Load transfer is considered to be finished when this value is lower than Mains Unload MCB Open
Window (page 342)

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 597

 LAI: P

PF Control: ANEXT Imp/Exp PF

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

LAI ID 4
Description
This LAI is a source value for control of the Power Factor if PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog
External Value.
The Import/Export PF is active if #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Var Shar, PF/Q Control PTM
Mode (page 244) = PF Control and PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) = Import/Export PF/Q Control.

Analog value Cos phi factor

<60 0.6L
60 .. 100 0.6L .. 1.00
101 .. 120 0.99C .. 0.80C

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 598

8.1.7 Application Curves
Q(P)
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
App Curve ID 2
Description
This curve is used during Q(P) (page 148) power control.
X-axe is relative value of Total Running P (page 462) to Running Nominal Power Of All (page 463).
Y-axe is relative value of Required Q (page 467) to Total Running Samax (page 463).
Default values

X-axe [%] Y-axe [%]

-100.00 33
-90.00 33
-60.00 5
-50.00 0
-10.00 0
0.00 0
10.00 0
50.00 0
60.00 -5
90.00 -33
100.00 -33

Default appearance

6 back to Application Curves

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 599

8.1.8 Fixed Protection States
List of Fixed Protection States
Fixed Protections States 1 601
Fixed Protections States 2 602
Fixed Protections States 3 603

6 back to Controller objects

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 600

 Fixed Protections States 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20744
Description
This is a group of fixed protection states.
List of protection states by bits:
1. Not Used
2. Not Used
3. Not Used
4. Not Used
5. Not Used
6. Not Used
7. Not Used
8. Not Used
9. Not Used
10. Not Used
11. Wrn MCB Fail (page 657)
12. Wrn MGCB Fail (page 660)
13. Wrn MCB Fail To Open (page 659)
14. Wrn MCB Fail To Close (page 658)
15. Wrn MGCB Fail To Close (page 661)
16. Wrn MGCB Fail To Open (page 661)
17. Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-N (page 672)
18. Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-N (page 672)
19. Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-N (page 672)
20. Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-L2 (page 673)
21. Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-L3 (page 673)
22. Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-L1 (page 673)
23. Hst Bus Undervoltage L1-N (page 673)
24. Hst Bus Undervoltage L2-N (page 674)
25. Hst Bus Undervoltage L3-N (page 674)
26. Hst Bus Undervoltage L1-L2 (page 674)
27. Hst Bus Undervoltage L2-L3 (page 674)
28. Hst Bus Undervoltage L3-L1 (page 675)
29. Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph (page 676)
30. Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-N (page 675)
31. Hst Bus Overfrequency (page 675)
32. Hst Bus Underfrequency (page 675)

6 back to Fixed Protection States

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 601

 Fixed Protections States 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20745
Description
This is a group of fixed protection states.
List of protection states by bits:
1. MP Mains Overvoltage L1-N (page 678)
2. MP Mains Overvoltage L2-N (page 678)
3. MP Mains Overvoltage L3-N (page 679)
4. MP Mains Undervoltage L1-N (page 681)
5. MP Mains Undervoltage L2-N (page 681)
6. MP Mains Undervoltage L3-N (page 682)
7. MP Mains Overvoltage L1-L2 (page 679)
8. MP Mains Overvoltage L2-L3 (page 680)
9. MP Mains Overvoltage L3-L1 (page 680)
10. MP Mains Undervoltage L1-L2 (page 682)
11. MP Mains Undervoltage L2-L3 (page 683)
12. MP Mains Undervoltage L3-L1 (page 684)
13. MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph (page 684)
14. MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-N (page 685)
15. MP Mains Overfrequency (page 686)
16. MP Mains Underfrequency (page 686)
17. Not used
18. Not used
19. Not used
20. Not used
21. ALI Bus Ph Rotation Opposite (page 670)
22. ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 671)
23. ALI Bus Ph Rotation Opposite (page 670)
24. MP Mains Overload (page 676)
25. Hst IDMT Overload (page 687)
26. Not used
27. Not used
28. Not used
29. Wrn Soft Transfer Fail (page 668)

6 back to Fixed Protection States

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 602

 Fixed Protections States 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20746
Description
This is a group of fixed protection states.
List of protection states by bits:
1. Hst Vector Shift (page 676)
2. MPR Current Unbalance (page 687)
3. MPR Short Circuit (page 687)
4. MPR IDMT Mains >A (page 687)
5. Wrn Bus Meas Error (page 637)
6. Sd Battery Flat (page 688)
7. Wrn Parallel Work (page 662)
8. Wrn Synchronization Fail (page 664)
9. Wrn Synchronisation Fail (page 1)
10. Not used
11. ALI Manual Restore (page 671)
12. Wrn Total Running PQS Value Overflow (page 668)
13. Wrn Load IMP/EXP Fail (page 656)
14. Not used
15. Not used
16. Wrn PasswEnterBlock (page 662)
17. Wrn Default Password (page 639)
18. Wrn Brute Force Protection Active (page 638)
19. Wrn Battery Overvoltage (page 637)
20. Wrn Battery Undervoltage (page 637)
21. Wrn Battery Voltage (page 637)
22. Wrn CAN2 Empty (page 639)
23. Wrn Alarm e-mail 1 Fail (page 636)
24. Wrn Alarm e-mail 2 Fail (page 636)
25. Wrn Alarm e-mail 3 Fail (page 636)
26. Wrn Alarm e-mail 4 Fail (page 636)
27. Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail (page 667)
28. Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail (page 668)
29. Wrn SHBIN Collision (page 667)
30. Wrn SHAIN Collision (page 665)

6 back to Fixed Protection States

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 603

8.1.9 User Protection States
List of User Protection States
User Protections States 1 605
User Protections States 2 605
User Protections States 3 605
User Protections States 4 605
User Protections States 5 605
User Protections States 6 606
User Protections States 7 606
User Protections States 8 606
User Protections States 9 606
User Protections States 10 606

6 back to Controller objects

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 604

 User Protections States 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20759
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20760
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 3

Related FW 1.0.0 5Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20761
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 4

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20762
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 5

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20763
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 605

 User Protections States 6

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20764
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 7

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20765
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 8

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20766
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 9

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20767
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 10

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB

Comm object 20768
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 606

8.1.10 PLC
List of PLC blocks
Group: Logical functions 608
OR/AND 608
XOR/RS 610
Group: Comparators 611
Comp Hyst 611
Comp Time 612
Comp Win 613
Group: Time functions 614
Delay 614
Timer 616
Group: Math operations 619
Interpolation 619
Math AxB/C 620
Math Fc. 621
Group: Ramp functions 622
Inc/Dec 622
LowPassFlt 624
Ramp 624
Up/Down 625
Group: Other functions 627
Analog Switch 627
Analog Switch 8 627
Convert 629
Counter 631
Decomp. 4 632
6 back to Controller objects

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 607

 Group: Logical functions

OR/AND

PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 1

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 1
Input 2 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 2
Input 3 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 3 (optional)
Input 4 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 4 (optional)
Input 5 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 5 (optional)
Input 6 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 6 (optional)
Input 7 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 7 (optional)
Input 8 Binary Yes 0/1 Input 8 (optional)
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output
can be inverted.

Function OR Function AND

Input 1 Input 2 Output Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1

There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 608

 Image 7.30 Configuration of OR/AND block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 609

 XOR/RS

PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 39

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..2
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical (boolean) XOR operation of two binary operands or several variants of the RS
flipflop function. Both Inputs and Output can be inverted.

Function type XOR

Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

The result of XOR operation between two binary inputs (Input 1 and Input 2) is defined by table below.

Function type RS
R-latch S-latch E-latch JK-latch
Input 2 (R) Input 1 (S)
Q
-1 -1 -1 -1
0 0 Q Q Q Q
0 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -1
1 1 0 1 Q NOT(Q )
-1
The Q denotes the state of the RS block output in the last evaluation cycle.
The block Output value is given by the selected RS flip-flop variant evaluation:
R-latch: When both inputs (R, S) are set the Reset input is dominant.
S-latch: When both inputs (R, S) are set the Set input is dominant.
E-latch: When both inputs (R, S) are set the previous output is preserved.
JK-latch: When both inputs (R, S) are set the block output is negated.
The block has the setting for the variant functions of the RS flip-flop circuit. This setting is

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 610

 available in the block configuration dialog (i.e. it is done in the configuration and cannot be
changed dynamically while the PLC is running).

Image 7.31 Configuration of XOR/RS block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Comparators

Comp Hyst

PLC group Comparison of analog

inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 3
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input Analog No -2 .. 2 Compared value

32 32 Comparative level for

Input ON Analog No -2 .. 2
switching on

32 32 Comparative level for

Input OFF Analog No -2 .. 2
switching off
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
TThe block compares the Input value with two comparison levels I-ON and I-OFF. The evaluation of the
block depends on whether the I-ON level is higher than the I-OFF level or vice versa.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 611

 Image 7.32 Different On and Off levels

Image 7.33 Configuration of Comp Hyst block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Comp Time

PLC group Comparison of analog

inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 4
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 Analog No -2147483647..2147483647 Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0 .. 3000.0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output
will switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 612

 Image 7.34 Principle of delay

Image 7.35 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Comp Win

PLC group Comparison of analog

inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 18
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input Analog No -2 .. 2 Compared value
32 32
Input HIGH Analog No -2 .. 2 Upper window limit
32 32
Input LOW Analog No -2 .. 2 Lower window limit
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block output is switched on whenever the input value is in the range defined by Lo and Hi levels.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 613

 Image 7.36 Principle of delay

Image 7.37 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: All inputs and can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Time functions

Delay

PLC group Time functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 33

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp.
Input time 0 .. 214 748 364,7
Analog No pulse length generated by rising
up [s, m, h]
edge of the input

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 614

 Delay of the falling edge resp.
Input time 0 .. 214 748 364,7
Analog No pulse length generated by falling
down [s, m, h]
edge of the input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until
Input reset Binary No 0/1 new rising edge appears on Input
(when Input reset is deactivated
already)
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can operate in two operating modes (Delay mode, Pulse mode) = the block mode is defined by
the Pulse on edge checbox option - if checked, the Pulse mode is active.
Delay mode - the rising edge at the Output is generated with a delay of the Input time up lenght
when arising edge is detected on the Input. A falling edge at the Output is generated with a delay
of the Input time down length when a falling edge is detected on the Input. If the delayed falling
edge at the Output arrived before the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at
the Output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of Input time up length is generated at the Output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of Input time down length is generated at the Output when a falling edge is
detected.
Note: Because of 100 ms tact, the analog inputs are limited to resolution 0,1 s.

Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.

Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 615

 Image 7.38 Delay modes principles

Image 7.39 Configuration of Delay block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Timer

PLC group Time functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 38

Inputs

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 616

 Input Type Negation Range Function
The timer runs only if this input
Run Binary No 0/1
is active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to
Reload Binary No 0/1
the initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0 .. 214 748 364,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Analog value that shows Actual Timer Value
Actual
Lowest available value from:
Timer Analog No N/A
Value <PLC Resource 1 (page 523) to
PLC Resource 10 (page 525)>
Description
The block performs countdown Timer according to the selected Timer mode and actual inputs values.
The Timer mode could be selected as:
ComAp timer mode = if the Timer block is to generate a periodic signal at its Output
Timer mode TP = if the Timer block is to generate a pulse signal of defined width at its Output
Timer mode TON = if the Timer block is to delay the rising edge of the Input by a defined time.
Timer mode TOFF = if the Timer block is to delay the falling edge of the Iutput by a defined time.
Timer mode ComAp
The Timer is counting down only when the Run is on and Reset is off. It is also reset to the Reload
value if it reaches 0 or Reset is enabled. The state of the binary Output is negated whenever the
Timer value is zero.

Timer mode TP
The Timer counts down when Run is on.The Reset accepts only the rising edge and is required to
load the Reload value to the actual Timer value. The Output is set as long as the Actual Timer Value
is not equal to 0 (the countdown is in progress).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 617

 Timer mode TON
The Timer starts counting down with the rising edge of Run. The falling edge of Run, like the rising
edge of Reset, reloads the Reload value to actual Timer value. The Output is set when the Actual
Timer Value is 0 (the countdown is finished).

Timer mode TOF

The Timer starts counting down with the falling edge of the Run. The rising edge of Run, like the rising
edge of Reset, reloads the Reload value to actual Timer value. The Output is set if the Actual Timer
Value is not equal to 0 (the countdown is in progress).

Image 7.40 Configuration of Timer block

Note: For ComAp Timer mode: if you want the Output to start at logic 0, check the First down option.
Otherwise, the Output will start at logical 1.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 618

 IMPORTANT: For ComAp Timer mode: if no inputs are connected and the First down option
is not checked, the Output is active.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Math operations

Interpolation

PLC group

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 34

Inputs

Input Type Range Function

32 32
Input Analog -2 .. 2 Input value
32 32
X1 Analog -2 .. 2 Low X limit of definition
32 32
X2 Analog -2 .. 2 High X limit of definition
32 32
Y1 Analog -2 .. 2 Low Y limit of definition
32 32
Y2 Analog -2 .. 2 High Y limit of definition
Outputs

Output Type Range Function

Output Analog Y1 .. Y2 Transformed value
Out of Range Binary 0/1 Closed when input is out of range <X1, X2>
Data Invalid Binary 0/1 Closed when value on analog output is invalid
Description
This block performs a linear transformation of the input. The transformation function is defined by two
pairs of points [X1, Y1] and [X2, Y2]. If the Input lies inside of the interval <X1, X2> the Output is given
by the conversion. If the Input is lying outside of this interval, Output is saturated either on high or low
limit given by Y1 or Y2 and Out of Range is closed. If any of the inputs gets invalid, Data Invalid is closed
and Output is set to invalid value. The Output, Y1, Y2 has resolution and dimension based on settings of
the block. The resolution and dimensions of the X1 and X2 is same as resolution of the Input.

Image 7.41 Principle of Interpolation

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 619

 Image 7.42 Configuration of Interpolation block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Math AxB/C

PLC group
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 35
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input A Analog No -2 .. 2 First multiplicant
32 32
Input B Analog No -2 .. 2 Second multiplicant
32 32
Input C Analog No -2 .. 2 Divider
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32 Result of the mathematical

Output Binary No -2 .. 2
operation
Data Closed when Output is out of
Binary No 0/1
invalid range or when dividing by zero
Description
The block realizes the mathematical operation AxB/C. In case of any invalid data on any of the inputs, the
Output is set to invalid value and Data Invalid is closed. The Output has resolution and dimension
based on setting of the block.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 620

 Image 7.43 Configuration of Math AxB/C block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Math Fc.

PLC group

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 17

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input 1 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 1
32 32
Input 2 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 2
32 32
Input 3 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 3
32 32
Input 4 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 4
32 32
Input 5 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 5
32 32
Input 6 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 6
32 32
Input 7 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 7
32 32
Input 8 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input 8
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32 Result of the mathematical

Output Analog No -2 .. 2
operation
Description
This block performs basic mathematical operations of 2 to 8 operands based on selected function.All
invalid inputs are ignored. If any configured input contains an invalid value and at least one configured
input is valid, the output has value counted from only valid configured inputs based on the selected
function. If all configured inputs are invalid output has an invalid value.
The Output has a Resolution and Dimension according to the block settings.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 621

 Function Output
ADD - Addition Input 1 + Input 2 + … + Input N
SUB - Substraction Input 1 - Input 2 - … - Input N
|SUB| - Absolute value of substraction ABS(Input 1 - Input 2 - … - Input N)
AVG - Average Input 1 + Input 2 + … + Input N) / N
MIN - Minimal value MIN(Input 1, Input 2, … ,Input N)
MAX - Maximal value MAX(Input 1, Input 2, … ,Input N)

Note: In case of AVG operation type the N is number of inputs with valid value.

Image 7.44 Configuration of Math Fc. block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Ramp functions

Inc/Dec

PLC group

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 22

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 622

 Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Rising edge increase value of Output
Increment Binary No 0/1
by 1
Risinge edge decrease value of
Decrement Binary No 0/1
Output by 1
Rising edge resets Output to Default
Reset Binary No 0/1

32 32
Maximum Analog No -2 .. 2 Maximum value of Output
32 32
Default Analog No -2 .. 2 Initial value of Output
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32
Output Analog No -2 .. Maximum Output value
Description
The block increments/decrements Output based on rising edge on Increment/Decrement.
If the Increment and Decrement edges arrive simultaneously, the Output value does not change.
If the counter value is at Maximum and incrementation is coming, the counter will be 0 again.
If the counter value is at 0 and decrementing is coming, the counter will have be at Maximum.
The Output can be reset by rising edge on Reset.
The Output has a Resolution and Dimension according to the block settings.
Note: If both the inputs Increment and Decrement are active, the Output value is not changed.

IMPORTANT: When the controller is powered off the Output value is not preserved.

Image 7.45 Configuration of Inc/Dec block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 623

 LowPassFlt

PLC group
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 40
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input Analog No -2 .. 2 Input Value
Time Constant of the
Tau Analog No 0,0 .. 60,0 [s]
filter
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 Filtered Input
Description
The block performs the function of the first-order low pass filter. Typical usage of this function is filtering
of a value whose instantaneous value fluctuates rapidly around its mean, which is changing slower. The
Output has resolution and dimension based on setting of the block.

Image 7.46 Configuration of LowPassFlt block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Ramp

PLC group
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 19
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input Analog No -2 .. 2 Value to be ramped

32 32 Maximal rising rate of the

Up Analog No -2 .. 2
Output per second

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 624

 32 32 Maximal lowering rate of the
Down Analog No -2 .. 2
Output per second
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 Ramped value
Description
This block limits maximal rate of change of Output. The maximal rates Up and Down are adjustable
separately and ramping is based on enabled ramps. The Output has resolution and dimension based on
setting of the block.

Function Description
Enabled Up Output can be ramped only up.
Enabled Down Output can be ramped only down.
Enabled Up/Down Output can be ramped up and down.

Image 7.47 Configuration of Ramp block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Up/Down

PLC group

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 20

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Limit 1 Analog No -2 .. 2 First limit of Output
32 32
Limit 2 Analog No -2 .. 2 Second limit of Output

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 625

 Resets Output to Default
Reset Binary No 0/1
Output Value when active
Speed 32 32 Rising rate of Output per
Analog No -2 .. 2
Up second
Speed 32 32 Lowering rate of Output
Analog No -2 .. 2
Down per second
Up Binary No 0/1 Activates rising of Output
Activates lowering of
Down Binary No 0/1
Output
Default
32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 Initial value of Output
Value
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Analog No Limit 1 .. Limit 2 Output value
Description
This block works as an analog ramp controlled by binary inputs Up and Down with a defined rite of
increase/decrease.
The ramp speed is adjusted by Speed Up and Speed Down.
The Output limitation is set by Limit 1 and Limit 2. The default value of Output is set by Default Output
Value.
Activate Reset to reset Output to Default Output Value. The Output has resolution and dimension
based on setting of the block.
IMPORTANT: If both the inputs Up and Down are active, the Output is set to Default
Output Value.

Image 7.48 Configuration of Up/Down block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 626

 Group: Other functions

Analog Switch

PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 5
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input 1 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 1
32 32
Input 2 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 2
Input SW Binary No 0/1 Switching between Input value 1 and 2
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 Switch output
Description
The block is switching Input 1 and Input 2 based on value of Input SW. The Output has resolution and
dimension based on setting of the block.

Image 7.49 Configuration of Analog Switch block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Analog Switch 8

PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 45

Inputs

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 627

 Input Type Negation Range Function
32 32
Input 1 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 1
32 32
Input 2 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 2

32 32 Input value 3
Input 3 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 4
Input 4 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 5
Input 5 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 6
Input 6 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 7
Input 7 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 8
Input 8 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)
Input SW 1 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 1
Input SW 2 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 2
Input SW 3 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 3
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Switch output
32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 according to the SW 1,
SW 2 and SW 3
Description
The block works as an analog multiplexer. The output value could be selected from up to 8 inputs
according to the 'Input SW 3', 'Input SW 2' and 'Input SW 1' state is appropriate input value copied to the
output, see the table below.

Input SW 3 Input SW 2 Input SW 1 Output

0 0 0 Input 1
0 0 1 Input 2
0 1 0 Input 3
0 1 1 Input 4
1 0 0 Input 5
1 0 1 Input 6
1 1 0 Input 7
1 1 1 Input 8

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 628

 Image 7.50 Configuration of Analog Switch 8 block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Convert

PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 52
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32 Converted Input
Output Analog No -2 .. 2
value
The attribute of
Output Binary Yes 0/1 invalid data on
output
Description
The block converts the Input based on selected resolution and dimension, and reflects it to the Output.
Dimension is converted based on user configuration without any extra recalculation. Resolution is
converted and recalculation is used.
Example: If the input is 100,5 W and the convert block is used to convert dimensions to kW with
resolution 1, the output shows 101 kW.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 629

 Note: Conversion is done to Integer32, if the input value is out of Integer32 range, output value is set to
invalid status and error output is activated.

Image 7.51 Configuration of Convert block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 630

 Counter

PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MCB, MGCB
PLC Block ID 13
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input at which the edges
Input Count Up Binary No 0/1
are counted

32 Counter value limit for

Input Preset Limit Analog No 0 .. 2
activation of the output
Input Clear Binary No 0/1 Reset input
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output is activated when the counter value
Output Binary No 0/1
exceeds the limit
Analog value that shows Actual Counter
Actual Value
Counter Analog No N/A Lowest available value from:
Value <PLC Resource 1 (page 523) to
PLC Resource 10 (page 525)>
Description
The block works as a counter of edges (selectable rising, falling or both) with reset input and adjustable
counting limit. The maximal counter value is 2 147 483 647. The counter value is lost when the controller
is switched off. The output is activated when the counter value is equal to or higher than Input Preset
Limit and stays active until the block reset is done using Input Clear. Activating of the Input Clear resets
the counter value to 0 and deactivates the output. Holding the Input Clear active blocks the counting.
IMPORTANT: The counter value is lost when the controller is switched off.

Image 7.52 Configuration of the Counter block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 631

 Decomp. 4

PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications MCB, MGCB

PLC Block ID 24

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input Analog No -2 .. 2 Value to be "decomposed" to bits
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Bit 0,4,8,12,16,20,24,28 -
Output 1 Binary Yes 0/1
according to selected group of bits.
Bit 1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29 -
Output 2 Binary Yes 0/1
according to selected group of bits.
Bit 2,6,10,14,18,22,26,30 -
Output 3 Binary Yes 0/1
according to selected group of bits.
Bit 3,7,11,15,19,23,27,31 -
Output 4 Binary Yes 0/1
according to selected group of bits.
Description
The block converts the input analog value to binary form and provides selected bits as binary
outputs.The input four bits are selected by bit range selection (Bits).

Image 7.53 Configuration of Decomp. 4 block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 632

8.2 Alarms
What alarms are:
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm Management on page 100.

8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller

8.2.2 Alarms level 1 633
8.2.3 Alarms level 2 677

8.2.2 Alarms level 1

What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 633

 List of alarms level 1

Warning 636 Wrn DISTIN 23 645

Wrn Alarm e-mail 1 Fail 636 Wrn DISTIN 24 645
Wrn Alarm e-mail 2 Fail 636 Wrn DISTIN 25 645
Wrn Alarm e-mail 3 Fail 636 Wrn DISTIN 26 646
Wrn Alarm e-mail 4 Fail 636 Wrn DISTIN 27 646
Wrn Battery Overvoltage 637 Wrn DISTIN 28 646
Wrn Battery Undervoltage 637 Wrn DISTIN 29 646
Wrn Battery Voltage 637 Wrn DISTIN 30 647
Wrn Bus Meas Error 637 Wrn DISTIN 31 647
Wrn Default Password 638 Wrn DISTIN 32 647
Wrn Brute Force Protection Active 638 Wrn DISTIN 33 647
Wrn RTC Battery Flat 639 Wrn DISTIN 34 648
Wrn CAN2 Empty 639 Wrn DISTIN 35 648
Wrn Default Password 639 Wrn DISTIN 36 648
Wrn DISTIN 01 639 Wrn DISTIN 37 648
Wrn DISTIN 02 640 Wrn DISTIN 38 649
Wrn DISTIN 03 640 Wrn DISTIN 39 649
Wrn DISTIN 04 640 Wrn DISTIN 40 649
Wrn DISTIN 05 640 Wrn DISTIN 41 649
Wrn DISTIN 06 641 Wrn DISTIN 42 650
Wrn DISTIN 07 641 Wrn DISTIN 43 650
Wrn DISTIN 08 641 Wrn DISTIN 44 650
Wrn DISTIN 09 641 Wrn DISTIN 45 650
Wrn DISTIN 10 642 Wrn DISTIN 46 651
Wrn DISTIN 11 642 Wrn DISTIN 47 651
Wrn DISTIN 12 642 Wrn DISTIN 48 651
Wrn DISTIN 13 642 Wrn DISTIN 49 651
Wrn DISTIN 14 643 Wrn DISTIN 50 652
Wrn DISTIN 15 643 Wrn DISTIN 51 652
Wrn DISTIN 16 643 Wrn DISTIN 52 652
Wrn DISTIN 17 643 Wrn DISTIN 53 652
Wrn DISTIN 18 644 Wrn DISTIN 54 653
Wrn DISTIN 19 644 Wrn DISTIN 55 653
Wrn DISTIN 20 644 Wrn DISTIN 56 653
Wrn DISTIN 21 644 Wrn DISTIN 57 653
Wrn DISTIN 22 645 Wrn DISTIN 58 654

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 634

Wrn DISTIN 59 654 Wrn Total Running PQS Value Overflow 668
Wrn DISTIN 60 654 Wrn Unsupported PMS Mode 669
Wrn DISTIN 61 654 Wrong PLC Configuration 669
Wrn DISTIN 62 655 Alarm List Indication 669
Wrn DISTIN 63 655 ALI Bus Ph L1 Inverted 669
Wrn DISTIN 64 655 ALI Bus Ph L2 Inverted 670
Wrn DISTOUT 655 ALI Bus Ph L3 Inverted 670
Wrn Event e-mail 1 Fail 655 ALI Bus Ph Rotation Opposite 670
Wrn Event e-mail 2 Fail 656 ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted 670
Wrn Event e-mail 3 Fail 656 ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted 671
Wrn Event e-mail 4 Fail 656 ALI Mains Ph L3 Inverted 671
Wrn Load IMP/EXP Fail 656 ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite 671
Wrn MCB Fail 657 ALI Manual Restore 671
Wrn MCB Fail To Close 658 ALI Wrong Power Format 672
Wrn MCB Fail To Open 659 History Record Only 672
Wrn MCB Isolated 659 Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-N 672

Wrn MGCB Fail 660 Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-N 672

Wrn MGCB Fail To Close 661 Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-N 672

Wrn MGCB Fail To Open 661 Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-L2 673

Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set 662 Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-L3 673

Wrn PF(Pm) Fail 662 Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-L1 673

Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail 663 Hst Bus Undervoltage L1-N 673

Wrn Q(P) Fail 664 Hst Bus Undervoltage L2-N 674

Wrn Synchronization Fail 664 Hst Bus Undervoltage L3-N 674

Wrn RTC Battery Flat 665 Hst Bus Undervoltage L1-L2 674

Wrn SHAIN 1 665 Hst Bus Undervoltage L2-L3 674

Wrn SHAIN 2 665 Hst Bus Undervoltage L3-L1 675

Wrn SHAIN Collision 665 Hst Bus Overfrequency 675

Wrn SHBIN 1 666 Hst Bus Underfrequency 675

Wrn SHBIN 2 666 Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-N 675

Wrn SHBIN 3 666 Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph 676

Wrn SHBIN 4 666 Hst ROCOF 676

Wrn SHBIN 5 667 Hst Vector Shift 676

Wrn SHBIN 6 667 MP Mains Overload 676

Wrn SHBIN Collision 667 6 back to Alarms

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail 667
Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail 668
Wrn Soft Transfer Fail 668
Wrn Synchronization Fail 668

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 635

 Warning

Wrn Alarm e-mail 1 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Alarm e-mail 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 815
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 1 (page 427) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm e-mail 2 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Alarm e-mail 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 816
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 2 (page 427) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm e-mail 3 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Alarm e-mail 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 817
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 3 (page 427) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm e-mail 4 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Alarm e-mail 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 818
Description The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 636

 address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 4 (page 428) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Overvoltage

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Battery Overvoltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 941
This alarm is activated when Battery Voltage (page 468) is over Battery
Overvoltage (page 270) for period longer than Battery Under And
Description
Overvoltage Delay (page 270).
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Undervoltage

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Battery Undervoltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 940
This alarm is activated when Battery Voltage (page 468) is bellow Battery
Undervoltage (page 270) for period longer than Battery Under And
Description
Overvoltage Delay (page 270).
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Voltage

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Battery Voltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
This alarm is activated when Battery Voltage (page 468) is out of range given
Description by Battery Undervoltage (page 270) and Battery Overvoltage (page 270)
for period longer than Battery Under And Overvoltage Delay (page 270)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Bus Meas Error

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Bus Meas Error
Alarm evaluated Bus Meas Error Protection (page 304) != Disabled

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 637

 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 143
This protection is activated in case that voltage mismatch on Bus side is
detected for longer than 20 seconds.The mismatch is detected according to the
conditions below:
Own MCB and MGCB (in case of MGCB application) was closed and
Description LBO Mains Healthy (page 579) is active
Any other controller in Control Group (page 337) closed MGCB
BTB connected another Control Group with MCB Feedback or controller
with closed MGCB
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Default Password

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Default Credentials
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1071
This alarm is active until the default password for administrator account is
Description
changed.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Brute Force Protection Active

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1237
This alarm is activated when account break protection detects possible attack
and at least one account is blocked according to Account break protection rules.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601).
Note: In case that the alarm stays active even that it should already be
Description inactive, do the following to get rid of it:
1. Disconnect all peripheries (displays, ethernet, etc.)
2. Wait for 20 minutes - the alarm should become inactive
3. Connect with InteliConfig using USB - Quick connection
4. Acknowledge the alarm

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 638

 Wrn RTC Battery Flat

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn RTC Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated Only during power-on of the controller
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 42
This alarm indicates that the controller detected a flat RTC Battery during
Description power-on. The RTC battery is considered to be flat if its voltage drops bellow 2.8
V. To remove this alarm follow the Backup battery replacement (page 56).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn CAN2 Empty

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn CAN Intercontroller Empty
Alarm evaluated Only if CAN Intercontroller Empty Check (page 274) = Enabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 46
This alarm is activated when controller is alone on Intercontroller CAN
(Terminal Diagram (page 33) and/or Terminal Diagram (page 33) ) and
Description
setpoint CAN Intercontroller Empty Check (page 274) = Enabled.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Default Password

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Default Credentials
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1071
This alarm is active until the default password for administrator account is
Description
changed.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn DISTIN 01

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 01
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 01 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1156
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 1.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 639

 Wrn DISTIN 02

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 02
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 02 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1157
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 2.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 03

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 03
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 03 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1158
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 3.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 04

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 04
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 04 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1159
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 4.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 05

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 05
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 05 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1160
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 5.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 640

 Wrn DISTIN 06

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 06
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 06 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1161
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 6.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 07

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 07
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 07 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1162
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 7.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 08

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 08
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 08 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1163
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 8.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 09

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 09
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 09 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1164
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 9.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 641

 Wrn DISTIN 10

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 10
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 10 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1165
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 10.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 11

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 11
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 11 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1166
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 11.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 12

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 12
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 12 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1167
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 12.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 13

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 13
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 13 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1168
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 13.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 642

 Wrn DISTIN 14

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 14
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 14 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1169
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 14.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 15

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 15
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 15 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1170
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 15.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 16

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 16
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 16 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1171
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 16.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 17

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 17
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 17 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1172
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 17.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 643

 Wrn DISTIN 18

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 18
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 18 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1173
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 18.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 19

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 19
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 19 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1174
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 19.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 20

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 20
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 20 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1175
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 20.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 21

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 21
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 21 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1176
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 21.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 644

 Wrn DISTIN 22

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 22
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 22 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1177
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 22.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 23

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 23
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 23 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1178
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 23.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 24

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 24
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 24 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1179
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 24.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 25

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 25
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 25 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1180
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 25.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 645

 Wrn DISTIN 26

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 26
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 26 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1181
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 26.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 27

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 27
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 27 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1182
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 27.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 28

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 28
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 28 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1183
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 28.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 29

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 29
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 29 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1184
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 29.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 646

 Wrn DISTIN 30

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 30
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 30 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1185
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 30.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 31

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 31
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 31 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1186
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 31.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 32

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 32
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 32 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1187
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 32.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 33

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 33
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 33 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1344
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 33.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 647

 Wrn DISTIN 34

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 34
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 34 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1345
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 34.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 35

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 35
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 35 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1346
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 35.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 36

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 36
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 36 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1347
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 36.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 37

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 37
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 37 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1348
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 37.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 648

 Wrn DISTIN 38

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 38
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 38 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1349
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 38.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 39

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 39
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 39 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1350
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 39.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 40

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 40
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 40 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1351
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 40.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 41

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 41
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 41 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1352
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 41.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 649

 Wrn DISTIN 42

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 42
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 42 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1353
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 42.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 43

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 43
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 43 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1354
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 43.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 44

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 44
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 44 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1355
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 44.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 45

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 45
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 45 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1356
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 45.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 650

 Wrn DISTIN 46

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 46
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 46 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1357
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 46.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 47

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 47
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 47 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1358
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 47.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 48

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 48
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 48 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1359
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 48.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 49

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 49
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 49 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1360
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 49.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 651

 Wrn DISTIN 50

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 50
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 50 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1361
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 50.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 51

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 51
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 51 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1362
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 51.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 52

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 52
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 52 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1363
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 52.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 53

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 53
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 53 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1364
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 53.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 652

 Wrn DISTIN 54

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 54
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 54 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1365
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 54.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 55

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 55
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 55 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1366
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 55.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 56

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 56
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 56 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1367
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 56.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 57

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 57
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 57 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1368
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 57.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 653

 Wrn DISTIN 58

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 58
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 58 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1369
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 58.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 59

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 59
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 59 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1370
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 59.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 60

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 60
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 60 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1371
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 60.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 61

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 61
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 61 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1372
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 61.

6 back to List of other alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 654

 Wrn DISTIN 62

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 62
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 62 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1373
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 62.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 63

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 63
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 63 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1374
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 63.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTIN 64

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTIN 64
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-IN 64 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1375
This alarm is activated when DIST-IN data are not received from controller with
Description
CAN Controller Address (page 272) = 64.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn DISTOUT

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn DISTOUT
Alarm evaluated Only if DIST-OUT is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description This alarm is activated when failure of virtual module DIST-OUT is detected.

6 back to List of other alarms

Wrn Event e-mail 1 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Event e-mail 1 Fail

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 655

 Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 734
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 1 (page 427) and email
wasn’t send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event e-mail 2 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Event e-mail 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 735
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 2 (page 427) and email
wasn’t send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event e-mail 3 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Event e-mail 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 736
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 3 (page 427) and email
wasn’t send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event e-mail 4 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Event e-mail 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 737
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted by setpoint E-mail Address 4 (page 428) and email
wasn’t send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Load IMP/EXP Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 656

 Alarmlist message Wrn Load IMP/EXP Fail
Alarm evaluated Always
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1448
This alarm is active when Load Control PTM Mode (page 240) = Imp/Exp and
#System Load Control PTM (page 239) = Load Shar but Mains
Measurement P is unavailable.
When this alarm is active, load is controlled as if Load Control PTM Mode
(page 240) = Baseload and #System Load Control PTM (page 239) =
Baseload.

Description Alarm is caused by:

Mains Measurement P (page 250) = None
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Analog Input and
LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is not configured
Value from LAI Mains Measurement P (page 250) has Invalid flag
(page 434)
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MCB Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist
Wrn MCB Fail
message
Alarm
Only if MCB Control Mode (page 253) = Internal
evaluated
Related
MCB, MGCB
applications
Alarm ID 90
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with position of the circuit breaker.
LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) does not match expected position given by LBO
MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579).
There is a mismatch between LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) and MCB
FEEDBACK NEGATIVE (PAGE 549).
Description
Self-opening of breaker with mains parameters without limits – not
considered as fault, MCB open command is issued when Mains fails according to
the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290).
Self-closing of breaker with mains parameters with limits – not considered
as fault, MCB close command is issued after MCB Close Delay (page 288).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 657

 Image 7.54 MCB Fail

This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MCB Fail To Close

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist
Wrn MCB Fail To Close
message
Alarm
Only if MCB Control Mode (page 253) = Internal
evaluated
Related
MCB, MGCB
applications
Alarm ID 1553
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
closing.
LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579) closed but LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547)
Description did not closed in 2 seconds.
Self-closing of breaker with mains parameters with limits – not considered
as fault, MCB close command is issued according to the setpoint MCB Opens
On (page 290).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 658

 Image 7.55 MCB Fail To Close

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MCB Fail To Open

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist
Wrn MCB Fail To Open
message
Alarm
Only if MCB Control Mode (page 253) = Internal
evaluated
Related
MCB, MGCB
applications
Alarm ID 1552
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
opening.
LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 579) opened but LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547)
did not opened in 2 seconds.
Self-opening of breaker with mains parameters without limits - not
considered as fault, MCB open command is issued according to the setpoint
MCB Opens On (page 290).

Description

Image 7.56 MCB Fail To Open

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MCB Isolated

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Isolated

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 659

 Alarm evaluated Only if MCB ISOLATED (PAGE 550) is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 548
This alarm is activated by the LBI MCB ISOLATED (PAGE 550) and it signalizes
Description
that Load is cut off from Mains by an external isolator.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MGCB Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist
Wrn MGCB Fail
message

Alarm
Only if Application Mode (page 472) = MGCB and GCB Control Mode (page 254) !=
evaluated
External
Related
MGCB
applications
Alarm ID 91
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with position of the circuit breaker.
LBI GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) does not match expected position given by LBO
MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 584).
There is a mismatch between LBI GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 552) and GCB
FEEDBACK NEGATIVE (PAGE 553).

Description

Image 7.57 MGCB Fail

This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 660

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn MGCB Fail To Close

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist
Wrn MGCB Fail To Close
message

Alarm
Only if Application Mode (page 472) = MGCB and GCB Control Mode (page 254) !=
evaluated
External
Related
MGCB
applications
Alarm ID 1555
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
closing.
LBO MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 584) closed but LBI GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE
552) did not closed in Waiting For Breaker Feedback (page 1) seconds.

Description

Image 7.58 MGCB Fail To Close

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn MGCB Fail To Open

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist
Wrn MGCB Fail To Open
message

Alarm
Only if Application Mode (page 472) = MGCB and GCB Control Mode (page 254) !=
evaluated
External
Related
MGCB
applications
Alarm ID 1554
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
opening.
Description
LBO MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 584) opened but LBI GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE
552) did not opened in 2 seconds.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 661

 Image 7.59 MGCB Fail To Open

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1292
This alarm is active when password reset e-mail address is not filled. Fill out the
Description
password reset e-mail via InteliConfig to remove this alarm.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Parallel Work
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Parallel Work
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description This alarm is active when MGCB is closed externally while MCB is closed.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn PasswEnterBlock
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message PasswEnterBlock
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
This alarm is issued to indicate that user will not be able to type in password for
Description set amount of time.
Note: This is cause by too many invalid attempts.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn PF(Pm) Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 662

 Alarmlist message Wrn PF(Pm) Fail
Only when PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) = PF(Pm) and at least one
Alarm evaluated
Gen-set is excited
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1048
This alarm indicates PF(Pm) Control Fail which can be caused by:
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value and
Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper
Note: Function is evaluated as PF/Q Request Source (page 243) =
Setpoint

Description curve is not available in configuration - evaluated during controller

initialization only
Note: Function is evaluated as PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) =
PF Control

curve has changed resolution

This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn PF/Q IMP/EXP Fail
Alarm evaluated Always
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1054
This alarm is active when PF/Q Regulation Type (page 245) = Import/Export
PF/Q Control and #System PF Control PTM (page 244) = Var Shar but Mains
Measurement P or Q is unavailable.
When this alarm is active, PF/Q is controlled as if PF/Q Regulation Type
(page 245) = Base PF/Q Control and #System PF Control PTM (page 244) =
Base PF.
Alarm is caused by:
Mains Measurement P (page 250) = None

Description Mains Measurement P (page 250) = Analog Input and

LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT P (PAGE 597) is not configured
Value from LAI Mains Measurement P (page 250) has Invalid flag
(page 434)
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = None
Mains Measurement Q (page 251) = Analog Input and
LAI MAINS MEASUREMENT Q (PAGE 597) is not configured
Value from LAI Mains Measurement Q (page 251) has Invalid flag
(page 434)

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 663

 This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Production Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Production Mode
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm is active when the controller has turned on Production mode. In turned on
Description Production mode the user has the highest level 3 access without performing log
in.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Q(P) Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Q(P) Fail
Only when PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) = Q(P) and at least one Gen-
Alarm evaluated
set is excited
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1051
This alarm indicates Q(P) Control Fail which can be caused by:
PF/Q Request Source (page 243) = Analog External Value and
Breaker state (page 473) = ParalOper
Note: Function is evaluated as PF/Q Request Source (page 243) =
Setpoint

Description Q(P) (PAGE 599) curve is not available in configuration - evaluated

during controller initialization only.
Note: Function is evaluated as PF/Q Control PTM Mode (page 244) =
PF Control

Q(P) (PAGE 599) curve has changed resolution

This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Synchronization Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Reverse Synchro Fail
Alarm evaluated Only if LBO REVERSE SYNCHRONIZATION (PAGE 590) is closed
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 93
This alarm is activated when Reverse Synchronization fails. Reverse
Description
Synchronization is activated when synchronization is done over MCB breaker.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 664

 This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn RTC Battery Flat

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn RTC Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated Only during power-on of the controller
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 42
This alarm indicates that the controller detected a flat RTC Battery during
Description power-on. The RTC battery is considered to be flat if its voltage drops bellow 2.8
V. To remove this alarm follow the Backup battery replacement (page 56).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHAIN 1

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHAIN 1
Alarm evaluated Only if SHAIN 1 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 36
This alarm is activated when shared analog inputs are not received from SHAIN
Description
module 1.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHAIN 2

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHAIN 2
Alarm evaluated Only if SHAIN 2 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 233
This alarm is activated when shared analog inputs are not received from SHAIN
Description
module 2.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHAIN Collision

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHAIN Collision
Alarm evaluated Only if SHIN 1 or SHAIN 2 module is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 38
This alarm is activated when controller receives shared analog inputs of any
Description
SHAIN module from more than just one controller.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 665

 This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHBIN 1

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN 1
Alarm evaluated Only if SHBIN 1 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 32
This alarm is activated when shared binary inputs are not received from SHBIN
Description
module 1.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHBIN 2

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN 2
Alarm evaluated Only if SHBIN 2 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 33
This alarm is activated when shared binary inputs are not received from SHBIN
Description
module 2.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHBIN 3

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN 3
Alarm evaluated Only if SHBIN 3 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 34
This alarm is activated when shared binary inputs are not received from SHBIN
Description
module 3.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHBIN 4

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN 4
Alarm evaluated Only if SHBIN 4 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 35
This alarm is activated when shared binary inputs are not received from SHBIN
Description
module 4.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 666

 Wrn SHBIN 5

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN 5
Alarm evaluated Only if SHBIN 5 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 216
This alarm is activated when shared binary inputs are not received from SHBIN
Description
module 5.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHBIN 6

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN 6
Alarm evaluated Only if SHBIN 6 is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 217
This alarm is activated when shared binary inputs are not received from SHBIN
Description
module 6.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SHBIN Collision

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SHBIN Collision
Alarm evaluated Only if at least one of SHBIN 1 to SHBIN 6 modules is configured
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 37
This alarm is activated when controller receives shared binary inputs of any
Description SHBIN module from more than just one controller.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Only when SNMP Agent (page 383) = Enabled and SNMP Traps IP Address
Alarm evaluated
1 (page 423) is set.
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 823
This alarm is activated if sending of SNMP trap to IP address set by SNMP
Description
Traps IP Address 1 (page 423) failed.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 667

 Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Only when SNMP Agent (page 383) = Enabled and SNMP Traps IP Address
Alarm evaluated
2 (page 423) is set.
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 824
This alarm is activated if sending of SNMP trap to IP address set by SNMP
Description
Traps IP Address 2 (page 423) failed.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Soft Transfer Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Soft Transfer Fail
Alarm evaluated During transition of load
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 852
This alarm is activated when loading/unloading was not finished in time Load
Description Ramp (page 343) +10%.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Synchronization Fail

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Synchronization Fail
Alarm evaluated During synchronization
Related applications MGCB
Alarm ID 94
This alarm is activated if the synchronization fails, e.g. Synchronization
Description Timeout (page 348) elapses.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn Total Running PQS Value Overflow

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Total Running PQS Value Overflow
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1077
This alarm is activated in case the sum of all Controllers' apparent power is
Description
above range of value Total Running Samax (page 463).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 668

 Changing of the power format should be considered if this alarm appears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Unsupported PMS Mode

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrn Unsupported PMS Mode
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1044
This alarm is active if setpoint #Power Management Mode (page 315) = N/A
Description
Mode.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrong PLC Configuration

Alarm Type Warning (page 186)

Alarmlist message Wrong PLC Configuration
Alarm evaluated Always
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 41
This alarm is activated when the PLC - Programmable Logic Controller
(page 152) configuration is invalid.Once the alarm is active the whole PLC does
Description
not work. This alarm will be active until the PLC configuration is not fixed and
the archive is written to the controller.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm List Indication

ALI Bus Ph L1 Inverted

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Bus Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 928
Description This alarm is activated when Bus Phase L1 is inverted.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 669

 ALI Bus Ph L2 Inverted

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Bus Ph L2 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 929
Description This alarm is activated when Bus Phase L2 is inverted.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Bus Ph L3 Inverted

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Bus Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 930
Description This alarm is activated when Bus Phase L3 is inverted.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Bus Ph Rotation Opposite

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Bus Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 847
This alarm is activated when controller detects wrong phase rotation, e.g.
Description Phase Rotation (page 266) is set to Clockwise and actual rotation is
Counterclockwise, on the Bus side.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 925
Description This alarm is activated when Mains Phase L1 is inverted.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 670

 ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 926
Description This alarm is activated when Mains Phase L2 is inverted.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph L3 Inverted

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
MCB, MGCB
Related applications

Alarm ID 927
Description This alarm is activated when Mains Phase L3 is inverted.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 158
This alarm is activated when controller detects wrong phase rotation, e.g.
Phase Rotation (page 266) is set to Clockwise and actual rotation is
Description
Counterclockwise, on the Mains side.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Manual Restore

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Manual Restore
Only if Controller mode (page 267) = AUTO and Return From Island (page
Alarm evaluated
288) = Manual
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 783
This alarm is activated after MAINS HEALTHY (PAGE 579) is closed and Mains
Description Return Delay (page 287) elapses and Gen-sets are loaded.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 671

 ALI Wrong Power Format

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication (page 186)

Alarmlist message ALI Wrong Power Format
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 149
This alarm is activated when there is inconsistency of Power Formats And
Description Units (page 164) on any controller which is connected via CAN2 (page 17) or
Communication peripherals (page 17).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

History Record Only

Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >V L1-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 98
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >V L2-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 99
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >V L3-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 100
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 672

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Overvoltage L1-L2

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >V L1-L2
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 107
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Overvoltage L2-L3

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >V L2-L3
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 108
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Overvoltage L3-L1

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >V L3-L1
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 109
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Undervoltage L1-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <V L1-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 95
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 673

 Hst Bus Undervoltage L2-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <V L2-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 96
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Undervoltage L3-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <V L3-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 97
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Undervoltage L1-L2

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <V L1-L2
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 104
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Undervoltage L2-L3

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <V L2-L3
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 105
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 674

 Hst Bus Undervoltage L3-L1

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <V L3-L1
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 106
This alarm is activated by Bus <>V Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Overfrequency

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus >f
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>f Protection (page 302) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 121
This alarm is activated by Bus <>f Protection (page 302).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Underfrequency

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus <f
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>f Protection (page 302) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 120
This alarm is activated by Bus <>f Protection (page 302).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-N

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus V Unbalance Ph-N
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 589
This alarm is activated by Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 675

 Hst Bus Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Bus V Unbalance Ph-Ph
Alarm evaluated Only if Bus <>V Protection (page 299)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 588
This alarm is activated by Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 299).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst ROCOF

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst ROCOF 1
Only if ROCOF Protection (page 306) = Enabled or (ROCOF Protection
Alarm evaluated
(page 306) = Parallel Only and MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is active)
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 851
This alarm is activated by ROCOF Protection (page 306).

Description Note: There are 4 ROCOF Protections which can be enabled.

ROCOF Protection (page 306)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst Vector Shift

Alarm Type History Record Only (page 186)

Alarmlist message Hst Vector Shift
Only if Vector Shift Protection (page 305) = Enabled or (Vector Shift
Alarm evaluated Protection (page 305) = Parallel Only and MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 547) is
closed)
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 850
Description This alarm is activated when Vector shift (page 137) is detected.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Overload

Alarm Type Hst

Alarmlist message MP Mains Overload
Alarm evaluated While Gen-set is excited
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 23
Description This alarm is activated by overload on Mains.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 676

8.2.3 Alarms level 2
What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.

List of alarms level 2

Mains Protection 678
MP Mains Overvoltage L1-N 678
MP Mains Overvoltage L2-N 678
MP Mains Overvoltage L3-N 679
MP Mains Overvoltage L1-L2 679
MP Mains Overvoltage L2-L3 680
MP Mains Overvoltage L3-L1 680
MP Mains Undervoltage L1-N 681
MP Mains Undervoltage L2-N 681
MP Mains Undervoltage L3-N 682
MP Mains Undervoltage L1-L2 682
MP Mains Undervoltage L2-L3 683
MP Mains Undervoltage L3-L1 684
MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph 684
MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-N 685
MP Mains Overfrequency 686
MP Mains Underfrequency 686
Mains Protection + FltRes 687
MPR Current Unbalance 687
Hst IDMT Overload 687
MPR IDMT Mains >A 687
MPR Short Circuit 687
Sd Battery Flat 688
System Stop 688
Stp Request Under MinPowerPTM 688
6 back to Alarms

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 677

 Mains Protection

MP Mains Overvoltage L1-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >V L1-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 125
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445) rises over preset
value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Overvoltage L2-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >V L2-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 126
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
Description This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) rises above
preset value.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 678

 Application Mode (page 472)
SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Overvoltage L3-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >V L3-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 127
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).

Application Mode (page 472)

Description
SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Overvoltage L1-L2

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >V L1-L2

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 131
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
Description
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445) rises over

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 679

 preset value.

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Overvoltage L2-L3

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >V L2-L3

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 132
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) rises over
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Overvoltage L3-L1

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >V L3-L1

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 680

 Alarm ID 133
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).

Application Mode (page 472)

Description
SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Undervoltage L1-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <V L1-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 122
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L1-N (page 445) drops below
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Undervoltage L2-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <V L2-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 681

 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 123
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) drops below
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Undervoltage L3-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <V L3-N

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 124
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L3-N (page 445) drops below
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Undervoltage L1-L2

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <V L1-L2

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 682

 Application Mode (page 472)
SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 128
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L1-L2 (page 445) drops below
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Undervoltage L2-L3

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <V L2-L3

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 129
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) drops below
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 683

 MP Mains Undervoltage L3-L1

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <V L3-L1

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Mains <>V Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 130
This alarm is activated by Mains <>V Protection (page 296).
This alarm is activated when Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page 446) drops below
preset value.

Description Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph

Application Mode
Alarm Type
(page 472)
Alarm Type SPTM Mains Protection (page 186)
MINT History Record Only (page 186)
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MPMains V Unbalance Ph-Ph

Application Mode
Evaluated
(page 472)
Only if Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection
Alarm evaluated SPTM
(page 298) != Disabled
MINT All the time
Only if Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 298) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 592
This alarm is activated by Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 298)
This alarm is activated when relative difference between Mains Voltage L1-L2
Description
(page 445), Mains Voltage L2-L3 (page 445) or Mains Voltage L3-L1 (page
446) rises over preset value.

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 684

 Application Mode
Behavior
(page 472)
Alarm is activated by Mains Voltage Unbalance
SPTM
Protection (page 298)
Protection is always active. Alarm is activated
when relative difference between bus voltages
MINT rises over Bus V Unbalance (page 308) for
period longer than Bus V Unbalance Delay
(page 308).
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Voltage Unbalance Ph-N

Application Mode
Alarm Type
(page 472)
Alarm Type SPTM Mains Protection (page 186)
MINT History Record Only (page 186)
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains V Unbalance Ph-N

Application Mode
Evaluated
(page 472)
Only if Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection
Alarm evaluated SPTM
(page 298) != Disabled
MINT All the time
Only if Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 298) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 593
This alarm is activated by Mains Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 298)
This alarm is activated when relative difference between Mains Voltage L1-N
(page 445), Mains Voltage L2-N (page 445) or Mains Voltage L3-N (page
445) rises over preset value.

Application Mode
Behavior
(page 472)
Description Alarm is activated by Mains Voltage Unbalance
SPTM
Protection (page 298)
Protection is always active. Alarm is activated
when relative difference between bus voltages
MINT rises over Bus V Unbalance (page 308) for
period longer than Bus V Unbalance Delay
(page 308).
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 602).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 685

 MP Mains Overfrequency

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains >f

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Bus <>f Protection (page 302)!= Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 135
This alarm is activated by Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

Application Mode (page 472)

Description
SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

MP Mains Underfrequency

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm Type
MINT
Mains Protection (page 186)
Alarmlist message MP Mains <f

Application Mode (page 472)

SPTM
Alarm evaluated
MINT
Only if Bus <>f Protection (page 302) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 134
This alarm is activated by Bus <>f Protection (page 302).

Application Mode (page 472)

Description
SPTM
MINT
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliMains 510 Global Guide 686

 Mains Protection + FltRes

MPR Current Unbalance

Alarm Type Mains Protection + FltRes (page 186)

Alarmlist message MPR Current Unbalance
Alarm evaluated Only if Current Unbalance Protection (page 295) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1064
This alarm is activated by Current Unbalance Protection (page 295).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Hst IDMT Overload

Alarm Type Protection types (page 186)Mains Protection + FltRes (page 186)
Alarmlist message Hst IDMT Overload
Alarm evaluated Only if Overload Protection (page 292) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 147
This alarm is activated by Overload Protection (page 292).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

MPR IDMT Mains >A

Alarm Type Mains Protection + FltRes (page 186)

Alarmlist message MPR IDMT Mains >A
Alarm evaluated Only if IDMT Mains Overcurrent Protection (page 293) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1063
This alarm is activated by IDMT Mains Overcurrent Protection (page 293).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

MPR Short Circuit

Alarm Type Mains Protection + FltRes (page 186)

Alarmlist message MPR Short Ciruit
 Alarm evaluated Only if Short Circuit Protection (page 296) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1066
This alarm is activated by Short Circuit Protection (page 296).
Description
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 603).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Battery Flat

Alarm Type Sd
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 52
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the Controller. If this
situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so exhausted that its voltage
Description
drops so low when starter motor is energized that it causes controller reset.
This alarm has FPS - FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 601).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

System Stop

Stp Request Under MinPowerPTM

Alarm Type System Stop (page 186)

Alarmlist message Stp Request under MinPowerPTM
Alarm evaluated Only if Minimal Power PTM Protection (page 303) != Disabled
Related applications MCB, MGCB
Alarm ID 1511
This alarm is activated if controller detects that the System goes below Minimal Power PTM
Description (page 277), Minimal Power PTM Protection Del (page 278) elapsed and Minimal Power
PTM Protection (page 303) is not Disabled.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

8.3 Modules
8.3.1 CAN modules
Supported combinations of modules 689
Module's protections 690
Theory of binary inputs and outputs 690
Extension modules 694

Supported combinations of modules

The maximal number of CAN modules is limited by the number of the controller's generic modules. Once the physical
module is configured, it allocates necessary generic modules. So, it is possible to configure as many CAN modules as many
generic modules are available. The maximum number of CAN modules is also limited by the number of addresses (indexes)
that can be configured for each type of the generic module. CAN modules and generic modules share indexes.
Example: If you configure Inteli IO8/8 module which is using 1x BI, BO, and AO generic module with index (address) 1,
any other module using same generic modules will not be able to be configured with index (address) 1 (IGS-PTM, Inteli
AIO9/1).

Each generic module has 8 "terminals" (inputs/outputs) and the InteliMains 510 has the following amount of the generic
modules:
AI generic: 10
AO generic: 8
BI generic: 16
BO generic: 12
In the table below, you can see how many generic modules are necessary for each CAN module and how many indexes are
available for each type of CAN module in the InteliMains 510.

Max number of
CAN Module AI generic AO generic BI generic BO generic
indexes
Inteli AIN8 10 1 0 0 0
Inteli IO 8/8 12 0 1 1 1
Inteli IO 16/0 8 0 1 2 0
IGL-RA15 4 0 0 0 2
IGS-PTM 4 1 1 1 1
Inteli AIO9/1 5 2 1 0 0
Inteli AIN8TC 10 1 0 0 0
I-AOUT8 4 0 1 0 0
IS-BIN16/8 7 0 0 2 1

Note: When configuring modules do not forget to let first 4 indexes free for modules which can't use high addresses such as
IGL-RA15, IGS-PTM, AIO9/1, I-AOUT8.
 Note: Module Inteli IO8/8 has available AOUT only if it is configured with index number below 9 and Inteli AIO9/1 has
available AOUT only if it is configured with index number below 5.

Note: Module Inteli IO8/8 with older FW than 1.3.1.2 has available AOUT only if it is configured with index number below 5.

Module's protections
Each configured CAN module can has it's own protection and protection state. For setup: connect the controller via
InteliConfig → Control → Controller Configuration → Modules → Module Settings.
Protection Upon Module Failure
None - No alarm will be activated if module fails. It is not possible to use the User Protection State.
Warning - Wrn alarm is activated if module fails.

Note: The name and color of the alarm is automatically generated according to the options Protection Upon Module
Failure, Module Name, and Module Index. The module name is automatically generated or renamed by the user.

Protection State - If you check the check box the new User Protection State will be displayed in the User Protection
States group in the Values after the configuration is imported to the CU.
Note: The name of the User Protection State is automatically generated according to the options Protection Upon Module
Failure, Module Name, and Module Index. The module name is automatically generated or renamed by the user.

Example: Wrn Inteli AIN8 10 = Warning upon module failure of the Inteli AIN8 module with index 10.

Theory of binary inputs and outputs

Binary inputs 690
Binary outputs 692
Type of the binary inputs/outputs of some configured modules using BINs or BOUTs can be changed via Inteli Config. For
setup: connect the controller via InteliConfig → Control → Controller Configuration → Modules → Module Settings → Binary
Inputs Type / Binary Outputs Type.
See the fallowing chapters for more details.

Binary inputs

Pull Down
The pull-down logic is used when it is required to ensure that the logical value of inputs settles at the expected logical level
whenever external devices are turned off, or they are at a high impedance state. It ensures that input is at a defined low logic
level when the connection with external devices is lost. In the controller (module), the pull-down resistor is used to connect
the input to the -BAT (0 V), so the log 0 (open state) is represented by 0 V. This connection is used as prevention against
fluctuations and an undefined state at the input.
The principle of internal connection is shown in the picture below.
The bulb represents internal state of binary input.
 In case the “COM” (+Ucc) is not connected to the input terminal “BIN” then the internal state is logical 0.
In case the “COM” (+Ucc) is connected to the input terminal “BIN” then the internal state is logical 1.

Note: There is not any COM terminal on the controller, the wire is directly connected to the input terminal "BIN", so if input
signal is log 1 the +Ucc is directly connected to the "BIN".

Pull Up
The pull-up logic is used when it is required to establish an additional loop over the critical components while making sure
that the voltage is well-defined even when the switch is open. It ensures that input and wiring is at a defined high logical level
in the absence of an input signal. In the controller (module), the pull-up resistor is used to connect the input to the +BAT
(+Ucc), so the log 0 (open state) is represented by +Ucc. This connection is used as prevention against fluctuations and an
undefined state at the input.
The principle of internal connection is shown in the picture below.
The bulb represents internal state of binary input.
In case the input terminal “BIN” (+Ucc) is not connected to the “COM” (GND) then the internal state is logical 0.
In case the input terminal “BIN” (+Ucc) is connected to the “COM” (GND) then the internal state is logical 1.
Note: There is not any COM terminal on the controller, the wire is directly connected to the input terminal "BIN", so if input
signal is log 1 the GND is directly connected to the "BIN".

6 back to Theory of binary inputs and outputs

Binary outputs

High side switch - HSS

The high side logic is used when load is permanently connected to the ground (GND) and when it is required to ensure that
the logical value of outputs settles at the expected logical level whenever the controller (module) is turned off, or at a high
impedance state. It ensures that external devices will not be randomly activated when the connection is lost.
The principle of internal connection is shown in the picture below.
The bulb represents internal state of binary output.
By activating of binary output terminal (BOUT), the switch is closed, which causes connection of the load to the VHS
(Voltage High side) and +Ucc, so the external state of the load is logical 1.
Low side switch - LSS
The low side logic is used when load is permanently connected to the voltage (+Ucc). In case module will be turned off or the
connection will be lost the external devices will be activated. It can be used as inverse logic for the detection of the lost
connection.
The principle of internal connection is shown in the picture below.
The bulb represents internal state of binary output.
By activating of binary output terminal (BOUT), the switch is closed, which causes connection of the load to the ground
(GND), so the external state of the load is logical 1.
Note: Because of safety reasons, the Low side switch is not supported in the InteliMains 510 controller. In case you need
BOUT to BIN logical communication between controllers using Pull Up BIN logic, you must use an external module with LSS
BOUT logic or any converter which converts the HSS controller's BOUT to LSS. The solution above is not recommended!
Try to reconsider your options and use the Pull Down BIN logic.
 6 back to Theory of binary inputs and outputs

Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 694
Inteli IO8/8 701
IGL-RA15 709
IGS-PTM 714
Inteli AIO9/1 721
Inteli AIN8TC 727
I-AOUT8 731
IS-BIN16/8 736

Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs and Impulse/RPM input. The module is connected to
controller by CAN1 (page 17) bus. It is possible to connect up to 10 Inteli AIN8 external units to one controller.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected the module
remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed detection is done by reset
of the module.
 Image 7.60 Inteli AIN8

Image 7.61 Inteli AIN8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals

Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN1 CAN1 (page 17) line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported by the controller.

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Supported sensors

Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) PT100 [°F] (fix) +-1V 4-20mA passive 0-250 ohm
PT1000 [°C] (fix) PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4V 4-20mA active 0-2400 ohm
NI100 [°C] (fix) NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5V 0-20mA passive 0-10k ohm
NI1000 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10V +-20mA active

Note: It is also possible to use User Curves as sensor.

CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.

Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins
 4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this case please
check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller works properly.
Lights Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address module doesn’t
communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator

Resistance sensor - 3 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ

Resistance sensor - 2 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ

Current sensor - active

Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive

Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Voltage sensor

Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1 (page 17)
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 221,5 grams

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ± 0,5 % of actual value + ± 2 Ω

6 back to Extension modules

Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs. The module is
connected to controller by CAN1 (page 17) bus.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 - 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 - 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
It is possible to connect up to 12 Inteli IO8/8 or 8 Inteli IO 16/0 external units to one controller.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected the module
remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed detection is done by reset
of the module.
 Image 7.62 Inteli IO8/8

Image 7.63 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN1 CAN1 (page 17) line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication
Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
High side switch
Low side switch
Always all 8 inputs are configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by switch on the
PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
can be configured as:
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5V, with adjustable frequency from 200Hz to 2400Hz, with step 1Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In case of failure
(different state of required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued (type of the alarm is set by “Protection
upon module failure” - (No protection / Warning)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.

CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary output and analog
outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has address A,
second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.

Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
 Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this case please
check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is dark while input
signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is set. When this
LED is shining, then module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. When this LED is dark, then the module is
configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector - status LED

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller works
properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address module doesn’t
communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs - pull up

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between BIN2 and COM
(COM is connected internally to the GND (-) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs - pull down

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between BIN2 and COM
(COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.
Binary outputs - high side

When high side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly Terminal VHS
(voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each binary output is 500 mA. Size
of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs - low side

When low side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power supply directly.
Minus potential is connected internally - dashed line.
Analog outputs
Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.

IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be connected to
the GND.

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1 (page 17)
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 240 grams

Analog outputs
Number of channels 2
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ± 20 mV + ±0,5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ± 100 µA + ±0,5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency - adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA
Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact
6 to 36 V DC
indication

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC

6 back to Extension modules

IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator (IGL-RA15) is designed as an extension signaling unit. The module is connected to controller by CAN1
(page 17) bus. It is possible to connect up to 4 IGL-RA15 external units to one controller.
The unit is equipped with a fully configurable tri-color (red, orange, green) LED for intuitive operation
together with high functionality.

Image 7.64 IGL-RA15

 Image 7.65 IGL-RA15 dimensions

Terminals

Horn Horn
CAN CAN1 (page 17) line
Power Power supply

CAN address

Address Jumper A Jumper B

1 OPEN OPEN
5+6 CLOSED OPEN
Customer defined CLOSED CLOSED

SW changing of CAN1 (page 17) address is enabled only when both jumpers are closed. Any one of these addresses (1+2
or 3+4 or 5+6 or 7+8) can be set by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is yellow
Press Lamp test sixteen times
Set the address up by pressing Horn reset.
The number of red luminous LEDs means the CAN1 (page 17) addresses (two for addresses 1+2, four for
addresses 3+4, six for addresses 5+6 and eight for addresses 7+8)
Press Lamp test
LED indication
Each LED color is adjusted independently of controller output settings. If controller output 1 is set as “Common Shutdown” it
doesn’t mean red LED1 color for iGL-RA15. The LEDs color can by adjust by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is yellow
Press Horn reset to change the LED1 color (green, yellow, red)
Press Lamp test to switch to the next LED color adjusting
Continue to adjust all LEDs color
After LED15 color adjusting press three times Lamp test

Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to normal
operation without changes saving.

Status LED
The signals LEDs are handled like binary outputs. It means all what can be configured to binary outputs can be also
configured to the LEDs of IGL-RA15.

LED status Description

Lights Configured logical output is active on the controller
Dark green LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller
Dark yellow or red LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was pressed.
Yellow or red LED blinks Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was still not pressed.

Power LED

LED status Description

Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment

Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn timeout counts
down. The timeout can by set by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times
Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.
The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (none for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s timeout, 2 for
10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
 Press Lamp test two times

Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to normal
operation without changes saving.

The horn is activated if:

Some of red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 712)
The horn can be silenced:
By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time

Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s execute the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the configured
colour. If the button is hold longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-step in green colour and
then in red colour. The horn is activated at the end of the test. After that the unit returns to normal operation. The horn can be
silenced with horn reset.

Wiring

* use terminator resistor only when IGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1A bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable has to be grounded at one point only!
Note: See the section Technical data (page 713) for recommended CAN bus cable type

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply voltage
Protection IP65
Interface to controller CAN1 (page 17)
Humidity 85%
Storage temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 20 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180x120x55 mm
Weight 950 g

Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC

CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kbps
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4,4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut min.0,25 mm
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB/100m
 Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3083A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN (www.belden.com) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3084A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3085A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE (www.lappcable.com)
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA

IMPORTANT: This module is not compatible with different than 250 kbps communication speed. If the ECU
module with 125 kbps communication speed is connected the whole system will automatically switch to the
125 kbps, and IGL-RA15 module will stop communicating.

6 back to Extension modules

IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog output. The
module is connected to controller by CAN1 (page 17) bus. It is possible to connect up to 4 IGS-PTM external units to one
controller.
 Image 7.66 IGS-PTM

Image 7.67 IGS-PTM dimensions

Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 (page 17) line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply

Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog inputs is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.

RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring
Supported sensors

Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 ohm
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the lower PCB.

IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliLite

Address configuration
If InteliLite controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers labeled ADR1 and
ADR2.

ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module BOUT module AIN module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4

Programing firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is used to
reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is dark while input
signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is set.
LED at power connector - status LED
 LED status Description
Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and controller properly
Lights
works.

Wiring
Binary inputs

Binary outputs
Resistance sensor

Note: Range: 0- 2400 Ω

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is necessary to
chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Voltage sensor

Note: Range 0-100 mV

Current sensor - passive

Note: Range: ± 0-20 mA

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is necessary to
chose +- 20mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Analog outputs

Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Interface to controller CAN1 (page 17)
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95×96×43 mm (3.7’×3.8’×1.7’)

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value

Analog outputs
Number of channels 1
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit
Binary inputs
Number of channels 8
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact indication 0 to 2 V DC
Max voltage level for close contact indication 8 to 36 V DC

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value

6 back to Extension modules

Inteli AIO9/1
Inteli AIO9/1 module is an extension module equipped with analog inputs and outputs – designed for DC measurement. The
module is connected to controller by CAN1 (page 17) bus. It is possible to connect up to 5 Inteli AIO9/1 external units to one
controller.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by rapid flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected the module
remains set for this speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed detection is done by
resetting of the module.
 Image 7.68 Inteli AIO9/1

Image 7.69 Inteli AIO9/1 dimensions

Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 9 channels

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1 channel
CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK (Upgrade of SW)

Analog inputs
4 channels AIN1 – AIN4 can be configured as:
Sensor ±65V (determined for measurement of battery voltage)
4 channels AIN5 – AIN8 can be configured as:
Thermocouples – type J,K or L (in °C or °F)
Sensor ±75mV DC – (for connecting current shunts)
 1 channel AIN9 can be configured as:
RTD (Pt1000, Ni1000)
Common resistance 0-2400Ω

Analog outputs
1 channel AOUT1. Type of output:
0-10V DC
0-20mA
PWM (5 V, freq 2.4 Hz ÷2.4 kHz)
Analog output has 4-pins connector – GND and one pin for each type of output.
All analog inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves ±65 V DC (fix linear) Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
PT1000 [°C] (fix) ±75 mV (fix linear) Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
NI1000 [°C] (fix) Thermocpl J [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
PT1000 [°F] (fix) Thermocpl K [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
NI1000 [°F] (fix) Thermocpl L [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)
0-2400 Ω (fix linear) Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs and outputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware upgrade is available via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST and switch OFF and
ON the power supply.
For programming use FlashProg PC tool version 4.4 or higher.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
 Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address module
doesn’t communicate with the controller)

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.

Measuring resistance – AIN9

2 – wire measurement

Ranges: Pt1000, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω.

Analog input 9 is determined for measuring resistance only.
Technical data

General data
Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)
Weight 248 grams
CAN1 – galvanic separated from power supply and
Interface to controller
measurement,

Analog inputs (not electric separated)

9 channels
0-65 V ± 0.25 % of actual value + ± 120 mV Measurement is not
Range galvanic separated from power supply, but IN- is not
AIN1-AIN4 – Voltage inputs interconnected with GND – there is floating measurement.
Accuracy of
± 0,1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
measurement
Range ± 75 mV (nominal) (measurement up to ±80 mV)
AIN5-AIN8 – Voltage inputs Accuracy of ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 75 µV
measurement Galvanic separated from power supply
Range 0- 2400 Ω
AIN9 resistance input Accuracy of ± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 4 Ω Pt1000, Ni1000 ± 2,5 °C
measurement It is not galvanic separated from power supply.

Analog output
I 0-20mA /500Rmax. ± 1 % of actual value + ± 200 uA
U 0-10V ± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 50 mV
PWM – 5 V, 200 Hz-2.4kHz 15 mA max.
Galvanic separated from power supply

Galvanic
CAN bus is galvanic separated from the measurement and power supply
separation

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection IP20
Current consumption 150 mA at 24 V ÷ 400 mA at 8 V
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C

The product is fully supported in firmware IGS-NT 3.1.1 or higher.

For information about support of this module in IGS-NT fw branches and ID-DCU – please read New Feature Lists.
6 back to Extension modules

Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple sensors only. The
module is connected to controller by CAN1 (page 17) bus. It is possible to connect up to 10 Inteli AIO9/1 external units to
one controller.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected the module
remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed detection is done by reset
of the module.

Image 7.70 Inteli AIN8TC

 Image 7.71 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

Terminals
 Analog input 8 analog Inputs
CAN CAN1 (page 17) line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

Analog inputs
8 channels
Can be configured as thermocouple sensors only
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection

Supported sensors

Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Note: “nc” means“ not cold junction compensation (by external sensor).In this case is used internal temperature sensor on
the PCB

CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.

Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address module
doesn’t communicate with the controller)

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Thermocouple

Terminator
Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1 (page 17)
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)
Weight 237.5 grams

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8, no galvanic separated
Range: ± 100 mV
Voltage Accuracy: ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV
(± 3 °C)

6 back to Extension modules

I-AOUT8
I-AOUT8 is an extension unit with 8 analog outputs. Each analog output can be switched to
0 to 20 mA DC
0 to 10 V DC
PWM (Pulse With Modulation on 1,2 kHz)
The module is connected to controller by CAN1 (page 17) bus. It is possible to connect up to 4 I-AOUT8 external units to
one controller. The corresponding module Address 1 to 4 (default 1) must be set on module (by Adr.1 and Adr.2 jumpers)
and in controller configuration. CAN1 terminating 120 ohm resistor jumper is connected as default. AGND terminals are on
the same potential.
Dimensions

Unit is 35 mm DIN rail mounted.

Connectors
POWER Power supply
CAN 1 CAN1 line
OUT1 - OUT8 Analog output
FLASH AT-link
J1 – J8 Output mode
A1, A2 CAN 1 address
CAN-R Terminating resistor
BOOT Programming
RESET Programming / reset
Tx, Rx CAN 1data
ST Power/module state

Address and jumpers setting

CAN Address
The module CAN address is set by jumpers A1 and A2. Set module CAN address correspondingly to configuration according
table below.

CAN Address A1 A2
1 Open Open
2 Close Open
3 Open Close
4 Close Close

Table 7.2 Setting CAN address

Output mode
Follow the p – I – I – U symbols on the module sticker. There are two equivalent positions for current output.

AOUT Symbol Function

PWM
p
Pulse-Width-Modulation

l 0 to 20 mA DC
 U 0 to 10 V DC

Table 7.3 Setting output mode

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is used to
reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.

CAN1 termination
I-AOUT8 has own CAN terminating resistor (120 ohm). Close jumper CAN-R to connect terminating resistor to CAN bus,
open jumper CAN-R disconnecting terminating resistor.

Wiring

PWM output PWM output 1200 Hz

Current output 0 to 20 Current output 0 to 20 mA

mA DC DC

Current output 0 to 20 Current output 0 to 20 mA

mA DC DC

Voltage output 0 to 10 Voltage output 0 to 10 V

V DC DC

Image 7.72 Possible output modes

Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 95 × 96 × 43 mm (3.7’ × 3.8’ × 1.7’)

Interface to controller CAN
Output 8 analog, no galvanic separation
 Type of analog output
0 to 10V DC ± 1 % , max 5 mA DC
0 to 20 mA DC ± 1 % , max 500 Ω
PWM 1200 Hz, 5V DC level, max 10 mA DC

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Analog output refreshment 320 ms
Current consumption max 300 mA (100 mA at 24 V)
RS232 interface TTL, firmware upgrade via AT-link.
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2.5 W

6 back to Extension modules

IS-BIN16/8
IS-BIN16/8 is an extension module with 16 binary inputs (galvanic separated) and 8 binary output (galvanic separated), 2
pulse inputs (frequency measurement or pulse counting). All I/O can be configured to any logical function or protection. It is
possible to connect up to 7 IS-BIN16/8 external units to one controller. External modules IS-BIN16/8 is connected to
controller CAN1 (page 17) bus. To operate external modules:
Connect all external modules to CAN1 bus line
On each module adjust I/O CAN1 address in the range of 1 to 7 for IS-BIN16/8 output, 1,3,5,7,9,11,13 for IS-BIN18/8
inputs
In case of use generic module in configuration you can set CAN address from 1 – 12
In case of set 0 CAN address - inputs/ outputs are deactivated
Input output address is displayed on the front panel LCD’s
Use PC configuration tool to configure controller according external modules setting
IS-BIN16/8 module has two separate CAN1 addresses for binary inputs Group 1, Group 2 and binary output Group (total
three addresses). The CAN1 address for BI Group 1 and for BO Group 2 can be adjusted on the IS-BIN16/8. The address for
BI Group 2 is set automatically to the address following BI Group 1.
Note: CAN address 0 disables corresponding CAN message (Group data are not send).
Terminals

CAN CAN1 line

BINARY INPUTS 16 binary inputs
BINARY OUTPUT 8 binary output
RPM1, RPM2 2 frequency inputs
POWER Power supply
INPUTS LDD CAN address
OUTPUT LDD CAN address

CAN Address
CAN 1 address is setting by following procedure:
Press Address buttons (for INPUTS address and OUTPUT address) during IS-BIN8 power supply on to switch to
addressing mode.
Then repeatedly press or keep pressed address button to adjust required address according to CONTROLLER
configuration.
After setting requested address, release the buttons and wait until the digits blink – it indicates write the changed address
to EEPROM memory.
 CAN 1 Address
Inputs Output
1. IS-BIN16/8 1 1
2. IS-BIN16/8 3 2
3. IS-BIN16/8 5 3
4. IS-BIN16/8 7 4
5. IS-BIN16/8 9 5
6. IS-BIN16/8 11 6
7. IS-BIN16/8 16 7

Table 7.4 Table of recommended CAN1 address setting

SW version check
Let suppose IS-AIN8 of SW version 1.4. Shortly press address button. Following sequence appears on the display: number
“1”, one second pause, number “4”, two second pause, number “1”, one second pause, number “4”, two second pause and
finally IS-AIN8 actual address.
Error message (e.g. SD BOUT2) appears on Controller screen when Binary input or output Address x is configured but
corresponding unit is not recognized (no message is received from CAN bus). Check IS configuration and corresponding
external IS-AIN, IS-BIN unit address setting.

LED indication

Tx Rx
Dark Blink Light Dark Blink Light
Any data are transmitted Data are transmitted Any data are received Data are received on
on the CAN1 line on the CAN1 line on the CAN1 line the CAN1 line

Table 7.5 Tx / Rx LED status

 Wiring

Image 7.73 CAN bus line has to be terminated by 120 ohm resistors on the both ends.

Note: CAN bus line has to be terminated by 120 ohm resistors on the both ends.
For longer distances is recommended to connect CAN COM terminals between all controllers and cable shielding to the
ground in one point!
Recommended CAN bus data cables see in Chapter Technical data.
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but line arrangement (no tails no star) is necessary-
Recommended CAN bus data cables see in Chapter Technical data.

Binary inputs
There are two groups of eight Binary inputs BI1 to BI8 and BI9 to BI16. Each group has a separate Common terminal COM1
and COM2. The Common terminal can be connected to positive or negative pole – see following drawing. Binary inputs are
galvanically separated from IS-BIN16/8 power supply.
Note: See the Theory of binary inputs and outputs (page 690) (Pull Up,Pull Down, High side switch, Low side switch).

Binary inputs Common terminal is connected to positive Binary inputs common terminal is connected to negative
supply terminal, Binary inputs contacts are closed to supply terminal, Binary inputs contacts are closed to
negative supply terminals. positive supply terminals.
 Input voltage range for opened contact is from 8 VDC to Power supply VDC. Input voltage range for closed contact is from 0
to 2 VDC. Voltage level is defined between Binary input and Binary input COM terminal and does not depend on “positive” or
“negative” connection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse inputs are not supported by the controller.

Binary output
The Common terminal can be connected to positive or negative pole (HW3.0 only) – see following drawing. Binary outputs
are galvanic separated from IS-BIN16/8 power supply (have a look at technical data). The maximum load values are 0.5 A /
36V for one output.

Binary output common terminal is connected to negative Binary output common terminal is connected to positive
supply terminal, Binary output contacts are closed to supply terminal, Binary output contacts are closed to
positive supply terminals. negative supply terminals.

Power supply fusing

A (2) respectively (1) amp fuse should be connected in-line with the power to the controller and modules, these items should
never bee connected directly to the starting battery.
Take care for proper controller, extension units and relays power supply fusing. Fuse value and type depends on number of
connected devices and wire length.
 Controller or unit Fuse
Controller T1A or T2A
IS-AIN8 T2A
IS-BIN16/8 T1A

Table 7.6 Recommended fuse (not fast) types

For more extension units use separate fusing according to the table above.
Controller power supply should never be connected to starter terminals.

Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 146 × 160 × 46 mm (5.79’ × 6.6’ × 1.83’)

Interface to controller CAN1

Binary inputs (galvanic separated)

Voltage level is defined between binary input and binary input COM terminal
Number of inputs 8+8
Input resistance 3000 Ω
Input voltage range 0-36 VDC
Input voltage level for open contact 8 to Power supply VDC
Input voltage level for close contact 0 to 2 VDC

Frequency inputs* (for IS-CU only)

RPM1
Type of sensor Magnetic pick-up
 Minimum input voltage 2 Vpk-pk (from 4 Hz to 4 kHz)
Maximum input voltage 50 Veff
Maximum measured frequency 8 kHz (min. input voltage 6Vpk-pk), frequency mode
RPM2
Type of sensor Contact or Active sensor
Minimal pulse width 10 ms, integration mode
Maximum measured frequency 60 Hz, integration mode

Relays outputs (galvanic separated) only HW 3.0 (non galvanic separated) HW 2.1
Number of output 8
Maximum current 0.5A DC
Maximum switching voltage 36 VDC

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection front panel IP20
Current consumption 250 mA** at 24 V
Humidity 95% without condensation
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2W

Standard conformity
Number of output 8
Low Voltage Directive EN 61010-1:95 +A1:97
EN 50081-1:94, EN 50081-2:96
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN 50082-1:99, EN 50082-2:97

*RPM1, RPM2 are available in IS-CU only **During powering up current can be up to 1.5A
6 back to Extension modules

Plug-in modules
IMPORTANT: 2nd generation of InteliMains 510 controllers does not support new modules and 3rd generation
does not support all old modules.

The available communication plug-in modules are:

 CM-RS232-485 – communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM2-4G-GPS – communication module for connection via 4G
CM3-Ethernet – communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP – extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs and with earth fault current protection

Note: Controller has 2 plug-in module slots.

Supported combinations of plug-in modules

Module CM-Ethernet CM-4G-GPS CM-RS232-485 EM-BIO8-EFCP

CM-Ethernet

CM-4G-GPS

CM-RS232-485

EM-BIO8-EFCP

CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliMains 510 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is required for
computer or Modbus connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and RS485 interfaces at
independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.
 Image 7.74 CM-RS232-485 interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power supply to
controller.

Image 7.75 Pinout of RS232 line

 Image 7.76 Pinout of RS485 line

Image 7.77 Jumpers description

Note: Balancing resistors should both be closed at only one device in the whole RS485 network.

Maximal distance of line is 10 m for RS232 line and 1200 m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120 Ω
Balancing resistor +5 V

Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation

CM3-Ethernet
CM3-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface for connecting
a PC through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the controller into a building
management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols).

Image 7.78 CM3-Ethernet interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power supply to
controller.

Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The module can also
be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.

Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 21
Weight ~30 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1W
Peak power consumption 2W
Operating temperature -40 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C

Ethernet port
100 Mbit/s, full duplex
RJ45 socket

Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are located in the
setpoint Ethernet.
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as well.
Status LED
Blinking frequency Color
Green – everything is OK
Red – some of following errors occurred:
1 Hz unplugged Ethernet cable
module cannot connect to AirGate
module can not obtain IP address from DHCP
Green – firmware is currently being programmed
10 Hz
Red – no firmware present in the module

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Install package to computer or open PSI to install it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware you want to
program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same module in
which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is re-established again automatically when the update process is
finished.

CM2-4G-GPS
CM2-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can work in two modes of
operation.

Image 7.79 CM2-4G-GPS module

 IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power supply to
controller.

IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30 °C to +75 °C.

Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.

CM2-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
CM2-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.

4G module types

If the anthenna is CELLULAR only and has 1 cable (OT1A4GXXMCX), it is connected to the 4G-MAIN connector.
If the anthenna is CELLULAR only and has 2 cables, cables are connected to the 4G-MAIN or 4G-DIV connectors (does
not matter which cable to which connector).
If the anthenna is a combination of CELLULAR/GPS and has 2 cables (OT1A4GGPSCX), then cable "4G/LTE" needs to
be connected to the 4G-MAIN connector and "GPS" cable to the GPS connector.
If the anthenna is a combination of CELLULAR/GPS and has 3 cables (OT2A4GGPSCX), then cables "4G/LTE" need to
be connected to the 4G-MAIN and 4G-DIV connectors (does not matter which cable to which connector) and "GPS" cable
to the GPS connector.
Note: Type of the cable is labeled on its side.
Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 15
Weight ~35 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1.7 W
Peak power consumption 10 W
Operating temperature -30 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C

GNSS
Antenna interface SMA female, 2.8 V / 20 mA
Antenna type Active

Cellular
2G (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) Quad band,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
3G (UMTS/HSPA+) Seven band, 800 (BdXIX) /
850 (BdV) / 900 (BdVIII) / AWS (BdIV) / 1800
Supported networks and frequency bands (BdIX) / 1900 (BdII) / 2100MHz (BdI)
4G (LTE) Twelve band, 700 (Bd12 <MFBI Bd17>,
Bd28) 800 (Bd18, Bd19, Bd20) 850 (Bd5) / 900
(Bd8) / AWS (Bd4) / 1800 (Bd3) / 1900 (Bd2) /
2100 (Bd1) / 2600MHz (Bd7)
Antenna interface 2x SMA female (Main and Diversity)

How to start using CM2-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM2-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.

Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. – i.e. if you want to use the module in
LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G network.

Contact your mobile operator for getting packet data APN (APN = Access Point Name), username and password.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM2-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver, also connect an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna connector.
 Switch off the controller.
Insert CM2-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Select the mode of CM2-4G-GPS module.
Activate CM2-4G-GPS module.
Enter correct APN Name, APN User Name and APN User Password in controller's setpoint group CM-4G-GPS which is
accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be set on controller’s front panel
keyboard or by InteliConfig.
Enter correct Access Point Name (this information is provided by Mobile Operator). Setpoint can be set on controller's
front panel or by InteliConfig.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 – 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will automatically generate the
AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal strength bar and AirGate ID
identifier.

Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings
E02 Modem configuration error
SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for SIM to be locked by
PIN
E04 It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined APN (Access Point
Name). Possible reasons:
E context
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context) Possible reasons:
E connect
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E08 Modem configuration error
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
E19 Modem configuration error
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check

AirGate Status
Code Description
Not defined Setpoint AirGate Connection is Disabled
Wait to connect Waiting to connect
Resolving Resolving
Connecting Connecting
Creat sec chan Creating secure channel
Registering Registering
Conn inoperable Connected, inoperable
Conn operable Connected, operable
Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller

SIM card settings

SIM card must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled